buick-rendezvous-2003-owners-manual-linked a The 2003 BuickRendezvousOwnerManual
SeatsandRestraintSystems ........................... 1-1
FronSt eats ReaSreats
............................................... 1-3 ............................................... 1-9
SafetByelts ............................................. 1-22 Child Restraints ....................................... 1-49
AiBr agSystems
...................................... 1-74
RestrainSt ystemCheck
............................ 1-84
Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1
Keys ........................................................ 2-3
DoorasndLocks
....................................... 2-8
Windows ................................................. 2-13
Theft-DeterrenSt ystems ............................ 2-16
StartingandOperatingYour Vehicle ........... 2-20 Mirrors .................................................... 2-33
Onstar@System ...................................... 2-35 HomeLink@Transmitter ............................. 2-37
Storage Areas .........................................
Sunroof ..................................................
VehicPleersonalization
.............................
n 14
L-4 I
2-49 2-50
Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1
InstrumenPt anel Overview .......................... 3-4
Climate CGntrGls ...................................... "2 -L 3" R WarningLightsG, ages and Indicators ......... 3-35
MessageCenter ....................................... 3-47
Driver Information Center (DIC) .................. 3-56 Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-69
Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1 Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ........ 4-2 Towing ................................................... 4-33
Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1 Service ..................................................... 5-3 Fuel ......................................................... 5-5 Checking Things Under the Hood ............... 5-10 All-Wheel Drive ........................................ 5-46 Bulb Replacement .................................... 5-48 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ......... 5-53 Tires ...................................................... 5-55 Appearance Care ..................................... 5-87 Vehicle Identification ................................. 5-95
Electrical System ...................................... 5-96
Capacities ana Speciiicaiions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-102 Maintenance Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . 5-104
Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 6-1 Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6-2
CustomerAssistanceInformation .................... 7-1 Customer Assistance information .................. 7-2
Index ................................................................ 1
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, BUCK, the BUCK Emblem are registered trademarks and the name RENDEZVOUS is a trademark of General Motors Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the time it was printed. We reserve the right to make changes after that time without further notice. For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute the name "General Motors of Canada Limited'' for Buick Motor Division whenever it appears in this manual.
Please keep this manual in your vehicle, so it will be there if you ever need it when you're on the road. If you sell the vehicle, please leave this manual in it so the new owner can use it.
Canadian Owners
You can obtain a French copy of this manual from your dealer or from:
Helm, Incorporated P.O. Box 07130 Detroit, MI 48207
About Driving Your Vehicle
As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or an accident. See Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle on page 4-2.
How to Use This Manual
Many people read their owner's manual from beginning to end when they first receive their new vehicle. If you do this, it will help you learn about the features and controls for your vehicle. In this manual, you'll find that pictures and words work together to explain things.
Litho U.S.A. Part No. 10324218 A First Edition
ii
06/C0Oo7r/C0p2orpaMytirooigntohrtsGeneral ReservRedights All
Index
A good place to look for what you need is the Index in back of the manual. It's an alphabetical list of what's in the manual, and the page number where you'll find it.
Safety Warnings and Symbols
You will find a number of safety cautions in this book. We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you about things that could hurt you if you were to ignore the warning.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is. Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the hazard. Please read these cautions. If you don't, you or others could be hurt.
You will also find a circle with a slash through it in this book. This safety symbol means "Don't,'' "Don't do this" or "Don't let this happen."
These mean there is somethin- :hat could hurt you or other people.
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Also, in this book you will find these notices:
Notice: These mean there is something that could damage your vehicle.
A notice will tell you about something that can damage your vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered by your warranty, and it could be costly. But the notice will tell you what to do to help avoid the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in different words.
You'll also see warning labels on your vehicle. They use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
Vehicle Symbols
Your vehicle may be equipped with components and labels that use symbols instead of text. Symbols, used on your vehicle, are shown along with the text describing the operation or information relating to a specific component, control, message, gage or indicator
If you need help figuring out a specific name of a
component, gage or indicator reference the following topics in the Index:
"Engine Compartment Overview"
"Instrument Panel Overview"
"Climate Controls"
"Audio Systems"
Also see Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators on page 3-35.
IV
These are some examples of vehicle symbols you may find on your vehicle:
/1\ CAUTION
POSSIBLE INJURY
PROTECT
SHIELDING
CAUSTIC BAlTERY \CID COULD
CAUSE BURNS
AVOID SPARKS OR
FLAMES
LATCH BOTH LAP AND SHOULDER BELTS TO PROTECOT CCUPANT
*@&?
@
DO NOTTWISTSAFETY
e
BELT WHEN ATTACHING
Ea\ t AIRBAG
MOVE SEAT
$!\% FULLY
/z REARWARD*
DO NOT INSTALL A REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
SECURE
IN THIS SEATING
CHILD SEAT
POSITION
PULL BELT
COMPLETELY THENSECURE
CHILD SEAT
DO NOTINSTALL A -ORWARD-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
IN THIS SEATING POSITION
-8, - LIGHTING
MSAWSITCEHR / \
ENGINE COOLANT
TEMP
C G SIGTNUARLNS
BATTERY
ENGINE
CHARGING
COOLANT
SYSTEM
FAN
PARKING LAMPS
(a) BRAKE
FUEL
G3 COOLANT
OWNERS MANUAL
I
DAYTIME RUNNING
LAMPS
W & ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE
SERVICE
a SERVICE 1 MANUAL I;-r
V
Seats and Restraint Systems
Front Seats ...................................................... 1.3 Manual Passenger Seat .................................. 1.3 Four-Way Manual Driver Seat .......................... 1-3 Six-Way Power Seats .................................... .l -5 Manual Lumbar .............................................. 1-5 Heated Seats ................................................. 1.6 Reclining Seatbacks ........................................ 1-6 Head Restraints ............................................ -1-8
Rear Seats ....................................................... 1.9 Rear Seat Operation ...................................... .l -9 Split Bench Seats ........................................... 1.9
Captain Chairs ......................................... 1-14 Stowable Seat ......................................... -1-18
Safety Belts ................................................... 1.22 Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ................1-22
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ............................................. . l -26
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-27
Driver
..............................................
I am
I -LO
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-36
Right Front Passenger Position ....................... 1.37
Rear Seat Passengers ................................. .l -38
Center Rear Passenger Position ....................
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children and Small Adults ..........................
Safety Belt Extender .....................................
-1-42
1-44 1-48
Child Restraints ............................................. 1.49
Older Children .............................................. 1.49
Infants and Young Children ............................1.52
Child Restraint Systems ................................. 1.55
Where to Put the Restraint ............................. 1-58
Top Strap .................................................... 1-59
Top Strap Anchor Location ............................. 1-60
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for Children (LATCH System) ........................... 1-64
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the LATCH System .................,
..... -1-66
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Outside Seat Position ........
S C C Z : ~ ~2?c~hi!d Restr?.int in 8
.......... 1-66
Center Rear Seat Position .......................... 1-69
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position ............................ 1-71
1-1
Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems
Air Bag Systems ......................... ...................1.74 Where Are the Air Bags? ...............................1-77 When Should an Air Bag Inflate? ....................1-80 What Makes an Air Bag Inflate? ..................... 1-81 How Does an Air Bag Restrain? ..................... 1-81
What Will You See After an Air Bag Inflates? ....................................... 1-82
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle .........1-83
Restraint System Check .................................. 1-84 Checking Your Restraint Systems ...................1-84 Replacing RestraintSystem Parts After a Crash ............................................ 1-84
1-2
Front Seats
Manual Passenger Seat
Pull up on the lever, located on the front of the seat, to unlock and move the seat.
Four-Way Manual Driver Seat
Use the lever located on the front left side of the seat to adjust theseat forward or rearward.
Slide the seat to where you want it and release the lever. To make sure the seat is locked into place, try to move the seat back ana iorin wiiil p u r body.
Pull up the lever to unlock the seat. Slide the seat to where you want it and release the lever.
To make sure the seat is locked into place, try to move the seat back and forth with your body.
1 -3
To raise the seat, pull up
on the lever located on the
front right side of
the seat.
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver's seat while the vehicle is moving. The sudden movement could startle and confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you don't want to. Adjust the driver's seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
To lower the seat, push the lever down. Adjust the seat and release the lever.
1-4
Six-Way Power Seats
Your vehicle may have this feature. If it does, the six-way power seat control is located on the outboard sides of the driver's and front passenger's seats.
Manual Lumbar
The knob that controls this feature is located on the outboard sides of the driver's and front passenger's seats.
Move the front of the control up or down to adjust the front portion of the cushion up or down.
0 Move the rear of the control up or down to adjust the rear portion of the cushion up or down.
Lift up or push down on the whole control to move the entire seat up or down.
0 To move the whole seat forward or rearward, slide the control forward or rearward.
Turn the knob toward the front of the vehicle to increase lumbar support. Turn the knob toward the rear of the vehicle to decrease lumbar support.
1-5
Heated Seats
Your vehicle may have heated seats. If it does, the heated seat switches are located in the instrument panel switchbank.
Reclining Seatbacks
This feature will quickly heat the lower cushions and lower back of the driver's and front passenger's seat. The left switch is for the driver's seat and the right switch is for the front passenger's seat.
Press the top of the switch to turn the heater on. Press the bottom of the switch to turn the heater off. The heated seat switch will turn off when the ignition is turned to OFF and will resume operation when the ignition is turned to ON, unless the switch is turned off
To adjust the seatback, pull up on the lever located on the outboard sides of both the driver's and the front passenger`s seats. It is easier to recline the seat if you lean forward, taking your weight off the seatback.
1-6
But don't have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is moving.
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is in motion can be dangerous. Even ifyou buckle up, your safety belts can't do their job when you're reclined like this.
The shoulder belt can't do its jobbecause it won't be against your body. Instead, it will be in front of you. In a crash you could go into it, receiving neck or other injuries.
The lap belt can't do it's job either. In a crash the belt could goup over your abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety belt
properly.
1
1-7
Head Restraints
Adjust your head restraint so that the topof the restraint
is closest to the top of your head. This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.
The front seat head restraints are adjustable. Slide the
head restraint up or down to adjust it.
On some models, the head restraints tilt forward and rearward also.
The rear seat head restraints in your vehicle may be adjustable. They work the same as the front seat head restraints, except they do not tilt forwardor rearward.
1-8
Rear Seats
Rear Seat Operation
The rear seats in your vehicle have seat operating features to adjust, fold, remove and reinstall the seats. By using the seat operating procedures, in the correct order, you can easily remove the seats from your vehicle.
When you put the seats back in the vehicle, be sure to follow the label on the back of the seat for proper location.
Split Bench Seats
If your vehicle has the split bench seat, the seatbacks can be folded forward or reclined individually and the sections can be flipped forward or removed individually.
Folding or Reclining the Seatbacks
If the seatback isn't locked, it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
To recline the seatback on base-level split bench seats, lift up on the recliner lever located on the outboard side of the seatback.
Base-Level
1 -9
To recline the seatback on up-level split bench seats, push forward on the recliner lever located on the outboard side of the seatback.
Removing the Split Bench Seat
Each section of the split bench seat can be flipped forward or removed individually.
Up-Level
Move the seatback to the desired position.
It is easier to raise or lower the seatback if you lean forward and take the weight off the seatback.
The seatbacks on each section also fold forward to put items behindthe seats.
Lift up or push forward on the recliner lever and fold the seatback forward. The seatback will lock into place when you push it back to the upright position.
After raising a seatback to an upright position, push and pull on the seatback to check that it is locked upright.
1. Unlatch the shoulder belt from the lap-belt.
2. Make sure that the seatback is in the upright position.
3. Lift up or push forward on the seatback recliner lever to fold the seatback forward.
1-10
Base-Level
4. For base-level split bench seats, pull the lever at the base of the seat on the outboard side to release the rear latches from the floor pins and flip the seat forward.
Up-level splli 7
fUf
1 - . - I ---I!I L---L
-err+-
rr,,p.h;nn
U G I ILI I acaia, UUI 1 1 1 1 I U C ~~ U Wl y
forward on the recliner lever to release the
rear latches from the floor pins and flip the seat
forward.
The seat can stay in this position or it can be ;srr;oved from the vehic!e by fo!!nwing the next steps.
5. To release the front latches, squeeze the angled latch release bar toward the straight crossbar.
6. Remove the seat by rocking it slightly toward the rear of the vehicle and then pulling it out.
Repeat these steps for the other section of the split hench s w f
1-11
Replacing the Split Bench Seat
If the seatback isn't locked, it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always press rearward on theseatback to be sure it is locked.
I
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not properly attached, or twisted won't provide the protection needed in a crash. The person wearing the belt couldbe seriously injured. After installing the seat, always checkto be sure that the safety belts are properly routed and attached, and arenot twisted.
Make sure that the seatback is in the folded forward
position and that the safety belts are on the correct
1 A seat that isn't locked into place properly can
move around in a collision or sudden stop. People in the vehicle could be injured. Be sure to lockthe seat into place properly when
section of the seat.
Don't put the sections of the bench seat in so that they face rearward because they won't latch that way.
The split bench seat sections have seat position labels, located on the back of each section, showing where the section must go.
installing it.
The seat must be placed in the proper location for the
legs to attach correctly.
1-12
1. Squeeze the angled latch release bar toward the straight crossbar while placing the front hooks of
the bench seat onto the front two floor pins.
2. Make sure that the bench seat is angled so that the front hooks clear the floor pins. If the front legs are not attached correctly, the rear legs will not attach to the rear set of floor pins.
1-13
Captain Chairs
Folding or Reclirhg the Seatbacks
I
If the seatback isn't locked, it couldmove
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always press rearward on the seatback to be sureit is locked.
3. Firmly push the rear hooks onto the rear floor pins by pushing down on the rear of the seat.
4. Try to raise the seat to check that it is locked down.
5. Lift the seatback recliner lever and raise the seatback until it locks upright.
6. Push and pull on the seatback to check that it is locked upright.
7. Attach the lap belt.
If your vehicle has the captain's chairs, the seatbacks can be reclined or folded forward.
1-14
Removing the Captain's Chairs
1. Make sure that the seatback is in the upright position.
2. Lift the seatback recliner lever to fold the seatback forward.
To recline the seatback, lift up on the recliner lever located on the outboard side of the seatback. Use the recliner lever to move the seatback to the desired position.
It is easier to raise or lower the seatback if you lean forward and take the weight off the seatback.
The seatbacks on the second row captain's chairs fold forward the same way.
After raising a seatback to an upright position, push and pull on the seatback to check that it is locked upright.
3. Pull up on the lever, located at the base on the outboard side of the seat, to release the rear latches from the floor pins.
1-15
Replacing the Captain's Chairs
If the seatback isn't locked,it C O L , ~m~ ove forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury to the person sittintghere. Always press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is locked.
I
4. The seat can then be lifted off the front floor pins.
5. Remove the seat by rocking it slightly toward the rear of the vehicle and then pulling it out.
Repeat these steps for the other captain's chair.
A seat that isn't locked into placepropGiiy can move around in a collision or sudden stop. People in the vehicle could beinjured. Be sure to lock the seat into place properlywhen installing it.
1-16
A safety belt that IS improperly routed, not properly attached, or twisted won'tprovide the protection needed in a crash. The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured. After installing the seat, always check to be sure that the safety belts are properly routed and attached, and are not twisted.
Make sure that the seatback is in the folded forward position and that the safety belts are on the correct side of the chair.
Don't put the chairs in so that they face rearward because they won't latch that way.
The captain's chairs have seat position labels, located
on the back of each section, showing where the section
rnrnet IIIuaL
ymw- .
The seat must be placed in the proper location for the legs to attach correctly.
1. Hook the front latches over the front floor pins.
1-17
Stowable Seat
The stowable seat is a two passenger bench seat and
comes with the rear convenience center. See Rear Convenience Center on page 2-46 for more information. The stowable seat can be removed and replaced or, with the seatback folded, it can lie flat with the convenience center.
Foldi-2 the SeatV-ck
2. Push the rear of the seat down to lock the rear latches onto the rear set of floor pins.
3. Push and pull on the seat to check that it is properly attached.
If the seatback isn't locked, it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury to the person sitting there.Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
1-18
To fold the seatback down, pull up on the lever located on the back of the seat. Push down on the seatback until it is locked into place.
Push and pull on the seatback to make sure that it is locked into place.
To raise the seatback, do one of the following:
From the rear of the vehicle, pull up on the lever to
release the seatback. Then pull the strap, located
on the right side of the seat, to pull the seatback up.
~
T
I
Ir.le-
s
e
a
i
b
~
ki?&s2
p
~
~
k:Ge StO;;{t
k s:;~li;X
the side of the seatback when not in use, or
0 from the passenger's side door, pull up on the lever to release the seatback. Then push up on the seatback to raise the seat.
Push and pull on the seatback to make sure that it is locked into the upright position.
Removing the Stowable Seat
I . Remove the convenience center, if it is in the
vehicle. See Rear Convenience Center on
page 2-46 for more information.
2. Make sure all items are off of the stowable seat.
3. If the seatback is down, put the seatback in
its upright position before removing the seat. See "Folding the Seatback" listed previously.
4. From the front of the bench seat, remove the two nuts from the brackets, located on the floor on each side.
5. From behind the bench seat, fold the seatback down.
6. Remove the rear nuts located on the floor on each side.
7. Remove the seat by rocking it slightly toward the rear of the vehicle and then pulling it out through the rear of the vehicle. This should be done in one motion.
8. Put the nuts back onto the screws so the nuts do not get misplaced.
1-15
Rep'-cir -Ithe Sto---ableS-7t
If the seatback isn't locked, it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always press rearward on the seatback to be suirteis locked.
A safety belt that is improper11 luted, not properly attached, or twisted won't provide the protection needed in a crash.The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured. After installing theseat, always check to be sure that the safety beltsare properly routed and attached, andare not twisted.
A seat that isn't locked into place properly can move around in a collision or sudden stop. People in the vehicle could be injured. Be sure to lock the seat into place properly when installing it.
Do not put the stowable seat in so that it faces rearward. The stowable seat has to go in before the rear convenience center. See Rear Convenience Centeron page 2-46for more information.
1-20
The stowable seathas seat position labels, located on the backof the seat, showingwhere the seat must go.
The seat must be placed in the proper location for the legs to attach correctly.
Make sure that the seatback is folded forward before beginning this procedure.
1. Remove the nuts from the screws.
2. Place the stowable seat on the vehicle floor so that the brackets are placed over the screws.
3. Reinstall the nuts back onto the screws. Torque to approximately 18 lb ft (25 Nom).
4. Try to raise the seat to make sure that it is locked down.
5. Raise the seatback to its upright position. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure that it is locked into place.
1-21
Safety Belts
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
not do with safety belts.
n
Don't let anyone ride where he or she can't wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a crash and you're not wearing a safety belt, your injuries can be much worse. You canhit things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it.You can be seriously injured or killed. In the same crash, you might notbe, if you are buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt, and check that your passengers' belts are fastened properly too.
It is extremely dangerous t o ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicleI.n a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killedD. o not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly.
1-22
Your vehicle has a light that comes on as a reminder to buckle UP. See
Safety Belt Reminder Light on page 3-38.
Why Safety Belts Work
Whenyou ride in or on anything, YOU go as fast as it goes.
I
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law says to wear safety belts. Here's why: They work.
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does matter... a lot!
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it's just a seat on wheels.
1-23
3
(D
0
S
(D
U
(D (D
Q
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts
0:Won't I be trapped in the vehicle after an
accident if I'm wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be - whether you're wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you're upside down. And your chance of being conscious during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if you are belted.
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does. You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance, and your strongest bones take the forces. That's why safety belts make such good sense.
Q: If my vehicle has air bags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A: Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be in
most of them in the future. But they are supplemental systems only; so they work with safety belts - not instead of them. Every air bag system ever offered for sale has required the use of safety belts. Even if you're in a vehicle that has air bags, you still have to buckle up to get the most protection. That's true not only in frontal collisions, but especially in side and other collisions.
1-26
Q: If I'm a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you're in an
accident - even one that isn't your fault - you and your passengers can be hurt. Being a good
driver doesn't protect you from things beyond your control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of home. And the greatest number of serious injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph (65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be riding in your vehicle, see Older Children on page 7-49
or lnfants and Young Children on page 1-52. Follow those rules for everyone's protection.
First, you'll want to know which restraint systems your vehicle has.
We'll start with the driver position.
1-27
Driver Position
This part describes the driver's restraint system.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here's how to wear it properly.
1. Close and lock the door. 2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. To see
how, see "Seats" in the Index.
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you. Don't let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across you more slowly.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure. If the belt isn't long enough, see Safety
Belt Extender on page 1-48.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-28
'I
5. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this
applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you'd be
!f slid I-jndpr it: Ian holt thn Il-e-3- 3 l:lln,-cll~y, +IU m J-1II;U Anb IUtIn1rU ln UrI ' I I V
YV...
vnll
--. J
--
the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This
could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder, across the chest.
These parts of the body are best able to take belt
restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there's a sudden stop or crash, or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
1-29
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt adjuster to the height that is right for you.
To move it down, push down on the button and move the height adjuster to the desired position. You can move the adjuster up just by pushing up on the shoulder belt guide. After you move the adjuster to where you want it, try to move it down without pushing the button down to make sure it has locked into position.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt is centered on your shoulder. The belt should be
away from your face and neck, but not falling off your
shoulder.
1-30
Q: What's wrong with this?
You cabne seriously hut f yc
ulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
1-31
Q: What's wrong with this?
I
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash, the belt would go up over your abdomen. The belt forces would bethere, not at the pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.
1 -32
Q: What's wrong with this? A: The belt is over an armrest.
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes over an armrest like this. The belt would be much too high. In a crash, you can slide under the belt. The belt force would then be applied at the abdomen, not at the pelvic bones, and that could cause serious or fatal injuries. Be sure the belt goes under the armrests.
1-33
Q: What's wrong with this?
You can be seriously injuredif you wear the shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your body would move toofar forward, which would increase the chanceof head and neck injury. Also, the belt would apply too much force to the ribs, which aren't as strong as shoulder bones. You could also severely injure internal organs like your liver orspleen.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1 -34
Q: What's wrong with this?
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In a crash, you wouldn't have the full width of the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted, make it straight so it can work properly, or ask your dealer to fix it.
~~~
A : The belt is twisted across the body.
1-35
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle. The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage
both the belt and your vehicle.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible, below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
1-36
The best way to protectthe fetus is to protect the mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it's more likely that the fetus won't be hurt in a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
Right Front Passenger Position
To learn how to wear the right front passenger's safety
belt properly, see Driver Position on page 7-28.
The right front passenger's safety belt works the same way as the driver's safetybelt - except for onething. If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle, tilt the latch plate and keep pulling until you can buckle the belt.
1-37
Rear Seat Passengers
It's very important for rear seat passengers to buckle up! Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
Rear passengers who aren't safety belted can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions
1-38
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The positions next to the windows have lap-shoulder belts. Here's how to wear one properly.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you. Don't let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across you more slowly.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure. If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt Extender on page 1-48. Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you wouid be abie io Unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-39
3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies force to the pelvic bones. And you'd be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest.
These parts of the body are best able to take belt
restraining forces.
1-40
The safety belt locks if there's a sudden stop or a crash, or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
Each position next to the windowsin the second row has a shoulder belt height adjuster. Move the shoulder belt adjuster to the height that is right for you.
To move it down, push down on the button and move the height adjuster to thedesired position. You can move the height adjuster up just by pushing up on the shoulder belt guide. After you move the adjuster to where you want it, try to move it down without pushing the button down to make sure it has locked into position.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt is centered on your shoulder.The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
.. You G-.) be seriously hurt jour shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too much, which could increase injury. The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
E
1-41
Center Rear Passenger Position
Lap-Shoulder Belt
If your vehicle has a bench seat, someone can sit in the center position.
When you sit in the center seating position, you have a lap safety belt, which has no retractor. You also have a shoulder belt, which has a retractor. In order to have the protection of the shoulder belt, you must first connect it to the lap belt.
1. Remove the shoulder belt from its stowage location in the roof and pull it all the way down to the lap belt.
1-42
2. Insert the metal knob on the shoulder belt into the keyhole on the lap belt buckle as shown. Be sure to slide the shoulder belt part into the keyhole until it locks into place.
3. To make the lap belt longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it along the belt.
1-43
To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown until the belt is snug
4. Buckle, position and release the lap-shoulder belt the same way as the other lap-shoulder belts. If the belt isn't long enough, see Safety Belt Extender on page 1-48.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults
Your vehicle may have this feature already. If it doesn't, you can get it from any GM dealer.
This feature will provide added safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown booster seats and for small adults. When installed on a shoulder belt, the comfort guide better positions the belt away from the neck and head.
There is one guide available for each passenger position in the second row rear seat. To provide added safety belt comfort for children who have outgrown child restraints and booster seats and for smaller adults, the comfort guides may be installed on the shoulder belts. Here's how to install a comfort guide and use the safety belt:
1-44
Second Row Outside Positions
For second row outside positions do the following:
1. Remove the guide from its storage clip located on the sidewall next to the outer side of each outslcle passenger position.
L
2. Place the guide over the belt and insert the two edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.
1-45
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat. The guide must be on top of the belt.
1-46
4. Buckle, position and release the safety belt as described in Rear Seat Passengers on page 7-38. Make sure that the shoulderbelt crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the belt edges together so that you can take them out of the guides. Pull the guide upward to expose its storage clip, and then slide the guide onto the clip. Turn the guide and the clip inward, leaving only the loop of elastic cord exposed.
5
a,
5
S
0
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten around you, you should use it. But if a safety belt isn't long enough to fasten, your dealer will order you an extender. It's free. When you go in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the extender will be long enough for you. The extender will be just for you, and just for the seat in your vehicle that you choose. Don't let someone else use it, and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. To wear it, just attach it to the regular safety belt.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat. The guide must be on top of the belt.
4. Buckle, position and release the safety belt as described in Center Rear Passenger Position on page 7-42. Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the elastic cord, remove it from the comfort guide. The elastic cord will go back under the head restraint.
1 -48
Child Restraints
Older Children
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts? A: If possible, an older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips, just touching the top of the thighs. It should never be worn over the abdomen, which could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in a crash.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear seat.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety belts properly.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should wear the vehicle's safety belts.
1-49
1-50
Never do this.
I
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt can't properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children cabne
crushed together and seriously injured.A belt
must be used by only one personat a time.
Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but the childis so small that the shoulder belt is very close to the child's face or neck?
A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to a window,
move the child toward the center of the vehicle. If the child is sitting in the center rear seat passenger position, move the child toward the safety belt buckle. In either case, be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child's shoulder, so that in a crash the child's upper body would have the restraint that belts provide.
If the child is sitting in a rear seat, see "Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides" in the Index.
Never do this. Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is behind the child. If the child wears the belt in this way, in a crash the child might slide under the belt. The belt's force would then be applied right on the child's abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal injuries. The lap portion of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the child's thighs. This applies belt force to the child's pelvic bones in a crash.
1-51
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes infants and all other children. Neither the distance traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact, the law in every state in the United States and in every Canadian province says children up to some age must be restrained while in a vehicle.
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles, they should have the protection provided by appropriate restraints. Young children should not use the vehicle's adult safety belts alone, unless there is no other choice. Instead, they need to use a child restraint.
1-52
People should never hold a baby in their arms while riding in a vehicle. A baby doesn't weigh
-- much until a crash. During a crash a baby
will become so heavy it is not possible to hold
CAUTIO(NC:ontinued)
it. For example, in a crash at only 25 mph (40 km/h), a 12-lb. (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly become a 240-lb. (110 kg) force on a person's arms. A baby should be secured in an appropriate restraint.
Children who are up against, or very close to, any air bag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder belts offer outstanding protection for adults and older children, but not for young children and infants. Neither the vehicle's safety belt system nor its air bag system is designed for them. Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide.
1-53
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle's owner, are available in four basic types. Selection of a particular restraint should take into consideration not only the child's weight, height and age but also whether or not the restraint will be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will be used.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are many different models available. When purchasing a child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer's instructions that come with the restraint state the weight and height limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition, there are many kinds of restraints available for children with special needs.
Newborninfants need con ete support, including support for the head anndeck. This is necessary because a newborn infant's neck is weak and its head weighs so much compared with the rest ofits body. In a crash, an infant in a rear-facing seat settles into the restraint, so the crash forces canbe distributed across the strongest part aonf infant's body, the back and shoulders. Infants always should be securedin appropriate infant restraints.
1-54
Child Restraint Systems
The body structure of a young childis quite unlike thatof an adult or older child, for whom the safely belts are designed. A young child's hip bones are still so small that the vehicle's regular safety belt may not remain low on the hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle up around the child's abdomen. In a crash, the belt would apply force on a bodyarea that's unprotected by any bony structure. This alone could cause serious or fatal injuries. Young children always should be securedin appropriate child restraints.
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a moior venicie, is an infant restraint system aesigneu to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat surface. Make sure that the infant's head rests toward the center of the vehicle.
1-55
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with the seating surface against the back of the infant. The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for the child's body with the harnessand also sometimes with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.
1-56
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed to improve the fit of the vehicle's safety belt system. Some booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner, and cnmn -v. I .V high-bsck ,hcc+er rezts hal~e2 $!\JS-;C~$ ks:r,~ss.
A booster seat can also help a child to see out the window.
Q: How do child restraints work? A: A child restraint system is any device designed for
use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position children. A built-in child restraint system is a permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on child restraint system is a portable one, which is purchased by the vehicle's owner.
For many years, add-on child restraints have used the adult belt system in the vehicle. To help reduce the chance of injury, the child also has to be secured within the restraint. The vehicle's belt system secures the add-on child restraint in the vehicle, and the add-on child restraint's harness system holds the child in place within the restraint.
One system, thethree-point harness, has straps that come down over each of the infant's shoulders and buckle together at the crotch. The five-point harness system hastwo shoulder straps, two hip straps and a crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hip straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulderstraps that are aiiachea io a iiai paa wnicn rests iow against tne child's body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield has straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shield that swingsup or to the side.
1-57
When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is, it will have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety standards.
Then follow the instructions forthe restraint. You may find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system in your vehicle, but the child also has to be secured within the restraint to help reduce the chance of personal injury. When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the instructions that come with the restraint which may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this manual. The child restraint instructions are important, so if they are not available, obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer.
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. General Motors, therefore, recommends that child restraints be secured in a rear seat, including an infant riding in a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a forward-facing child seat and an older child riding in a booster seat. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the front passenger seat. Here's why:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger's air bag inflates. This is because the back of the rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating air bag. Always secure a rear-facing child restraint in a rear seat.
You may secure a forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat, but before you do, always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go. It's better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in your vehicle - even when no child is in it.
1 -58
Top Strap
Some child restraints have a top strap, or "top tether." It
can help restrain the child restraint during a collision. For it to work, a top strap must be properly anchored to the vehicle. Some top strap-equipped child restraints are designed for use with or without the top strap being anchored. Others require the top strap always to be anchored. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for your child restraint. If yours requires that the top strap be anchored, don't use the restraint unless it is anchored properly. If the child restraint does not have a top strap, one can be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints. Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit is available.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child restraints have a top strap, and that the strap be anchored. In the United States, some child restraints +Q hz\!e 9 t-n-nr c--t.r-ap- !f y m - !~ h i ! r J p ~ t - z i nhtas 2 top strap, it should be anchored.
1-59
Anchor the top strap to one of the following anchor points. Be sure to use an anchor point located on the same side of the vehicle as the seating position where the child restraint will be placed. If you have an adjustable head restraint, route the top strap under it.
If you're using a top strap-equipped child restraint in the second row center bench seat and need totemporarily transport a flat tire for repair, move the child restraint to a rear seat outboard position. See Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Outside Seat Position on page 1-66 for more on this, including important safety information.
Once you have the top strap anchored, you'll be ready to secure the child restraint itself. Tighten the top strap when and as the child restraint manufacturer's instructions say.
Top Strap Anchor Location
Captain's Chairs
1-60
Second Row Outside Positions Bench Seat
Second Row Center Position Bench Seat without Third Row Seat
1-61
Your vehicle has top strap anchors already installed for the rear seating positions. An anchor bar for a top strap is located at the rear of the seat cushion for each second row outboard seating position and the anchor bar for the center position for the bench seat is located on the floor behind the second row seats. If the vehicle has the extended rear convenience center, you need to remove a plastic plug and look under the convenience center to find the anchor bar for the center position for the bench seat.
1-62
Second Row Center Position Bench Seat with Third Row Seat
If the vehicle has a third row seat and the seatback is upright, there is an anchor strap located between the third row seatback and cushion to anchor the child restraint for the second row center position bench seat.
-.
Second Row Center Position Bench Seat with Third Row Seat Folded Down
If the vehicle has a third row seat and the seatback is
folded, there is anchor on the back of the third row seat
for the second row center position bench seat.
Third Row Passenger's Side Outside Position
There is also a top strap anchor for third row passenger's side outside position. Locate the anchor symboi on `rhe iiap oi carpei ueilina ihe seai. i i i i up ii~e carpet to access the anchor.
1-63
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for Children (LATCH System)
Your vehicle has the LATCH system. You'll find anchors (A) in the second row outside passenger positions.
To assist you in locating the lower anchors for this child restraint system, each seating position with the LATCH system will have latches between the seatback and cushion.
In order to use the system, you need either a forward-facing child restraint that has attaching points (9) at its base and a top tether anchor (C), or a rear-facing child restraint that has attaching points(B), as shown here.
1-64
If a LATCH-type child restraint isn't attached to
its anchorage points, the restraint won't be
able to protect a child sittingthere. In a crash,
the child could be seriously injured or killed.
Make sure that a LATCH-type child restraint is
properly installed using the anchorage points,
or use the vehicle's safety belts to secure the
t
restraint. See "Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Outside Seat Position" in the Index for
information on how to secure a child restraint
in your vehicle using the vehicle's safety belts.
With this system, use the LATCH system instead of the vehicle's safety belts to secure a child restraint.
1-65
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the LATCH System
1. Find the anchors for the seating position you want to use, where the bottom of the seatback meets the back of the seat cushion.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Attach the anchor points on the child restraint to the anchors in the vehicle. The child restraint instructions will show you how.
4. If the child restraint is forward-facing, attach the top strap to the top strap anchor. See Top Strap on page 1-59.Tighten the top strap according to the child restraint instructions.
5. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, simply unhook the top strap from the top tether anchor and then disconnect the anchor points.
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Outside Seat Position
1-66
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for Children (LATCH System) on page 1-64.
You'll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See Top Strap on
page 1-59 if the child restraint has one. Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say.
1. Put the restraint on the seat
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle's safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how.
:+--
u.k,::,J
\ ' 0::
b&?"'&32t
*;"ah* ? m W - - L - ;
..-,-:c_,.,",./_xI _<7 -,,, ^"l-.l.
Tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if needed.
If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child's face or neck, put it behind the child restraint.
1-67
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-68
4. To tighten the belt, pull up on the shoulder belt while you push down on the child restraint. If you're using a forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt.
5. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle's safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger.
Securing a Child Restraint in a Center Rear Seat Position
The center rear seating position has a lap-shoulder belt. To secure a child restraint in this position, you'll use only the lap part of the belt. Disconnect the shoulder part of the belt and store it before securing child restraint. See Center Rear Passenger Position on page 1-42.
If you're using a top strap-equipped child restraint in the
center rear seat and need to temporarily transport a
_ _ -_"_ _ _ flat tire for repair, move the child restraint to a rear seat
---- outboard position. See Securing a Child Restraint in
a uuisiue Rear n
.
m - _ L n--:c-.-
4 CQ $ - "
seal rv3t1wtt V I I paye -ow
I I IuI G I
this, including important safety information.
Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure thechild in thechild restraint when and as the instructions say.
See Top Strap on page 1-59 if the chiid restraint
has one.
1. Make the belt as long as possible by tilting the latch plate and pulling it along the belt.
2. Put the restraint on the seat. 3. Run the vehicle's safety belt through or around the
restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how.
1-69
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. To tighten the belt, pull its free end while you push down on the child restraint. If you're using a forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful to use your knee to push the child restraint as you tighten the belt.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle's safety belt. When you remove the child restraint, be sure to reconnect the lap and shoulder parts of the belt so they will be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger.
1-70
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position
Your vehicle has a front passenger air bag. Never put a rear facing child restraint in this seat. Here's why:
Although a rear seat is a safer place, you can secure a forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat.
You'll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See Top Strap on page 1-59 if the child restraint has one. Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say.
1. Because your vehicle has a right front passenger's air bag, always move the seat as far back as it will go before securing a forward-facing child restraint. See Manual Passenger Seat on page 1-3.
2. Put the restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle's safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how.
Tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if needed.
A child in a rear-facing h i l d restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the front passenger's air bag inflates. This is because the back of the rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating air bag. Always secure a rear-facing child restraint in a rear seat.
I
1-71
If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child's face or neck, put it behind the child restraint.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-72
5. To tighten the belt, pull up on the shoulder belt while you push down on the child restraint. You may find it helpful touse your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle's safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger.
1-73
Air Bag Systems
This part explains the frontal and side impact air bag systems.
Your vehicle has air bags - a frontal air bag for the
driver and another frontal air bag for the right front
passenger. Your vehicle may also have a side impact air bag. Side impact air bags are available for the driver and right front passenger
If your vehicle has a side impact air bag for the driver, the words AIR BAG will appear on the air bag covering on the side of the driver's seatback closest to the door.
If your vehicle has a side impact air bag for the right front passenger, the words AIR BAG will appear on the air bag covering on the side of the right front passenger's seatback closest to the door.
Frontal air bags are designed to help reduce the risk of injury from the force of an inflating frontal air bag. But these air bags must inflate very quickly to do their job and comply with federal regulations.
1-74
Here are the most important things to know about the air bag systems:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crasn if you aren't wearing your safety bel-t even if
you have air bags. Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected from it. Air bags are designed to work with safety belts but don't replace them.
Frontal air bags for the driver and right front passenger are designed to work onlyin moderate to severe crashes where the front of your vehicle hits something. They aren't designed to inflate at all in rollover, rear or low-speed frontal crashes, or in many side crashes..And; for some unrestrained occupants, frontal air bags may provide less protection in frontal crashes than more forceful air bags have provided in the past.
CAUTION: (Continued)
The side ir..,-act -.r bags for the river and ~
right front passenger are designed to inflate only in moderate to severe crashes wheresomething hits the side of your vehicle. They aren't designed to inflate in frontal, in rollover or in rear crashes.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
belt properly-whether or not there's an air
bag for that person.
1-75
Both frontal and side impact air bags inflate with great force, faster than the blink of an eye. If you're too close to an inflating abirag, as you would be if you were leaning forwardit, could seriously injure you. Safety belts help keep you in position for air bag inflation before and during a crash. Alwayswear your safety belt, even with frontal airbags. The driver should sit as far back as possible whilestill maintaining control of the vehicle. Front occupants should not lean on or sleep against the door.
- --
Anyone who is u p against, or very close to, any air bag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder belts offer the best protection for adults, but not for young children and infants. Neither the vehicle's safety belt system norits air bag system is designed for them. Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide. Always secure children properly in your vehicle.To read how, see the part of this manual called"Older Children" or "Infants and Young Children".
There is a air bag readiness light on the instrument panel cluster, which shows the air bag symbol.
Where Are the Air Bags?
The system checks the air bag electrical system for malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical problem. See Air Bag Readiness Light onpage 3-39 for more information.
- - The driver's frontal
- - -I
>Lt=t=l
.-I:I.-1y-.
. .L - 1
V V I IGGl.
air
bag
is
in
the
middle
of
the
1-77
The right front passenger's frontal air bag is in the instrument panel on the passenger's side.
If your vehicle has one, the driver's side impact air bag is in the side of the driver's seatback closest to the door.
1-78
If something is between an occupant and an air bag, the bag might not inflate properly or it might force the object into that person causing severe injury or even death. The path of an inflating air bag must be kept clear. Don't put anything between an occupant and an air bag, and don't attach or put anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near any other air bag covering. Don't let seatcovers block the inflation path of a side impact air bag.
If your vehicle has one, the right front passenger's side impact air bag is in the side of the passenger's seatback closest to the door.
1-79
When Should an Air Bag Inflate?
The driver's and right front passenger's frontal air bags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal crashes. But they are designed to inflate only if the impact speed is above the system's designed "threshold level."
In addition, your vehicle has "dual stage" frontal air bags, which adjust the amount of restraint according to crash severity. For moderate frontal impacts, these air bags inflate at a level less than full deployment. For more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs. If the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wall that doesn't move or deform, the threshold level for the reduced deployment is about 12 to 18 mph (19 to 29 km/h), and the threshold level for a full deployment is about 18 to 24 mph (29 to 38.5 km/h). The threshold level can vary, however, with specific vehicle design, so that it can be somewhat above or below this range.
If your vehicle strikes something that will move or deform, such as a parked car, the threshold level will be higher. The driver's and right front passenger's frontal air bags are not designed to inflate in rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts because inflation would not help the occupant.
Your vehicle may or may not have a side impact air
bag. See Air Bag Systems on page 7-74. Side impact air
bags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes. A side impact air bag will inflate if the crash severity is above the system's designed "threshold level." The threshold level can vary with specific vehicle design. Side impact air bags are not designed to inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts, rollovers or rear impacts, because inflation would not help the occupant. A side impact air bag will only deploy on the side of the vehicle that is struck.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an air bag should have inflated simply because of the damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were. For frontal air bags, inflation is determined by the angle of the impact and how quickly the vehicle slows down in frontal and near-frontal impacts. For side impact air bags, inflation is determined by the location and severity of the impact.
1-80
What Makes an Air Bag Inflate?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the air bag sensing system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. For both frontal and side impact air bags, the sensing system triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which inflates the air bag. The inflator, the air bag and related hardware are all part of the air bag modules. Frontal air bag modules are located inside the steering wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles with side impact air bags, the air bag modules are located in the seatback closest to the driver's and/or right front passenger's door.
How Does an Air Bag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions, even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside of the vehicle. The air bag supplements the protection
provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute the force of
the impact more evenly over the occupant's upper body, stopping the occupant more gradually. But the frontal air bags would not help you in many types of collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts, and many side impacts, primarily because an occupant's motion is not toward the air bag. Side impact air bags would not help you in many types of collisions, including frontal or near frontal collisions, rollovers, and rear impacts, primarily because an occupant`s motion is not toward those air bags. Air bags should never be regarded as anything more than a supplement to safety belts, and then only in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions for the driver's and right front passenger's frontal air bags, and only in moderate to severe side collisions for vehicle's with a driver's and right front passenger's side impact air bag.
1-81
What Will You See After an Air Bag
Inflates?
After the air bag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly that some people may not even realize the air bag inflated. Some components of the air bag module will be hot for a short time. These components include the steering wheel hub for the driver's frontal air bag and the instrument panel for the right front passenger's frontal air bag. For vehicles with side impact air bags, the side of the seatback closest to the driver's and/or right front passenger's door will be hot. The parts of the bag that come into contact with you may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There will be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the deflated air bags. Air bag inflation doesn't prevent the driver from seeing or being able to steer the vehicle, nor does it stop people from leaving the vehicle.
When an air bag inflates, there is dust in the air. This dust could cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so. If you have breathing problems but can't get out of the vehicle after an air bag inflates, then get fresh air by opening a window or a door.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate an air bag, windshields are broken by vehicle deformation. Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the right front passenger air bag.
Air bags are designed to inflate only once. After an air bag inflates, you'll need some new parts for your air bag system. If you don't get them, the air bag system won't bethere to help youin another crash. A new systemwill include air bag modules and possibly other parts. The service manual for your vehicle covers the need to replaceother parts.
1-82
Your vehicle is equipped withan electronic frontal sensor, which helpsthe sensing system distinguish between a moderatefrontal impact and a more severe frontal impact. Yourvehicle is also equipped with acrash sensing anddiagnostic module, which records informationabout the frontal air bag system. The module recordsinformation about the readiness of the system, whenthe system commands air bag inflation and driver's safetbyelt usage at deployment. The module also records speed, engineRPM, brake and throttle data.
Let only qualifiedtechnicians workon your air bag systems. Improper servicecan mean that an air bag system won't work properly. Seyeour dealer for service.
Notice: If you damage the covering for the driver's or the right front passenger's airbag, or the air bag covering on the driver's and right front passenger's seatback, the bag may not work preper?;c VnL! !??E;' h2VP !e rPp!EPP !he sir hsan module in the steeringwheel, both the air bag module and the instrument panel for the right front passenger's air bag, or both the air bag module and seatback for the driver's and right front passenger's side impact airbag. Do not open or break the air bag coverings.
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped
Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced. There are parts of the air bag systems in several places around your vehicle. Your dealer and the service manual have information about servicing your vehicle and the air bag systems. To purchase a service manual, see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7-9.
For up to 10 seconds -..er the ignition keyis turned off and the battery is disconnected, an air bag can still inflate during improper service. You can be injured if you are close to an air bag when it inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. They are probably part of the air
bag sysiem. Be sureio ioiiow proper service
procedures, and make sure the person performing work for you is qualified to dsoo.
The air bag systems do not need regular maintenance.
1-83
Restraint System Check
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job, have it repaired.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, and have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system does not need regular maintenance.)
Replacing Restraint System Parts r'ter a Crash
A crash can damage the restraint systems in your vehicle. A damaged restraint systemmay not properly protect the person usinigt, resulting in serious injury or even deathin a crash. To help make sure your restraint systems are working properlyafter a crash, have them inspected and any necessary replacements madeas soon as possible.
If you've had a crash, do you need new belts or LATCH system parts? After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary. But if thebelts were stretched, as they would beif worn during a more severe crash, then you need new parts.
1-84
If the LATCH system was being used during a more severe crash, you may need new LATCH system parts.
If youevesr ee a label on the driver's or right front
passenger's safety belt that says to replace the belt, be sure to do so. Then the new belt will be there to help protect you in a collision. You would see this label on the belt near the door opening.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision damage also may mean you will need to have LATCH system, safety belt or seatparts repaired or replaced.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt or LATCH system wasn't being used at the time of
the collision. If an air bag inflates, you'll need to replace air bag system parts. See the part on the air bag system earlier in this section.
1-85
Section 2 Features and Controls
Keys ............................................................... 2.3
Remote Keyless Entry System ......................... 2.4 Remote Keyless Entry System Operation ...........2.5
Doors and Locks ............................................. 2.8 Door Locks .................................................... 2.8
Power Door Locks .......................................... 2-9 Delayed Locking ............................................. 2.9
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ................2.9
Rear Door Security Locks .............................. 2-10 Lockout Protection ........................................ 2.11 Leaving Your Vehicle .................................... 2-1 1
Liftgate ........................................................ 2.11
Windows ........................................................ 2.13 Power Windows ............................................ 2.14 Sun Visors ................................................... 2.15
Theft-Deterrent Systems .................................. Content Theft-Deterrent .................................
PASS-Key@Ill ..............................................
PASS-Key@Ill Operation ...............................
2.16 2.16 2-17 2.18
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2.20
New Vehicle Break-In .................................... 2.20
Ignition Positions .......................................... 2.20
Starting Your Engine ..................................... 2-21
Engine Coolant Heater .................................. 2-22
Automatic Transaxle Operation ....................... 2-23
Parking Brake .............................................. 2-26
Shifting Into Park (P) .....................
.....2-27
Shiftng Out of Par(kP) ..................
.....2-30
Parking Over Things That Burn ....................... 2-30
Engine Exhaust ............................................ 2-31
Running Your Engine While
You Are Parked ........................................ 2-32
Mirrors ........................................................... 2.33
Manual Rearview Mirror ................................. 2-33
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror ................2-33
Outside Power Mirror .................................... 2-33
Outside Curb View Assist Mirror ..................... 2-34
CWsidF! cnn?le!x Mirrnr 9-3A ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ .........................
._
Outside Heated Mirrors ... .................... 2-34
2- 1
Section 2 Features and Controls
Onstar@......................................................... 2.35 Onstar@System ........................................... 2.35
HomeLink@Transmitter .................................. -2-37 Programming the HomeLink@Transmitter ......... 2.38
Storage Areas ................................................ Glove Box ................................................... Cupholder(s) ................................................ Cell Phone Storage Area ............................... Overhead Console ........................................
Floor Console Storage Area ........................... Front Armrest Storage Area ...........................
Roof Rack System ........................................ Rear Storage Area ........................................
2.41 2.41 2.41 2-41 2-41 2-42 2-42 2-42 2-45
ConvenienceNet ...........................
CarCgover ..................
............
Rear Convenience Center ...............,
Sunroof ..............................................
VehiclePersonalization ........................ Entering ProgrammingMode ............... Headlamp Exit Delay .......................... Automatic Door LocWUnlock ................ Delayed Locking ................................ Remote Driver Unlock Control ............. Remote Lock and Unlock Confirmation .. Exiting Programming Mode .................. MemorySeat ....................................
.......2.45 ....... 2.45
.......2.45
.......2.49
.......2.50 .......2.50 .......2.5 1 .......2.52 .......2.53 .......2.54 .......2.55 ....... 2.56 ....... 2.57
2-2
Keys
Leaving children in a vehicle with the i,..ition key is dangerous for many reasons. A child or others could be badly injured or even killed. They could operate the power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move. Don't leave the keys in a vehicle with children.
2-3
The key can be used for the ignition as well as all the door locks, the floor console and the glovebox.
I
If you need a new key, contact your dealer, who can obtain the correct key code.
Your vehicle has the PASS-Key@ Ill vehicle theft system. The key has a transponder in the key head that matches a decoder in the vehicle's steering column. If a replacement key or any additional key is needed, you must purchase this key from your dealer. The key will have PK3 stamped on it. Keep the bar code tag that came with the original keys. Give this tag to your dealer if you need a new key made.
Any new PASS-Key@ Ill key must be programmed
before it will start your vehicle. See PASS-Kef 111 on
page 2-77 for more information on programming your new key.
2-4
Notice: Your vehicle has a number of features that can help prevent theft. You can have a lot of trouble getting into your vehicle if you ever lock your keys inside. You may even have to damage your vehicle to get in. So be sure you have spare keys.
If you ever do get locked out of your vehicle, call Buick Roadside Assistance. See Roadside Assistance
Program on page 7-5for more information.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Onstar@ system with an active subscription and you lock your keys inside the vehicle, Onstar@may be able to send a command to
unlock your vehicle. See OnStap System on page 2-35
for more information.
Remote Keyless Entry System
If equipped, the keyless entry system operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modificationsto this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment.
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
Check the distance. You may be too far from your vehicle. You may need to stand closer during rainy or snowy weather.
Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and try again.
Check to determine if battery replacement is necessary. See "Battery Replacement"under Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on page 2-5.
If you are still having trouble, see your dealer or a qualified technician for service.
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation
With this feature, you can lock and unlock your doors from about 3 feet (1 m) up to 30 feet (9 m) away using the remote keyless entry transmitter supplied with your vehicle.
UNLOCK: When you press UNLOCK, only the driver's door will unlock. If you press UNLOCK again within five seconds, the passenger's doors will unlock. i i you wouia iike aii iile ~ W I Si u uf-liu& ii-le first ti^^. you press UNLOCK, see Vehicle Personalization on page 2-50.
2-5
The UNLOCK button on the remote keyless entry transmitter will disarm the content theft-deterrent system. See Content Theft-Deterrent on page2-16 for more information.
If you would like to program the way the headlamps and parking lamps operate with remote unlock confirmation, see Vehicle Personalization on page 2-50. If your vehicle is equipped with the Driver Information Center (DIC), see DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-59.
LOCK: To lock all doors, press LOCK.
The LOCK button on the remote keyless entry transmitter will arm the content theft-deterrent system. See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 2-76 for more information.
If you would like to program the way the headlamps, parking lamps and horn operate with remote lock confirmation, see Vehicle Personalization on page 2-50. If your vehicle is equippedwith the Driver Information Center (DIC), see DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-59.
REAR: To unlock the Iiftgate, press REAR. See Liftgate on page 2-17 for more information.
Remote Alarm
When you press the button with the horn symbol, the headlamps and the parking lamps will flash and the horn will sound. This will allow you to attract attention, if needed.
Press the horn symbol again to stop the alarm from sounding or the alarm will turn off after 90 seconds.
Matching Transmitter(s) toYour Vehicle
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can be purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring any remaining transmitters with you when you go to your dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock your vehicle. Each vehicle can have a maximum of four transmitters matched to it.
See your dealer to match transmitters to another vehicle.
2-6
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless entry transmitter shouldlast about three years.
I KEY FOB I
BATTERY 1
LOW
I
I I
I
United States
Canada
You can tell the battery is weak if the KEY FOB BATTERY LOW message appears in the message center. If you get this message, the battery in the key fob needs to be replaced.
Nofice: When replacing the battery, use care not to touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body transferred to these surfaces may damage the transmitter.
1. Insert a flat object, such as a coin, into the slot on the side of the transmitter and twist to separate the halves.
2. Gently pry the battery out of the transmitter. Do not
use the metal flanges to "pop out" the battery.
3. Replace the battery.
4. Reassemble the transmitter. Make sure the halves are snapped together tightly so water will not get in.
5. Press and hold the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons for seven seconds to synchronize the transmitter.
6. Check the transmitter operation.
2-7
Doors and Locks
Door Locks
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
Passengers - especially children - can
easily open the doors and fall out of a moving vehicle. When a door is locked, the handle won't open it. You increase the chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash if the doors aren't locked. So, wear safety belts properly and lock the doors whenever you drive. Young children who get into unlocked vehicles may be unable to get out. A child can be overcome by extreme heat andcan suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle whenever you leave it. Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked door when you slow down or stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can help prevent this from happening.
2-8
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle. From the outside, use your key or the remote keyless entry transmitter. To unlock either front door from the outside with the
key, insert the key and turn it toward the front of
the vehicle. To lock either front door from the outside with your key, insert the key and turn it toward the rear
of the vehicle.
From the inside, use the manual or power door ocks.
To unlock either front door from the inside, pull back on the manual lever. To lock either front door from the inside, push the manual lever forward.
Power Door Locks
The power door lock switch is located on the driver's and front passenger's doors next to the door handle.
Press the front of the switch to lock all doors, or press the back of the switch to unlock all doors.
The rear doors do not have power door lock switches. Instead, each rear door has a manual lever that works only that door's lock.
If - - - - . . - . . - c\lctDm y u u i thnft-dptnrrpnt t n - u n r
n r n h i n l n hqe +ha nnntont
"",ii","
l l c I V LIS"
"V.I.V.I.
La.-..
-J---.--T
the power door lock switch may cause the system
to arm. See Content Theft-Deterrenton page 2-16 for
more information.
Delayed Locking
With the delayed lockingfeature, the doors will not lock immediately when locking the doors using thepower door lock switch or when LOCK onthe remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed while any dooris open. Instead, three chimes will be heard to indicate that the delayed locking feature is in operation. Five seconds after all doors are closed, the doors will lock automatically.
If the ignition is in ON or ACCESSORY, this feature will not lock the doors.
To program the delayed locking feature, see Vehicle Personalization on page 2-50. If your vehicle is equipped with the Driver Information Center (DIC), see DlC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-59.
Programmable Automatic Door
Locks
All ofthe doors will automatically lock when alldoors are closed, the engine is running and the shift lever is shifted cc?e?PP.RK (P). P.!! nf the donrs will alJtomatically unlock when the shift lever is shifted into PARK (P).
With the automatic door lock feature, you can stillock or unlock the doors at any timee,ither manually, with the power door lock switches or by pressing LOCK on the remote keyless entry transmitter. See Remote Keyless Enrry Sysiem Operatis# on page 2-5for more information.
2-9
To program the automatic door lock feature, see Vehicle Personalization on page 2-50 If your vehicle is equipped with the Driver Information Center (DIC), see DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-59.
Rear Door Security Locks
Your vehicle is equipped with rear door security locks that help prevent passengers from opening the rear doors on your vehicle from the inside. To use one of these locks do the following:
1. Open one of the rear doors.
2. On the inside of the rear door will be a lock. Push the lever up to engage the safety lock.
3. Close the door.
4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 for the other rear door lock.
The rear doors on your vehicle cannot be opened from inside the vehicle when this feature is in use. If you want to open the rear door when the security lock is on, unlock the door from the inside and then open the door from the outside.
Canceling the Rear Door Security Locks
1. Unlock and open the rear door from the outside.
2. Push the lever down to disengage the safety lock.
3. Close the door.
4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 for the other rear door lock.
The rear door locks will now work normally.
2-10
Lockout Protection
The lockout protection feature makes it difficult for you to lock your keys in your vehicle. If any door is open while the key is in the ignition, pressing the front of a power door lock switch will lock all doors, then unlock the driver's door.
If you leave the key in your vehicle but not in the ignition or if you use the manual door lock, you could still lock the key in the vehicle. Always rememberto take the key with you.
Leaving Your Vehicle
If you are leaving the vehicle, take your key, open your door and set the locks from the inside. Then get out and close the door.
Liftgate
E l -
It can be dangerous to drive with the liftgate open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can come into your vehicle. You can't see or smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and even death. If you must drive with the liftgate open or if electrical wiring or other cable connections must pass through the seal between the body and the liftgate:
0 Make sure aii other windows are shut.
* Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed and select the control setting that will force outside air into your vehicle. See "Comfort Controls" in the Index. !f you have air outlets on or under the instrument panel, open them all the way. See "Engine Exhaust" in the Index.
2-11
Liftgate Release
Liftgate Handle 2-12
Your vehicle may have either a liftgate release button, located in the instrument panel switchbank, or a release button located on the inner side of the liftgate handle.
Instrument Panel Switchbank
To open the liftgate, the transaxle must be in PARK (P) and all of the doors must be unlocked. To unlock the doors, use the remote keyless entry or the power door locks. If your vehicle has a remote keyless entry transmitter, you may unlock and open the liftgate by pressing the REAR button on the transmitter.
Windows
Leaving children in a vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous. A child can be overcome by the extreme heat and can suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke. Never leave a child alone in a vehicle, especially with the windows closed in warm or hot weather.
2-13
Power Windows
Switches on the driver's door armrest control each of the windows when the ignition is in ON, ACCESSORY, or when retained accessory power is active. See
"Retained Accessory Power (RAP)" under Ignition Positions on page 2-20 for more information. In addition,
each passenger's door has a window switch.
The driver`s power window switch has two down positions. Push the rear of the switch to the first position to lower the window normally.
Press the rear of any passenger window switch and that window will open. Press the front of any switch to close the window.
Express-Down Window
The driver's window switch also has an express-down feature. This switch is labeled AUTO. To activate the express-down feature, push the rear of the driver's window switch to the second position, then release it. The window will lower completely.
To stop the window while it is lowering, press the front of the switch. To raise the window, press and hold the front of the switch.
2-14
Window Lock Out
The driver's window controls also include a lock-out switch. Press the right side of the WDO LOCK switch to stop rear passengers from lowering their window. The driver can still control all of the windows with the lock on. Press the other side of the WDO LOCK switch for normal window operation.
Sun Visors
To block out glare you can swing down the visors. You can also remove them from the center mount and swing them to the side. There may be an extension on the inboard side of the sun visors. Pull the extension out to biock out giare.
Visor Vanity Mirror
Pull down the sun visor. Flip up the cover to expose the vanity mirror.
Lighted Visor Vanity Mirrors
Pull down the sun visor. Flip up the cover to expose the vanity mirror. The lamps will come on when you open the cover.
2-1 5
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities. Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it impossible to steal.
Content Theft-Deterrent
Your vehicle may have a theft-deterrent alarm system.
A light located on top of your instrument panel (near the center of the vehicle, next to the windshield) will flash slowly to let you know that the system has been armed.
Once armed, the alarm will go off if someone tries to enter the vehicle without the optional remote keyless entry transmitter or the key or tries to turn the ignition on without using the correct key. The horn will sound and the headlamps and parking lamps will flash anytime the alarm sounds.
When the content theft-deterrent system is armed, the liftgate may be opened by using one of the following methods:
0 Press the liftgate release button, which is located on the instrument panel switchbank, or
While armed, the doors will not unlock with the power door lock switch.
press REAR on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
2-16
Arming with the Power Lock Switch
Your alarm system will arm when you use either power door lock switch to lock the doors while any door or the liftgate is open and the key is removed from the ignition. The security light will start flashing to let you know the system is armed.
Arming with the Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter
Your alarm system will arm after a 30 second delay when you press LOCK on your remote keyless entry transmitter to lock the doors. The security light will come on for 30 seconds and then start flashing to let you know the system is armed.
Disarming with Your Key
Your alarm system will disarm when you use your key to unlock the-front doors. The security light will stop flashing to let you know the system is no longer armed.
Disarming with the Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter
Your alarm system will disarm when you press UNLOCK on your remote keyless entrytransmitter to unlock the doors. The security light will stop flashing to let you know the system in no longer armed.
PASS-Key@111
Your PASS-Key@ Ill system operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may causeundesired operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any Interhence receivedj including
interferencethat may cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment.
P,A.ss-!+~@ !!!
2 r?-dinf r p q ~ ~ p tnrgy-nspnnder in
the key that matches a decoder in your vehicle.
2-17
PASS-Key@111 Operation
Your vehicle is equipped with the PASS-Key@Ill (Personalized Automotive Security System) theft-deterrent system. PASS-Key@Ill is a passive theft deterrent system. This means you don't have to do anything different to arm or disarm the system. It works when you insert or remove the key from the ignition.
When the PASS-Key@Ill system senses that someone is using the wrong key, it shuts down the vehicle's starter and fuel systems. The starter will not work and fuel will stop being delivered to the engine. Anyone using a trial-and-error method to start the vehicle will be discouraged because of the high number of electrical key codes.
When trying to start the vehicle if the engine does not start and the SECURITY message comes on, the key may have a damaged transponder. Turn the ignition off and try again.
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears to be undamaged, try another ignition key. At this time, you may also want to check the fuse. See Fuses
and Circuit Breakers on page 5-96. If the engine still
does not start with the other key, your vehicle needs service. If your vehicle does start, the first key may be faulty. See your dealer who can service the PASS-Key@III to have a new key made.
It is possible for the PASS-Key@Ill decoder to learn the transponder value of a new or replacement key. Up to 10 additional keys may be programmed for the vehicle. This procedure is for learning additional keys only. If all the currently programmed keys are lost or do not operate, you must see your dealer or a locksmith who can service PASS-Key@Ill to have keys made and programmed to the system.
See your dealer who can service PASS-Key@Ill to get a new key blank that is a cut exactly as the ignition key that operates the system.
2-18
Canadian Owners: If you lose or damage your keys, only a GM dealer can service PASS-Key@Ill to have new keys made. To program additional keys you will need two current driver's keys (black in color). You must add a step to the following procedure. After Step 3 repeat Steps 1 through 3 with the second current driver's key. Then continuewith Step 4.
To program the new PK3 key do the following:
1. Verify the new key has PK3 stamped on it.
2. Insert the original key in the ignition and start the engine. If the engine will not start, see your dealer for service.
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to OFF,
.a .\.akny. aqd tho LA, rnmnwo u I VI I IV IV .I
4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to ON within 10 seconds of removing the previous key.
5. The SECURITY message will turn off once the key has been programmed. It may not be apparent that the SECURITY message went on due to how
quickly the key is programmed.
6. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are to be programmed.
If you are ever driving and the SECURITY message comes on and stays on, you will be able to restart your engine if you turn it off. Your PASS-Key@Ill system, however, is not working properly and must be serviced by your dealer. Your vehicle is not protected by the PASS-Key@Ill system at this time.
If you lose or damage a PASS-Key@Ill key, see your dealer who can service PASS-Key@Ill to have a new key made.
2-19
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice; Your vehicle doesn't need an elaborate "break-in." But it will perform better in the long run if you follow these guidelines:
If you have all-wheel drive, keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less for the firs5t 00 miles (805 km).
Don't drive at any one speed-fast or slow-for
the first500 miles (805 km). Don't make full-throttle starts.
Avoid making hard stops for the fir2s0t 0 miles (322km) orso. During this time your new brake linings aren't yet brokein. Hard stops with new linings can mean prematurwe ear and earlier replacement. Followthis breaking-in guideline every time you get new brake linings.
Don't tow a trailer during break-iSne. e "Towing a Trailer" in the Index for more information.
Ignition Positions
With the key in the ignition, you can turn the key to four different positions.
A
A (OFF): This is the only position in which you can remove the key. This position locks the steering wheel, ignition and transaxle.
2-20
Notice: If your key seems stuck in OFF and you can't turn it, be sure you are using the correct key; if so, is it all the way in?If it is, then turn the steering wheel left and right while youturn the key hard. Turn the key only with yourhand. Using a tool to forceit could break the key or the ignition switch. If none of these works, then your vehicle needs service.
B (ACCESSORY): This position allows you to use things like the radio and the windshield wipers when the engine is off. This position will allow you to turn off the engine, but still turn the steering wheel. Use ACCESSORY if you must have your vehicle in motion while the engine is off (for example, if your vehicle is being ptished OT ioiiv.edj.
C (ON): This is the position that the switch returns to after you start your engine and release the key. The switch stays in ON when the engine is running. But even when the engine is not running, you can use ON to operate your electrical power accessories, and to d!s;=!a;ls z r e icsfr~mecp?fn p ! \?!srnjnn linhtc
3 "a'"-'
D (START): This position starts the engine. When the engine starts, release the key. The ignition switch will return to ON for normal driving.
If the engine is not running, ACCESSORY and ON are positions that allow you to operate your electrical accessories, such as the radio.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
With RAP, the power windows, the audio system, the sunroof and the Automatic Level Control will continue to work up to 10 minutes after the ignition key is turned to OFF and none of the doors are opened.
Starting Your Engine
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine won't start in any other position - that's a
safety feature. TG restart ?..lhen yeu're already movinfl 3,
use NEUTRAL (N) only.
Notice: Don't try toshift to PARK (P) if your
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transaxle. Shift to PARK (P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.
.- y u u l -4
1AI:LL .
I , VVILI I
L--L IUUL
,U &I-.UII LIIC
---nl-w-+-w abbcIcIawI
.y,.nr?Anul al,
+,.rm LUII I
.y,cwlm u ~ l r
ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let
go of the key. The idle speed will go down as
your engine warms up.
2-2 1
Notice: Holding your key in START for longer than 15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat can damage your starter motor. Wait about 15 seconds between eachtry to help avoid draining your battery or damaging your starter.
2. If the engine doesn't start in 10 seconds, push the accelerator pedal about one-quarter of the way down while you turn the key to START. Do this until the engine starts. As soon as it does, let go of the key.
3. If your engine still won't start (or starts but then stops), it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and holding it there as you hold the key in START for a maximum of 15 seconds. This clears the extra gasoline from the engine. If the engine
still won't start or starts briefly but then stops again,
repeat Step 1 or 2, depending on the temperature. When the engine starts, release the key and the accelerator pedal.
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with the electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical parts or accessories, you could change theway the engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment, check with your dealer. If you don't, your engine might not perform properly.
Engine Coolant Heater
Your vehicle may have an engine coolant heater. In very cold weather, 0°F (-18°C) or colder, the engine coolant heater can help. You'll get easier starting and better fuel economy during engine warm-up. Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged in a minimum of four hours prior to starting your vehicle. At temperatures above 32°F (OOC), use of the coolant heater is not required.
To Use the Engine CoolantHeater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. The electrical cord is located on the driver's side of the engine compartment.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 1IO-volt AC outlet.
2-22
Automatic Transaxle Operation
Plugging the cord into an unground,, outlet could cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong kind of extension cord could overheat and cause a fire. You could be seriously injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord won't reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
4: Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and store the cord as it was before to keep it away from moving engine parts. If you don't, it could be damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged in? The answer dependson the outside temperature, the kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead ot trying to list everytning nere, we ask inat you coniaci your dealer in the area where you'll be parking your vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice for that particular area.
PRND321
Maximum engine speed is limited when you're in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), to protect driveline components from improper operation.
There are several different positions for your shift lever.
PARK (P): This gear position locks your front wheels. It's the best position to use when you start your engine because your vehicle can't move easily.
Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before starting the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle shift lock control system. You have to fully apply your regular brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when the ignition key is in RUN. As you step on the brake pedal, while in PARK (P), you may hear a click from the solenoid of the system. This ensures that the system is operating properly.
2-23
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift lever - push the shift lever all the way into PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then move the shift lever into the gear you wish. See Shifting Out of Park (P) on page 2-30for more information.
It is dangerous ,t get out of yourveh,,.e if the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P)with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Don't leave your vehicle when the engineis running unless you haveto. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure your vehicle won't move, even when you're on fairly level ground, always set your parking brake and move the shift lever to
PARK (P). See "Shifting Into Park (P)"in the
Index. If you're pulling a trailer,see "Towing a Trailer" in the Index.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle is moving forward could damage yourtransaxle. Shift toREVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is stopped.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow, ice or sand without damaging your transaxle, see If
You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on
page 4-32.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesn't connect with the wheels. To restart when you're already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.
Shifting into a drivegear while your engine is "racing" (running at high speed) is dangerous. Unless your footis firmly on the brakepedal, your vehicle could move very rapidlyY. ou could lose control andhit people or objects. Don't shift into a drivegear while your engine is racing.
2-24
Notice: Damage to your transaxle caused by shifting into a drivegear with the engine racingisn't covered by your warranty.
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. If you need more power for passing, and you're:
Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push your accelerator pedal about halfway down.
Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the accelerator all the way down.
You'll shift down to the next gear and have more power.
Notice: If your vehicle seems to start up rather
..,, "c!n"?nrl\r or If It seems not to shift 3ears as you n3- n
faster, something may be wrong with a transaxle
system sensor. If you drive very far thatway, your
vehicle can bedamaged. So, if this happens,
have your vehicle serviced right away. Until then,
you can use SECOND (2) when you are driving less
than 35 mph (55 km/h) and AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE
I\lna\/
Cnw
IWI
L II;lm yILI.cnIr a em pn cn ceulea- .
Warm-up Shift
Your vehicle has a computer controlled transaxle designed to warm up the engine faster when the outside temperature is 35°F (2°C) or colder. You may notice that the transaxle will shift at a higher vehicle speed until the engine is warmed up. This is a normal condition designed to provide heat to the passenger compartment and defrost the windows more quickly.
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal driving,
but it offers more power and lower fuel economy than AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D).
Here are some times you might choose THIRD (3) instead of AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D):
When driving on hilly, winding roads.
When towing a trailer (so there is less shifting between gears).
When going down a steep hill.
2-25
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power, but lower fuel economy. You can use SECOND (2) on
hills. It can help control your speed as you go down steep mountain roads, but then you would also want to use your brakes off and on.
Nofice: Don't drive inSECOND (2) for more than 25 miles (40 km), or at speeds over55 mph (90 km/h), or you can damage your transaxle. TUHsIeRD (3) or AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D) as much as possible. Don't shift into SECOND (2) unless you are going slower than65 mph (105 km/h) or you can damage your engine.
Notice: If your vehicle seems to start up rather slowly, or if it seems not to shift gears as you go faster, something may be wrong with a transaxle system sensor. If you drive very far thawt ay, your vehicle can be damaged. So, if this happens, have your vehicle serviced rightaway. Until then, you can use SECOND (2) when you are driving less than 35 mph (55 km/h) and THIRD (3) for higher speeds.
FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power (but lower fuel economy) than SECOND (2). You can use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud.
If the selector lever is put in FIRST (I), the transaxle
won't downshift into first gear until the vehicle is going slow enough.
2-26
Nofice: If your front wheels won't turn, don't try to drive. This might happen if you were stuck in very deep sand or mud orwere up against a solid object. You could damage your transaxle. Also, if you stop when going uphill, don't hold your vehicle there with only the acceleratopredal. This could overheat and damage the transaxle. Use your brakes to hold your vehicle in position on ahill.
Parking Brake
The parking brake is located on the driver's side under the instrument panel.
To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal down with your right foot and push down on the parking brake pedal with your left foot.
If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light will come on. See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-40.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal down with your right foot while you push down on the parking brake pedal with your left foot. (To release
the tension on the parking brake cable, you will need to
apply about the same amount of pressure to the parking brake pedal as you did when you set the parking brake.) When you remove your foot from the parking brake pedal, it will pop up to the released position.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can cause your rear brakes to overheat.You may have to replace them, and you could also damage other parts of your vehicle.
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill, see Towing a Trailer on page 4-36. That section shows what to do first to keep the trailer from moving.
Shifting Into Park (P)
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift leveris not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll. If you have left the enginerunning, the vehicle can move suddenly.You or others could be injured. To be sure your vehicle won't move, even when you're on fairly level ground, use the steps that follow. If you're pulling a trailer, see "Towing a Trailer" in the Index.
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and set the parking brake with your left foot.
2-27
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) like this:
I
I
Pull the lever toward you. 2-28
Move the lever up as far as it will go.
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine Running
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with the engine running. Your vehicle could move suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set. And, if you leave the vehicle with theengine running, it could overheat and even catch fire. You or others could be injured. Don't leave your vehicle with the engine running.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After
..,..).,- yuu -&,,-A V c IIIVVCU
+h,-. -hi$+ lm,,mv i m + -
11I C 31I I I L IGVGI I I I L U
DADL(
I n l II\
/\D I \1 ,
hc\l,-4
I IVIU
the regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can
move the shift lever away from PARK (P) without first
pulling it toward you. If you can, it means that the
shift lever wasn't fully locked into PARK (P).
Torque Lock
If you are parking on a hill and you don't shift your transaxle into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in the transaxle. You may find it difficult to pull the shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called "torque lock." To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the driver's seat. To find out how, see Shifting lnto Park (P) on page 2-27.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another vehicle push yours a little uphill to take scme 3f the pressure from the parking pawl in the transaxle, so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
2-29
Shiftng Out of Park (P)
Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle shift lock control system. You have to fully apply your regular brakes before you can shift from PARK (P), when the ignition is in ON.
As you step on the brake pedal, while in PARK (P), you may hear a click from the solenoid of the system. This ensures that the system is operating properly. See Automatic Transaxle Operation on page 2-23.
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift lever by pushing the shift lever all the way into PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then move the shift lever into the gear you want. If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still can't shift out of PARK (P), try this:
1. Turn the ignition key to OFF.
2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4.
3. Shift to NEUTRAL (N).
4. Start the engine and then shift to the drive gear you want.
5. Have the vehicle fixed as soon as you can.
Parking Over Things That Burn
_ _ _ Thingsthat ca burn could
I hot E lau
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Don't park
over papers, leaves, dry grass or other things
that can burn.
2-30
Engine Exhaust
I
Engine exhaustcan kill. It contains the gas carbon monoxide (CO), which you can't see or smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
Your exhaust system sounds strange or
." different.
vc.
I U&I
.,-h;-lV C I 11bIC
-yAc+r S
rusty
underneath.
Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
CAUTION: (Continued)
0 Your c --liclewas dam.-,ed wf
ing
over high points on the roador over road
debris.
Repairs weren't done correctly.
Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into i yourvehicle:
0 Drive it only with all the windows down to blow out anyCO; and
~ 0 Have yourvehiclefixedimmediately.
2-31
Running Your Engine While You Are Parked
It's better not to park with the engine running. But if you ever have to, 1 e are some things to know.
I .
Idling the engine with the clin ~econtrc ~
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into your vehicle. See the earlier Caution under "Engine Exhaust." Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if the fan is at the highest setting. One place this
can happen is agarage. Exhaust - with
CO - can come in easily. NEVER park in a
garage with the engine running. Another closed-in place can be a blizzardS. ee "Winter Driving'' in the Index.
It can be dangerous to get out of ur vehicle if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll. Don't leave your vehicle when the engine is running unless youhave to. If you've left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be sure your vehicle won'tmove, even when you're on fairly level ground, always set your parking brake and move the shifltever to PARK (P).
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehiclewon't
move. See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-27.
If you're pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on
page 4-36.
2-32
Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror
To reduce glare from headlampsbehind you, pull the lever toward you (to thneight position).To return the mirror to the dapyosition, push the lever away from you.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
The mirror's two outer buttons operate the lights on the bottom sides of the mirror. One photocell on the front of the mirror senses when it is becoming dark outside. Another photocell, facing rearward, senses headlamps behind you. To keep the photocells operating well, occasionally clean them with a cotton swab and glass cleaner.
Outside Power Mirror
The power mirror controls are located on the driver's door armrest.
Your vehicle may have an automatic dimming rearview
mirror. Push the button in the center of the mirror to turn this feature on or off. The mirror will darken
graauaiiy to reduce giare from heaciiamps behind you.
This may take a few moments. The mirror will also lighten whenever you shift to REVERSE (R).
To choose either the left or right outside mirror, press the selector switch. Press any of the four arrows located on the control pad to move the mirrors in the desired direction
Adjust each mirror so you can see the side of your vehicle and the area behind your vehicle.
2-33
Outside Curb View Assist Mirror
If your vehicle has this feature, the passenger's outside rearview mirror will tilt towards the curb when the
vehicle is shifted into REVERSE (R) and return to its
previous position when the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (R). See DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-59for information on how to turn this feature on and off.
Outside Convex Mirror
Your passenger's side mirror is convex. A convex
mirror's surface is curved so you can see more from the
driver's seat.
Outside Heated Mirrors
If your vehicle has this feature, the outside rearview mirrors are heated when you activate the rear window defogger. See "Rear Window Defogger" under Climate Control System on page 3-26.
A convex mirror can make things (like other vehicles) look farther away than they really are. If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes.
2-34
Onstar* System
Onstar@uses global positioning system (GPS) satellite technology, wireless communications, and state of the art call centers to provide you with a wide range of safety, security, information andconvenience services. An Onstar@subscription plan is included in the price of your vehicle. You can easily upgrade or extend your Onstar@ services to meet yourpersonal needs. A complete Onstar@user's guide and the terms and conditions of the Onstar@Subscription Service Agreement are included in vour Onstar@-equipped vehicle's glove box literature. For more information, visit www.onstar.com, contact Onstar@at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827), or pressthe blue OnStap button to speak to an Onstar@advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
Onstar@' Services
Onstar@provides a number of service plans to closely meet your needs. Some of the services currently provided by Onstar@are:
e Automatic Notification of Air Bag Deployment e Emergency Services e Roadside Assistance Stolen Vehicle Tracking e AccidentAssist
Remote Door Unlock Remote Diagnostics OnStap MED-NET (Requires separate activation and annual fee on some plans) Online and Personal Concierge Services Route Support RideAssist Information and Convenience Services
2-35
Onstar@Personal Calling
With Onstar@Personal Calling, you have a safer way to stay connected while driving. It's a hands-free wireless phone that's integrated into your vehicle. You can place calls nationwide using voice-activated dialing with no contracts, no roaming charges and no access fees. To find out more about Onstar@Personal Calling, refer to the Onstar@owner's guide in your vehicle's glove box, or call Onstar@at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).
Onstar@Virtual Advisor
With Onstar@Virtual Advisor you can listen to your favorite news, entertainment and information topics, such as traffic and weather reports, stock quotes and sports scores. You listen to your e-mail through your vehicle's speakers, and reply with your hands on the wheel and your eyes on the road.
A completed Subscription Service Agreement is required prior to delivery of Onstat-@ services and prepaid calling minutes are also required for Onstar@ Personal Calling and Onstar@Virtual Advisor use. Terms and conditions of the Subscription Service Agreement can be found at www.onstar.com.
2-36
HomeLink@ Transmitter
HomeLin!P, 2 CGmbined unilfersa! transmitter and receiver, provides a convenient way to replace up to three hand-held transmitters used to activate devices such as gate operators, garage door openers, entry door locks, security systems and home lighting. Additional HomeLink@ informationcan be found on the internet at www.homelink.com or by calling 1-800-355-3515.
If your vehicle is equipped with the HomeLink@ transmitter, it complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes and modifications to this system by other than aithorized se--dicefacilipj could tVJ nWi r -l4U U- IU 1L tI hIWnI rI iL7aLlt"i, nIn
to use this equipment.
2-37
Programming the HomeLink@ Transmitter
Do not use the HomeLink@Transmitter with any garage door opener that does not have the "stop and reverse" feature. This includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982.
Keep the original transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for future HomeLink@ programming.It is also recommended that upon the sale of the vehicle, the programmed HomeLink@buttons should be erased for security purposes. Refer to "Programming HomeLink@"(Step 1 only) or, for assistance, contact HomeLink@ on theinternet at: www.homelink.com or by calling 1-800-355-3515.
Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage door or gate operator you are programming. When programming a garage door, it is advised to park outside of the garage.
It is recommended that a new battery be installed in your hand-held transmitter for quicker and more accurate transmission of the radio frequency.
Your vehicle's engine should be turned off while programming the transmitter. Follow these steps to program up to three channels:
2-38
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons, releasing only when the indicator light begins to flash, after 20 seconds. Do not hold down the buttons for longer than 30 seconds and do not repeat this step to program a second and/or third transmitter to the remaining two HomeLink@ buttons.
2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter about 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink@ buttons while keeping the indicator light in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the desired button on HomeLink@ andthe hand-heldtransmitter button. Do not release the buttons until Step 4 has been completed.
Some entry gates and garage door openers may require you to substitute Step 3 with the procedure noted in "Gate Operator and Canadian Programming'' later in this section.
4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly after HomeLink@ successfully receives the frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons.
5. Press and hold the newly-trained HomeLink@button and observe the indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and your device should activate when the HomeLink@button is pressed and released.
To program the remaining two HomeLink@buttons, begin with Step 2 under "Programming HomeLink@." Do not repeat Step 1 as this will erase all of the programmed channels.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a constant light, continue with Steps 6 through 8 following to complete the programming of a rolling-code equipped device (most commonly a garage door opener).
6. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit) in the garage, locate the "Learn" or "Smart" button. This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor-head unit.
7. Firmly press and release the "Learn" or "Smart" button. The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer.
You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8.
8. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press and hold the programmed HomeLink@button for two seconds, then release. Repeat the press/hold/release sequence a second time, and depending on the brand of the garage door opener (or other rolling code device), repeatthis sequence a third time to complete the programming.
HomeLink@ should nowactivate your rolling code equipped device.
To program the remaining two HomeLink@buttons, begin with Step 2 of "Programming HomeLink@."Do not repeat Step 1.
Gate Operator and Canadian Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to "time out" or quit after several seconds of transmission. This may not be long enough for HomeLink@to pick up the signal during programming. Similarly, some U.S. gate operators are manufactured to "time out" in the same manner.
If you live in Canada, or you are having difficulty programming a gate operator by using the "Programming HomeLink@'procedures (regardless of where you live), replace Step 3 under "Programming HomeLinkm' with the following:
Continue to press and hold the HomeLink@button while
you press and release every two seconds (cycle)
-. your hand-held transmitter until the frequency signal has
. I.-- -,$.. -,
UGGI I 3 U ~ b G 3 J I
.II.,
Ull
nn
yU b
rrn bb
rr+ yc
n.r bu
lhv ,y,
Unrnnl ink@
I IVIIIUL## 1 1 ,
Thn I s IV
indicator light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly.
Proceed with Step 4 under "Programming HomeLink@'
to complete.
2-39
Using HomeLink@
Press and hold the appropriate HomeLink@button for at least half of a second. The indicator light will come on while the signal is being transmitted.
Erasing HomeLink@ Buttons
To erase programming from the three buttons do the following:
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons until the indicator light begins to flash, after 20 seconds.
2. Release both buttons. Do not hold for longer than 30 seconds.
HomeLink@is now in the train (learning) mode and can be programmed at any time beginning with Step 2 under "Programming HomeLink@."
Individual buttons can not be erased, but they can be reprogrammed. See "Reprogramming a Single HomeLink@Button" next.
Reprogramming a Single HomeLink@ Button
To program a device to HomeLink@ usinga HomeLink@ button previously trained, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink@ button.Do not release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds. While still holding the HomeLink@ button, proceed with Step 2 under "Programming HomeLink@."
Resetting Defaults
To reset HomeLink@to default settings do the following:
1. Hold down the two outside buttons for about 20 seconds until the indicator light begins to flash.
2. Continue to hold both buttons until the HomeLink@ indicator light turns off.
3. Release both buttons.
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink@ at 1-800-355-3515, or on the internet at www.homelink.com.
2-40
Storage Areas
Glove Box
If the glove box has a lock, put your key into the lock and turn the key counterclockwise. To open the glovebox, pull the latch release. The glove box door has a detent to prevent the door
Cell Phone Storage Area
Your vehicle has a cell phone storage compartment located on the floor console storage closest to the driver's seat. Lift the lid to use the storage compartment. The compartment has an accessory power outlet for charging the cell phone.
Overhead Console
To close the glove box, the door must be pushed up
past the detent. i o lock the glo.\reboic, pii: your key into
the lock and turn the key clockwise.
If your vehicle has the Onstar@System, the Onstar@
buttons vi!! replace the storage compartment. See
OnStap System on page 2-35 for more information.
Cupholder(s)
If your vehicle has a sunroof, the mini console contains the HomeLink@Transmitter buttons and the Onstar@ buttons.
There are two cupholders located in the floor console.
Storage Compartment
The cupholders have liners that remove tor larger beverage items. Remove the liners by lifting them out.
To open the storage compartment, located at the front of the overhead console, press the release latch
Your vehiclehascupholders located in the rear seatforward.
Then pull the compartment down to the full
armrests if it has a split folding rear seat. If your vehicle open position.
has captain's chairs, there are cupholders on the
sides of the seats.
2-4 1
Sunglasses Storage Compartment
To open the sunglasses storage compartment in the overhead console, press the release button. Then pull the compartment down to the full open position.
Floor Console Storage Area
The floor console storage contains two cupholders, an ashtray and a cellular phone storage compartment with a cigarette lighter/accessory power outlet.
Below the floor console storage is a purse storage area with two integrated convenience nets.
Front Armrest Storage Area
Your vehicle has a front armrest storage compartment which contains a coinholder tray and two storage compartments, one located under the coinholder tray, that will hold six compact discs and another next to the coin holder tray.
To unlock the front armrest storage compartment, put your key into the lock and turn the key counterclockwise. To open the armrest, squeeze the lever while lifting the top to open it.
To close the armrest, push the lid down until you hear a click. To lock the armrest, put your key into the lock and turn the key clockwise. To use the compact disc storage compartment, lift the coinholder tray up. Put it back into the storage area when finished.
Roof Rack System
If you try to carry something on toopf your vehicle that is longer or wider than the luggage
carrier - like paneling, plywood, a mattress and so forth - the wind can catchit as you
drive along. This can cause you to lose control. What you are carrying couldbe violently torn off, and this couldcause you or other drivers tohave a collision, and of course damage your vehicle.You may be able to carry something like this inside. But, never carry something longer or wider than the luggage carrier on top of your vehicle.
2-42
If you have the luggage carrier, you can load things on top of your vehicle. If you do load things on the top of your vehicle, you must load them on the luggage carrier crossrails.
Notice: Damagemaybecausedtotheroofofyour
---#-!-IV~ll
l
b :I+ lI~1 a-.l-l..y&r L l l:l-l-r y
:- - l - - a c l
cl2w-mtlxr
f a pluubu U I l ' C Y c I y
fin
Wl.
+*.h.=a
rnnrf-
.YV.
Notice: Loading cargo that weighs more than 220 Ibs. (100 kg) on the luggage carrier may damage your vehicle.
When you carry cargo on the luggage carrier of a
.._ proper size and weight, put it on the slats and distribute
ii~eweiyili eve1I1I.Y. . TI II_IC_I.I_3-11:A1- ut+L;ILICe c,,,,,"I,:IIw a a 1 a I I up uywl
the rear of the load to keep it from moving. You can then tie it down. Cargo containers must be loaded on the crossrails only.
Don't exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when
!n=rdingyour vehicle For more information on vehicle capacity and loading, see Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-34.
2-43
To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you're driving, check now and then to make sure the luggage carrier and cargo are still securely fastened.
Loading things onto the luggage carrier can interfere with the performance of your XMTMSatellite Radio System.
Your luggage carrier has release levers within the end of each crossrail support.
To adjust the crossrail(s), the sunroof stop (A) must be removed.
To remove the sunroof stop:
1. Use the tool (B)located in a bag in the glovebox
labeled "tool kit-acsry".
2. Use the tool to remove the screw located in the side rail assembly in front of the front crossrail.
3. Repeat for the other side.
4. Put the tool and the screws back in the plastic bag in the glove box.
2-44
To adjust the crossrails, lift the release levers on each side to unlock them. Slide the crossrails forward or backward, as needed, to accommodate loads of various sizes.
After repositioning the crossrails, engage the release lever. This will lock the crossrails in place.
Notice; Do not open the sunroof if the crossrails are not in the full rear position. This could cause damage to the sunroof glass panel and/or the crossrails.
When you are done using the crossrails you must replace the sunroof stop.
To replace the sunroof stop:
1. Put the crossrails in the full rear position.
2. Using the tool, put the screws back into each side rail assembly. Make sure the screws are in the first hole in front of the crossrail.
Convenience Net
Your vehicle may have a convenience net. The convenience net is designed to help keep small loads, like grocery bags, from falling over. Install the convenience net at the rear of your vehicle, just inside the liftgatehailgate opening.
Attach both the upper and lower hooks to the loops on either side of the liftgate opening. The label on the net should be in the upper left corner.
The convenience net has a maximum capacity of 100 Ibs. (45 kg). It is not designed to hold larger, heavier loads. Store such loads on the floor of your vehicle, as far forward as you can.
When not in use, it is recommended that you take down the rear convenience net to extend its life and retain its elasticity, and to keep the rear exit clear. Store the net in one of the storage compartments.
Cargo Cover
If your vehicle has a cargo cover, you can use it to
There are four small storage compartments in the rear
cover items in the rear of your vehicle. Pull the cover
of your vehicle. One is on the passenger's side, two
towards the rear of the vehicle and slide the ends in the
are on the driver's side and one is on the floor by the
slots to secure it. When it is not in use, take the ends
tailgate. To remove the covers, lift up on the tabs. If your out of the slots and allow the cover to roll back up.
vehicie has the i G - s p e ~ sk y~ s k ~th, e C G ~ ~ E E ~ X ~ I ? ~
on the passenger's side and the long compartment
on the driver's side will be equipped with speakers.
2-45
R-Br C-rvenience Cent-r
-
If any removable convenience item isn't secured properly, it can move around in a
collision or sudden stop. People in the vehicle could be injured. Be sure to secure any such item properly.
Your vehicle may have a rear convenience center. The rear convenience center can be used to organize and store items in your vehicle. The extended rear convenience center, without the optional third row stowable seat, has a forward bin and rear bin. The rear convenience center, with the optional third row stowable seat, contains one storage bin. To use the convenience center, remove the carpeted mat and lift the handle(s) on the top of the lid to open the storage bin. The extended rear convenience center has a maximum weight capacity of 400 Ibs. (181.6 kg) on top. The shorter rear convenience center that comes with the optional third row stowable seat has a maximum weight capacity of 100 Ibs. (45.4 kg) on top.
2-46
Removing the Extended Rear ConveniencCeenter
1. Make sure that all items have been removed from the top and the inside of the rear convenience center.
2. Remove the carpeted mat from the vehicle.
3. Lift the handle(s) on the top of the lid to open the
rear storage bin. The center lid will also need to be opened.
4. Remove the two nuts from inside the rear storage bin. The nuts are located in the bottom of the bin.
5. Lift the rear storage bin and remove it from the rear of the vehicle.
6. Remove the two nuts inside the forward storage bin. These nuts are located along the bottom of the center divider wall.
7. Lift the forward storage bin and remove it from the
rear of the vehicle.
Replacing the Extended Rear Convenience Center
1. Make sure that all items have been removed from the rear of the vehicle.
2. Remove the carpeted mat from the vehicle.
I
... ..
3. Lift the forward bin into the back of the vehicle. Place the mounting brackets onto the forward mounting bolts on the floor of the vehicle.
4. Put the nuts back onto the mounting bolts and tighten.
5. Lift the rear bin into the back of the vehicle. Place the rear bin over the center T-shaped wall on the forward bin. Push down to secure. Align the rear bin over the rear mounting bolts.
6. put the nuts back onto the mounting bolts and
L:-L&-.-
llyl IlCl I.
7. Push and pull on the rear storage system to make sure that it is locked into place properly.
2-47
Removing the Rear Convenience Center on Vehicles with the Third Row Stowable Seat
1. Make sure that all items have been removed from the top and the inside of the rear convenience center.
2. Lift the handle(s) on the top of the lid to open the storage bin.
3. Remove the two nuts from inside the storage bin. The nuts are located in the bottom of the bin.
If you are only removing the convenience center and not the stowable seat, you must replace these nuts once the bin is removed to secure the seat.
4. Lift the storage bin and remove it from the rear of the vehicle.
Replacing the Rear Convenience Center on Vehicles with the ThirdRow Stowable Seat
1. Make sure that all items have been removed from the rear of the vehicle.
2. Lift the bin into the back of the vehicle. Align the bin over the rear mounting bolts.
3. Put the nuts back onto the mounting bolts and tighten.
4. Push and pull on the rear storage system to make sure that it is locked into place properly.
Sunroof
If your vehicle has a sunroof, the switch is located between the sun visors.
The sunroof switch will only work when the ignition is on or when the ignition is off and retained accessory power is active. See "Retained Accessory Power" under lgnition Positions on page 2-20 for more information.
Notice: Do not open the sunroof if the luggage carrier crossrails are not in the full rear position. This could cause damage to the sunroof glass panel and/or the crossrails. See "Roof Rack System" in the Index for more information.
When vent opening the sunroof, the sunshade must be opened by hand. Press the rear of the switch to vent open the glass panel.
Press the rear of the switch a second time and release it to express-open the glass panel. The glass panel and sunshade will fully open. When the glass panel is express opening, pressing the switch in either direction will stop it. If you press and hold the rear of the switch, the express-open operation will be overridden.
To close the glass panel, press and hold the front of the switch until the glass panel stops.
2-49
Vehicle Personalization
Some of your vehicle's features can be reset or customized according to your preference. The features you can program depend on the options that came with your vehicle.
If your vehicle has a DIC, see DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-59 to customize your features.
If you do not have the DIG, the following features can be customized according to the options that your vehicle has.
Entering Programming Mode
To program features, your vehicle must be in the programming mode. Follow these steps:
1. Turn the ignition key to ON. The gearshift must be in PARK (P).
2. Press and hold the tripheset button, located next to the odometer for two seconds while the odometer is in the odometer mode.
PROGRAM MODE
United States
Canada
3. This message will appear in the message center, located in the instrument panel cluster, as an indication that your vehicle is ready to begin programming.
If you have the remote keyless entry system, you must press the LOCK button. This lets the system know which transmitter is being personalized, because each can be personalized differently.
You can now program your choices.
To exit the programming mode, follow the steps listed under Exiting Programming Mode on page2-56.
2-50
Headlamp Exit Delay
This feature allows you to customize the headlamps and parking lamps.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: Off (The headlamps and parking lamps will turn off at the same time that the ignition is turned to OFF.)
Mode 2: 15-Second Activation (The headlamps and parking lamps will stay on for 15 seconds when the ignition is turned to OFF.)
Mode 3: 30-Second Activation (The headlamps and parking lamps will stay on for 30 seconds when the ignition is turned to OFF.)
Mode 4: 60-Second Activation (The headlamps and
parking lamps will stay on for 60 seconds when the ignition is turned to OFF.)
R p f ~ yp ~ I \rphi~Ir?was shipped from the factory. it was programmed in Mode 3. The mode to which the vehicle has been programmed may have been changed since it left the factory. To determine the mode to which your vehicle is programmed or to program your vehicle to a different mode, do the following:
1 . Follow the instructions for Entering Programming Mode on page 2-50
2. Turn the exterior lamp control from the off position to the parking lamp position.
3. Count the number of chimes you hear. The number of chimes indicates the vehicle's current programmed mode. If you do not wish to change the current mode, you can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle.
4. Turn the exterior lamp control from the off position to the parking lamp position to change the current mode.
5. Turn the exterior lamp control from the off position to the parking lamp position until you hear the number of chimes corresponding to the mode selection you want.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit programming mode by following the instructions later in thls section or program tne nexi ieature avaiiauie on your vehicle.
2-5 1
Automatic Door LocWUnlock
This feature allows you to lock and unlock your doors automatically.
Programmable Modes
Mode 2: Automatic Door Locking Only Shift out of PARK (P) with the ignition on and the
driver's door closed; all doors will lock automatically.
The automatic door unlock feature is turned off.
Mode 3: Automatic Door Locking with shift out of PARK (P)/Driver's Door Unlocking with shift into PARK (P)
Shift out of PARK (P) with the ignition on and the driver's door closed; all doors will lock automatically.
Shift into PARK (P) with the ignition on; driver's door only will unlock automatically.
Mode 4: Automatic Door Locking with shift out of
PARK (P)/AII Door Unlocking with shift into PARK (P)
Shift out of PARK (P) with the ignition on and the driver's door closed; all doors will lock automatically. Shift into PARK (P) with the ignition on; all doors will unlock automatically.
Mode 5: Automatic Door Locking with shift out of PARK (P)/Driver's Door Unlocking with Key Removal
Shift out of PARK (P) with the ignition on and the driver's door closed; all doors will lock automatically.
Remove the key; only the driver's door will unlock automatically.
Mode 6 : Automatic Door Locking with shift out of PARK (P)/AII Door Unlocking with Key Removal
Shift out of PARK (P) with the ignition on and the driver's door closed; all doors will lock automatically.
Remove the ignition key; all doors will unlock automatically.
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was programmed in Mode 4. The mode to which the vehicle has been programmed may have been changed since it left the factory. To determine the mode to which your vehicle is programmed or to program your vehicle to a different mode, do the following:
1. Follow the instructions for Entering Programming
Mode on page 2-50.
2. Press the front of the power door lock switch.
2-52
3. Count the number of chimes you hear. The number of chimes indicates the vehicle's current programmed mode. If you do not wish to change the current mode, you can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or programthe next feature available on your vehicle.
4. Press the front of the power door lock switch to change the current mode.
5. Press the front of the power door lock switch until you hear the number of chimes corresponding to the mode selection you want.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle.
Delayed Locking
This feature allows you to delay the locking of Your
doors.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: Off (Doors will always lock immediately when you lock the doors using the power door lock switch or the remote keyless entry transmitter.)
Mode 2: Delayed Locking (If the power door lock switch or the remote keyless entry transmitter is used to
lock the vehicle while any door is open, you will hear three chimes. The doors will not lock. Five seconds after the last door is closed, all doors will lock.)
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was programmed in Mode 2. The mode to which the vehicle has been programmed may have been changed since it left the factory. To determine the mode to which your vehicle is programmed or to program your vehicle to a different mode, do the following:
1. Follow the instructions for Entering Programming Mode on page 2-50.
2. Press the back of the power door lock switch.
3. Count the number of chimes you hear. The number of chimes indicates the vehicle's current programmed mode. If you do not wish to change the current mode, you can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in thissection or program the next feature available on your vehicle.
4. Press the back of the power door lock switch to
m h m m m r r thn p t ~ r m n trnnr-40 L a 1 ILL1 ILJb L I ,e v u , I "I I. I I . v u v .
5. Press the back of the power door lock switch until you hear the number of chimes corresponding to the mode selection you want.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle.
2-53
Remote Driver Unlock Control
This feature allows you to customize the UNLOCK button on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
Programmable Modes
Your vehicle can be programmed to one of the following modes.
Mode 1: Remote All Doors Unlock (When you press UNLOCK on your remote keyless entry transmitter, all doors will unlock.)
Mode 2: Remote Driver's Door Unlock Only (When you press UNLOCK on your remote keyless entry transmitter once, the driver's door will unlock. When you press UNLOCK on your remote keyless entry transmitter again within five seconds, all doors will unlock.)
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was programmed in Mode 2. The mode to which the vehicle has been programmed may have been changed since it left the factory. To determine the mode to which your vehicle is programmed or to program your vehicle to a different mode, do the following:
1. Follow the instructions for Entering Programming Mode on page2-50.
2. Press UNLOCK on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
3. Count the number of chimes you hear. The number of chimes indicates the vehicle's current programmed mode. If you do not wish to change the current mode, you can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle.
4. Press UNLOCK on the remote keyless entry transmitter to change the current mode.
5. Press UNLOCK on the remote keyless entry transmitter until you hear the numbeor f chimes corresponding to the mode selection you want.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle.
2-54
Remote Lock and Unlock Confirmation
This feature allows you to customize the feedback received when locking or unlocking your vehicle with the remote keyless entry transmitter.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: Both Features Off (Remote lock and unlock confirmation are disabled.)
Mode 2: Exterior Lamps Flash Only
e When you use the remote keyless entry transmitter to lock your vehicle, your headlamps and parking lamps will flash briefly to let you know the command has been received.
e When you use the remote keyless entry transmitter to unlock your vehicle, your headlamps and parking lamps will flash briefly to let you know the command has been received.
Mode 3: Exterior Lamps Flash and Horn Sound
When you use the remote keyless entry transmitter to lock your vehicle, your headlamps and parking lamps will flash briefly on each press and your horn will sound briefly on the second or any other press to let you know the command has been received.
When you use the remote keyless entry transmitter to unlock your vehicle, your headlamps and parking lamps will flash briefly to let you know the command has been received.
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was programmed in Mode 3. The mode to which the vehicle has been programmed may have been changed since it left the factory. To determine the mode to which your vehicle is programmed or to program your vehicle to a different mode, do the following:
1. Follow the instructions for Entering Programming Mode on page 2-50.
2. Press the LOCK button on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
2-55
3. Count the number of chimes you hear. The number of chimes indicates the vehicle's current programmed mode. If you do not wish to change the current mode, you can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in thissection or program the next feature available on your vehicle.
4. Press LOCK on the remote keyless entry transmitter to change the current mode.
5. Press LOCK on the remote keyless entry transmitter until you hear the number of chimes corresponding to the mode selection you want.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle.
Exiting Programming Mode
To exit programming mode, do one of the following:
Press the odometer button, while in odometer mode, for two seconds, or
turn the ignition key out of ON, or
do not program any commands for one minute while in programming mode, or
shift out of PARK (P). See Shifting Out of Park (P) on page 2-30.
The programming mode messagewill turn off to let you know that you are no longer in the programming mode.
2-56
Memory Seat
If your vehicle has this feature, the controls are located on the driver's door Dane1 and are used to
program and recall the driver's seat position and outside rearview mirror
position.
Adjust the driver's seat and the outside rearview mirrors to the position you would like for driving. Then press and hold memory button 1 for more than three seconds. A double beep will sound when the memory seat and mirrors are set.
To set the seat and outside rearview mirrors for a
, - - - ~ r e s s hrlt rlri\mr " cV aV pV nlnI U rl U,,.". fnllnw I..,,-.. thn I..- nrr*c-r\-li.n-lI-C-stonr -e7
button 2 instead.
To recall your memory positions, your vehicle must be in PARK (P). Push and release the memory button (1 or 2) corresponding to the desired driving position. The seat and the outside rearview mirrors will move to tyhoeupwoisllithioenapr roenveiobueselyps.tored for the identified driver.
You can also store an exit position for each driver. The exit position is programmed by moving the seat to the desired exit position and then holding the exit symbol button for more than three seconds. The exit position set will be for the most recently selected driving position (1 or 2). A double beep will sound when the memory is set.
To use exit, your vehicle must be in PARK (P). Push and release the exit symbol button and the seat will move to the exit position stored for the most recently selected driver. You will hear one beep.
To stop recall movement of the seat at any time, press one of the three memory buttons or one of the power seat controls located on the outboard side of the driver's seat.
If your vehicle is equipped with a Driver Information Center (DIC), you can use it to program certain functions of the memory seats. See DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-59.
2-57
f i NOTES
2-58
Section 3 Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview ............................... 3.4
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................ 3-6
Other Warning Devices ...................................3.6
Horn ............................................................. 3.6 Tilt Wheel ..................................................... 3-7
Turn SignaVMultifunction Lever ......................... 3.7
Exterior Lamps ............................................. 3.13
Interior Lamps .............................................. 3.15
Instrument Panel Switchbank .......................... 3-18
Head-Up Display (HUD) ................................. 3.19
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) ............3.22
Accessory Power Outlets ............................3.24
AshtraysandCigaretteLighter
............. ....3.25
Climate Controls ............................................ 3.26
Climate Control System ................................. 3.26
Dual Climate Control System .......................... 3.28 Dual Automatic Climate Control System ...........3.31 Outlet Adjustment ......................................... 3.34
.w..arning
iignis,
Gages
ana
inaicaiors
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.J.n
e . ?
.J
~
Instrument Panel Cluster ................................ 3.36
Speedometer and Odometer ........................... 3.37
Tachometer ................................................. 3.38
Safety Belt Reminder Light ............................. 3.38
Air Bag Readiness Light ................................ 3-39 Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-40 Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light .............3.41
Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light ........................................... 3-41 Engine Coolant Temperature Gage .................. 3.42
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ............................. 3.42 Fuel Gage ...................................................3.46
Message Center ............................................. 3.47
Service Traction System Warning Message ......3.47 Traction Active Message ............................... -3-47
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
Message ..................................................3-48 Charging System Indicator Message ................ 3-48
Low Oil Pressure Message ............................ 3-49 Low Engine Oil Level Message ....................... 3-50
-... Change Engine Oil Message .......................... 3-50
I
LWVV
Tiwn I IIG
filnn-nrrn IvlGaQUyb
........................................
?-r;n
V vv
Door Ajar Warning Message ........................... 3-51
Rear Hatch Ajar Warning Message ..................3-51 PASS-Key@Ill Security Message .....................3-51
Section 3 Instrument Panel
All-Wheel Drive Disable Warning Message .......3.52
Low Washer Fluid Warning Message ...............3-52 Low Fuel Warning Message .......................... -3-53 Low Brake Fluid Warning Message .................3-53 Service Vehicle Soon Message ....................... 3.54 Program Mode Message ................................ 3.54 Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter
Battery Low Warning Message .................... 3.55 Park Lamp Warning Message ......................... 3.55
Highbeam Out Warning Message .................... 3.55
Driver Information Center (DIC) ...................... -3-56 DIC Controls and Displays ............................. 3-58 DIC Vehicle Personalization ............................ 3.59
Audio System(s) ............................................. 3.69 Setting the Time ........................................... 3-69 Radio with CD .............................................. 3-69
Radio with Cassette and CD .......................... 3-76 Radio with Six-Disc CD ................................. 3-88 Entertainment System .................................. 3-101 RearSeatAudio(RSA) ........ , ................ 3-110 Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................ 3-112 Audio Steering Wheel Controls ...................... 3-113 DVD Distortion ............................................ 3-113 Understanding Radio Reception .................... 3-114
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player ...............3-1 14
Care of Your CDs and DVDs ........................ 3-115
Care of Your CD and DVD Player .................3-115
Cleaning Your DVD Player ........................... 3-115
Cleaning the Video Screen ........................... 3-116
Integrated Windshield Antenna ...................... 3-116
XMTMSatellite Radio Antenna System.............3-116
DAB Radio Antenna System ......................... 3-116
3-2
-
S310N
Instrument Panel Overview
The main components of the instrument panel are the following:
A. Exterior/lnterior Lamps Control B. TurnSignaVMultifunction Lever C. Hazard Warning Flasher Switch D. instrument Panel Cluster E. ShiftLever F. InstrumentPanel Outlets G. AudioSystem H. Audio Steering Wheel Controls I. Head-Up Display Switch and Driver Information
Center (DIC) Controls
J. Hood Release K. Ignition Switch L. Climate Controls M. Instrument Panel Switchbank N. Front Armrest Storage (3. Ashtray/Cigarette Lighter/Accessory Power
Outlet/Cell Phone Storage/Purse Storage/Cupholders P. Instrument Panel Fuse Block
Q. Glove Box
3-5
Hazard Warning Flashers
The hazard warning flasher button is located on top of the steering column.
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They also let police know you have a problem. Your front and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
3-6
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what position your key is in, and even if the key isn't in.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to turn the flashers off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, the turn signals won't work.
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set one up at the side of the road about 300 feet (I00 m) behind your vehicle.
Horn
You can sound the horn by pressing the center of your steering wheel.
Tilt Wheel
A tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel
before you drive. You can raise it to the highest level to
givyeouler gms orreoom
when you exit and enter
the vehicle.
The lever that allows you to tilt the steering wheel is located on the left side of the steering column.
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the lever.
Turn SignaVMultifunction Lever
I
Then move the steering wheel to a comfortable position and release the lever to lock the wheel in place.
The lever on the left side of the steering column includes the following:
Tuarnnd Lane-Change Signals
go Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
Flash-to-Pass
fp\t{inbc--$s!d \/y;se-s
Windshield Washer
r;3 Cruise Control
3-7
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two downward (for left) positions. These positions allow you to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down. When the turn is finished, the lever will return automatically.
An arrow on the instrument panel cluster and the HUD display will flash in the direction of the turn or lane change.
To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold itthere until you
complete your lane change. The lever will return by itself
when you release it.
-
As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrow flashes faster than normal, a signal bulb may be burned out and other drivers won't see your turn signal.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an accident. If the arrows don't go on at all when you signal a turn, check for burned-out bulbs andcheck the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-96.
3-8
If you have a trailer towing option with added wiring for the trailer lamps, the signal indicator will flash at a normal rate even if a turn signal bulb is burned out. Check the front and rear turn signal lamps regularly to make sure they are working.
Turn Signal On Chime
If either turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 mile (1.2 km), a chime will sound to let the driver know to turn it off.
If you need to leave the signal on for more than 3/4 mile (1.2 km), turn off the signal and then turn it back on.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
To change the headlamps from low to high, simply push the turn signal lever away from you. Then release it. To change the headlamps from high to low, pull the lever toward you.
1
Whenthehighbeamsare
on, this light, on the
instrument panel cluster
and the HUD display,
will also be on.
Flash-to-Pass
When the headlamps are off, pull the lever toward you to momentarily switch on the high beams (to signal that you are going to pass). When you release the lever, they will turn off.
Windshield Wipers
You control the windshield wipers by turning the band marked WIPER.
For a single wiping cycle, turn the band to MIST. Hold it there until the wipers start, then let go. The wipers will stop after one cycle. If you want more cycles, hold the band on mist longer.
For delayed wiping cycles, you can set the wiper speed for a long or short delay between wipes. This can be very useful in light rain or snow. Turn the band to choose the delay time. The closer to LO (low), the shorter the delay time.
For steady wiping cycles, at low speed, turn the band away from you to the LO position. For high-speed wiping, turn the band further to HI (high). To stop the wipers, turn the band to OFF.
Remember that damaged wiper blades may prevent you from seeing well enough to drive safely. To avoid damage, be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper
blades before using them. If they're frezen to t h e
windshield, carefully loosen or thaw them. If your blades do become damaged, get newblades or blade inserts.
Heavy snow or ice can overload your wipers. A circuit breaker will stop them until the motor cools. Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.
Windshield Washer
To wash your windshield, push and hold the paddle with the windshield washer symbol. The washers and wipers will operate. When you release the paddle, the washers will stop, and the wipers will continue to operate for two cycles, unless your wipers had already been on. In that case, the wipers will resume the wiper speed you had selected earlier.
In freezing weather, don't use your washer until the Windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your vision.
I
3-9
Rear Window Washermiper
The rear window washedwiper switch is located in the instrument panel switchbank.
Push the wiper symbol on the top of the switch to turn on the intermittent wiper. To turn off the wiper, gently push the bottom of the switch. To wash and wipe the rear window, push in the washer symbol on the bottom of the switch. Washer fluid will spray as long as the switch is held in. When the switch is released, the wiper will continue to cycle three more times. There is only one washer fluid reservoir for the front and rear windshield wipers. See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5-36. To wash the rear window when the rear wiper is already on, push the bottom of the switch. Push in the top of the switch to continue the intermittent wiper cycle after the washing cycle is completed. 3-1 0
Cruise Control
Cruise control can be dangerous where you can't drive safely at a steady speed. So, don't use your cruise control on winding roads or in heavy traffic. Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire traction can cause needless wheel spinning, and you could lose control. Don't use cruise control on slippery roads.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction control system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise control will automatically disengage. See Traction Control System (TGS) on page4-1 1. When road conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may turn the cruise control back on.
Setting Cruise Control
If you leave your cruise control on when you're not using cruise, you might hit a button and go into cruise when you don't want to. You could be startled and even lose control. Keep the
1cruise control switch off until you want to use cruise control.
1. Move the cruise control switch, located on the turn signaVmultifunction lever, to ON.
2. Get up to the speed you want. 3. Push in the SET button at the end of the lever and
release it. 4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed and then you apply the brake. This, of course, shuts off the cruise control. But you don't need to reset it. Once you're going about 25 rnph (40krn/h) or more, you can move the cruise control switch from ON to R/A (resume/accelerate) briefly.
You'll go right back up to your chosen speed and stay there. If you hold the switch at R/A, the vehicle will keep going faster until you release the switch or apply the brake. So unless you want to go faster, don't hold the switch at R/A.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed: Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed. Push the SET button at the end of the lever, then release the button and the accelerator pedal. You'll now cruise at the higher speed. Move the cruise switch from ON to R/A. Hold it there until you get up to the speed you want, and then release the switch. (To increase your speed in very small amounts, move the switch to R/A briefly and then release it. Each time you do this, your vehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h)
$- -+nr \ IaaLcI .J
The accelerate feature will work whether or not you have set an initial cruise control speed.
3-1 1
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control
There are two ways to reduce speed while using cruise control:
Push in the SET button at the end of the lever until you reach the lower speed you want, then release it.
* To slow down in very small amounts, push the
SET button briefly. Each time you do this, you'll go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed. When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends upon your speed, load and the steepness of the hills. When going up steep hills, you may have to step on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. When going downhill, you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear to keep your speed down. Of course, applying the brake takes you out of cruise control. Many drivers find this to be too much trouble and don't use cruise control on steep hills.
Ending Cruise Control
There are two ways to turn off the cruise control:
Step lightly on the brake pedal, or
move the cruise switch to OFF.
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition, your
cruise control set speed memory is erased.
3-1 2
Exterior Lamps
The control on the left side of the steering column operates the exterior lamps.
The exterior lamp control has three positions:
AUTO (Automatic Headlamp ControVOff): Turning the control to this position will activate the automatic headlamps when it is dark enough outside and turn off all lamps and lights during the day except for the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL).
pg (Parking Lamps): Turning the control to this
position turns on the parking lamps together with the following:
Taillamps
instrumentPanei Lights
$iofl (Headlamps): Turning the control to this position turns on the headlamps together with the previously listed lamps and lights.
Lamps on Reminder
If the driver's door is opened and you turn the ignition to OFF while leaving the lamps on, you will hear a warning chime.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short periods after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles first sold in Canada.
A light sensor on top of the instrument panel makes the
DRL work, so be sure it isn't covered. The DRL
---- _ _ system will make your reduced intensity high-beam
- I-
- -11
I Iedulal I
,. ;- A n , , l ; m h + ,.,hn,,.
I lru~ l IIG VI I I I I U C A Y I I YI L~ V V ,
The ignition is on,
0 the exterior lamps control is in AUTO, and
0 the shift lever is not in PARK (P).
3-1 3
When the DRL are on, only your reduced intensity high-beam headlamps will be on. Your instrument panel won't be lit up.
When it's dark enough outside, the exterior lamps will come on automatically. When it's bright enough outside, the exterior lamps will go out and the DRL will turn on. Of course, you may still turn on the headlamps any time you need to.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular headlamp system when you need it.
Automatic Headlamp System
When the exterior lamps control is turned to AUTO, the headlamps andparking lamps will come on automatically when it is dark enough outside.
The lamps will come on automatically if:
It is dark enough outside,
theignition is in ON,
the parking brake is released, and
the exterior lamps control is in the AUTO position.
Fog Lamps
The fog lamp button is located on the exterior lamp control.
Push the FOG PUSH button to turn the fog lamps on. The FOG light indicates the fog lamps are on.To turn off the fog lamps, press the fog lamp button or turn the
ignition off.
If you turn on the fog lamps while the DRL are on, the parking lamps will turn on automatically.
Your fog lamps will go off when you switch to high beams. When you return to low beam, the fog lamps will come back on. Using your high beams in fog is not recommended.
3-14
Interior Lamps
Your interior lamps control ilsocated below the exterior lamps control.
Instrument Panel Brightness
This feature controls the brightness of the instrument panel lights. The knob for this feature is located on the interior lamps control. Press the knob and it will extend. Turn the knob clockwise to brighten the lights or counterclockwise to dim them. Press the knob in when not in use.
Interior Lamps Control
Turn the interior lamp control to one of the following positions:
OFF: To turn the interior lamps off.
DOOR: To turn on the interior lamps when any door is opened and when the ignition key is removed from the ignition.
ON: To turn the interior lamps on.
Headlamp Exit Delay
If your vehicle has headlamp exit delay, it will keep the headlamps and parking lamps on at night for 30 seconds if:
0 The ignition is turned to OFF,
the exterior lamp control is in the AUTO position,
LOCK is pressed on the remote keyless entry transmitter, and
it is dark enough outside.
After 30 seconds, the headlamps and parking lamps will turn off.
The lamps will turn off before the 30 seconds if:
The ignition is turned to ON, or
the exterior lamp control is turned out of the AUTO position.
To program the headlamp exit delay feature, see
Vehick Persoaalizatim on page 2-59. If your vehicle is
equipped with the Driver Information Center (DIC), see DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-59.
3-1 5
Entry Lighting
If your vehicle has entry lighting, the interior of your vehicle will illuminate for 25 seconds so you can see inside your vehicle before you enter. To activate entry lighting, do the following:
Unlock a door using the key when the interior lamp control is in the DOOR position, and when the ignition is in OFF, or
0 press UNLOCK on the remote keyless entry transmitter when the interior lamp control is in the DOOR position, and when the ignition is in OFF.
After 25 seconds, the interior lamps will fade out.
The lamps will turn off before 25 seconds if you:
Press LOCK on the remote keyless entry transmitter, or
press the front of the power door lock switch, or
turn the ignition to ON.
When any door is opened, entry lighting is cancelled. The interior lamps will stay on while any door or the liftgate is open, and fade out when all the doors are closed.
Delayed Lighting
If your vehicle has delayed lighting, it will continueto illuminate the interior for 25 seconds afterall doors have been closed. The lampswill continueto illuminate when:
A door is opened then closed,
0 the interior lamp control is in the DOOR position, and
the ignition is in OFF.
After 25 seconds, the interior lamps will fade out. The lamps will fade out before the 25 seconds if:
The ignition is turned to ON,
LOCK is pressed on the remote keyless entry transmitter, or the front of the power door lock switch is pressed.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Driver Information Center (DIC), you can program this feature on or off. See D E Vehicle Personalization on page 3-59.
3-16
Exit Lighting
If your vehicle is equipped with exit lighting, the interior lamps will come on for about 30 seconds whenever you remove the key from the ignition if:
The vehicle is in PARK (P), the key is out of the ignition,
the interior lamp controlis in the DOOR position, and
0 all of the doors are closed.
After 30 seconds, the interior lamps will fade out. The interior lamps will fade out before 30 seconds if:
The ignition is turned to ON,
LOCK is pressed on the remote keyless entry transmitter, or the front of the power door lock switch is pressed.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Driver Information
. OCTeTn.steere(Du-I. ICLe),vyI eoI ru.dceanr-e.plsr.ou-igSrLaimik
this
A&X
feature on or GI> p;;+ 3-52.
Perimeter Lighting
If your vehicle has perimeter lighting, it will turn on the headlamps and parkinglamps for 25 seconds when:
The ignition is turned to OFF,
0 the exterior lamp control is in the AUTO position,
UNLOCK is pressed on the remote keyless entry transmitter, and
0 it is dark enough outside.
After 25 seconds, the headlamps and parking lamps will turn off.
The lamps will turn off before the 25 seconds if:
The ignition is turned to ON, or
the exterior lamp control is turned out of the AUTO position.
To program the perimeter lighting feature, see Remote Lock and Unlock Confirmation onpage 2-55. If your vehicle is equipped with the Driver Information Center (DIC), you can program this feature on or off. See "Remote Lock Feedback" under DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-59.
Front Reading Lamps
_I n. ere are two reading iarrlps i u i ; & i i mirror.
u i - 1 ii-le CeZ-tkii
To turn either reading lamp on or off, press the button located next to each lamp.
These lamps will come on each time you open the doors, if the interior lamp control is in the ON or DOOR position.
3-1 7
Rear Reading Lamps
There are two reading lamps with coat hooks above the rear doors.
To turn on or off either reading lamp, press the lens of
the lamp.
Cargo Lamp
The cargo lamp is located in the rear of the vehicle, above the liftgate opening. It comes on automatically each time you open the doors, if the interior lamp control is in the DOOR position.
There are two reading lamps located on the cargo lamp. To turn either reading lamp on or off, press the button located next to the lamp.
Battery Run-Down Protection
Your vehicle has a feature to help prevent you from draining the battery, in case you accidentally leave the interior or exterior lamps on. If the interior lamps are left on while the ignition is in OFF, they will automatically turn off after 10 minutes. If the exterior lamps are left on while the ignition is in OFF with all doors and
the liftgate closed, they will automatically turn off after
10 minutes.
If your vehicle has less than 14 miles (24 km) on the odometer, the battery saver will turn off the lamps after only three minutes.
If the interior lamps are turned off as a result of the
battery saver feature, they may be turned back on by turning the interior lamp control to OFF and then back to ON. The battery saver will not turn the interior lamps off automatically after doing this. They will haveto
be turned off manually.
Instrument Panel Switchbank
There is an instrument panel switchbank located below the comfort controls. It contains switches or blanks that will vary with the options that are on your vehicle.
The switches you may have are:
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
LiftgateRelease
Traction Disable
ParkAid Disable
Heated Seats(driver's and passenger's)
For more information, see each of these features in the Index.
3-1 8
Head-Up Display (HUD)
4
If the HUD image is too bright, or too high in
your field of view, it may take you moretime to see things you need to see when it's dark outside. Be sure to keep the HUD image dim
and placed low in your field of view.
If your vehicle has the HUD, it can display the speedometer reading in English or metric. The current radio station, CD number and/or track number or tape may also be displayed and will appear as an image focused out toward the front of your vehicle. The HUD is capable of displaying English or French. See DIC Controls and Displayson page 3-58 to change the displav from Enqlish to metric. The Head-Up Display also displays the following lights and messages when they appear on the instrument panel cluster:
TurnSignalIndicators
High-Beam Indicator
* Low-FuelWarning Message
See each of these features in the Index for more information. The Head-Up Display also displays a CHECK GAGES icon. The following messages could appear on the instrument panel cluster when CHECK GAGES appears:
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Message
* Low Oil Pressure Message
Charging System Indicator Message
* LowBrake Fluid Warning Message
See each of these messages in the Index for more information.
I ..........................e.............................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................I.............................................................................................................
Under warning conditions, the CHECK GAGES icon will illuminate in the HUD. Look at the instrument panel cluster for more information.
3-19
Notice: Although the HUD image appears to be near the front of the vehicle, do not use it as a parking aid. The HUD was not designed for that purpose. If you try to use it as such, you may misjudge the distance and damage your vehicle.
The HUD controls are located to the left of the steering wheel on the instrument panel.
When the HUD is on, the speedometer reading will always be displayed. The current radio station, cassette tape or CD number and track number will only be displayed for three seconds after the radio, tape or CD track status changes. This will happen whenever one of the radio controls is pressed, either on the radio or on the audio steering wheel controls (if equipped).
To adjust the HUD so you can see it properly:
1. Start your engine and turn the dimmer knob to the desired HUD image brightness.
The brightness of the HUD image is determined by the ambient light conditions in the direction your vehicle is facing and where you have the HUD dimmer knob set. If you are facing a dark object or a heavily shaded area, your HUD may anticipate that you are entering a dark area and may begin to dim.
2. Adjust the driver's seat. If you change your seat position, you may have to readjust your HUD.
3. Press the UP or DN buttons until the HUD image is easy to see and then press the DN button until the HUD image is as low as possible, but remains in full view straight ahead near the front bumper.
The HUD image can only be adjusted up and down, not side-to-side.
4. To turn the image off, turn the dimmer knob counterclockwise to OFF.
3-20
If the sun comes out or it becomes cloudy, you may need to adjust the HUD brightness again using the dimmer knob. Polarized sunglasses could make the HUD image harder to see.
When you first start the vehicle the display will show BUICK and the h i c k logo for a few seconds. If it is cold outside, this display may stay on for up to a minute.
Clean the inside of the windshield as needed to remove any dirt or film that reduces the sharpness or clarity of the HUD image.
To clean the HUD, spray household glass cleaner on a soft, clean cloth. Wipe the HUD lens gently, then dry it. Do not spray cleaner directly on the lens because the cleaner could leak into the unit.
If the ignition is on and you can't see the HUD image, check to see if one of the following conditions exist:
0 The HUD unit is covered,
0 the HUD dimmer knob is adjusted incorrectly,
0 the HUD image is not adjusted to the proper height,
0 ambient light (in the direction your vehicle is facing) is low, or
a fuse is blown. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on
page 5-96.
If you ever have to have your windshield replaced, be
sure to get one that is designed for the HUD or your
HUD image may look blurred and out of focus.
3-21
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist
(URPA)
The Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) systemis designed to help you park, while the vehicle is in REVERSE (R). Itoperates only atvery low speeds, less than 3 mph (5 km/h). URPA can help make parking easier and to help you avoid collidingwith objects such as parked vehicles. The URPAsystem can detect objects up to 5 feet (1.5 m) behind the vehicle,and tell you how close these objects are from your rear bumper.
Your vehicle's URPAoperates when theshift lever is moved into REVERSE (R)and the vehicle speed is less than 3 mph (5 km/h). Four ultrasonic sensors located at the rear bumper are used to detect the distance to the object. The URPA display is located inside the vehicle, near the rear window.It has threecolor-coded lights used to providedistance and system information to thedriver.
If children, bicycles, or pets are behind your vehicle, RPA won't tell you they are there. You could strike them and they could be injuredor killed. Whether or not you are using URPA, check carefully behind your vehicle and then watch closely whenever you back up.
URPA can be turned off by pressing the rear parkaid disable switch located in the instrument panel switchbank. When the system is disabled an indicator light will glow on the switch. You will not see any lights on the rear display if the switch is in the off position.
3-22
How the System Works
Unless disabled, the URPA will turn on automatically when the shift lever is moved into REVERSE (R). When the system turns on, the three lights on the display will illuminate for one anda half seconds to let you know that the system is working. If your vehicle is moving in REVERSE (R) at a speed greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), the red light will flash to remind you that the system does not work at speed greater than 3 mph (5 km/h).
If an object is detected at a REVERSE (R) speed of less
than 3 mph (5 km/h), one of the following will occur:
continuous chime
I
chime
I
i
I
I
I
1
A chime will sound the first time an object is detected between 20 inches (0.5 m) and 5 feet (1.5 m) away.
URPA cannot detect objects that are above liftgate level. In order for the rear sensors to recognize an object, it must be within detection range behind the vehicle.
When the System Does Not Seem to Work Properly
The light may flash red when the vehicle is in
REVERSE (R) if the ultrasonic sensors are not kept clean. So be sure to keep your rear bumper free of mud,
dirt, snow, ice and slush. Other conditions that may affect system performance include things like the vibrations from a jackhammer or the compression of air brakes on a very large truck. If after cleaning the rear bumper and then driving forward at least 15 mph (25 km/h), the display continues to flash red, see your dealer.
If a trailer was attached to your vehicle, or a bicycle or an object was on the back of, or hanging out of your liftgate duringyour last drive cycle, the light may also flash red. The light will continue to flash whenever in REVERSE (R) until your vehicle is driven forward at least 15 mph (25 km/h) without any obstructions behind the vehicle.
For cleaning instructions, see Cleaning the Outside of YL)I-!TVehicle nn pace 5-90.
3-23
Accessory Power Outlets
With accessory power outlets you can plug in electrical equipment such as a cellular telephone or CB radio.
There is one front power outletlcigarette lighter located on the floor console in the cell phone storage compartment.
There are also two rear power outlets. One is located in the rear of the floor console below the vents. The other is located in the rear of the vehicle on the driver's side behind the access door.
Pull the cover down to use an accessory power outlet. When not in use, always cover the accessory power outlets with the protective cap.
The accessory power outlets will only operate while the ignition is on and for 10 minutes after turning the ignition off. If you would like to operate an accessory for an extended period of time, see your dealer for more information.
Notice: When using an accessory power outlet, maximum electrical load must not exceed20 amps. Always turn off any electrical equipment when not in use. Leaving electrical equipment on for extended periods will drain your battery.
Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible with the accessory power outlet and could result
in blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a
problem, see your dealer for additional information on the accessory power outlets.
Nofice: Adding some electrical equipment to your vehicle can damageit or keep other things from working as they should. This wouldn't be covered by your warranty. Check with yourdealer before adding electrical equipment, and never use anything that exceeds theamperage rating.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the proper installation instructions included with the equipment.
Notice: Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug. Improper useof the power outlet can causedamage not covered by your warranty.
3-24
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter
The ashtray is located on the floor console closest to the instrument panel. Lift the lid to expose the ashtray. The ashtray removes by lifting it up.
The cigarette lighter is located on the floor console in the cell phone storage compartment closest to the driver's seat. Lift the lid to expose the cigarette lighter.
To use the lighter, push it in all the way and let go. When it's ready, it will pop back out by itself.
Notice: Don't hold a cigarette lighter in with your hand while it is heating. If you do, it won't be able to back away from the heating element when it's ready. That can make it overheat, damaging the lighter and the heating element.
Notice; Don't put papers or other flammable
items into your ashtrays. Hot cigarettes or other
smoking materials could ignite them, causing a damaging fire.
3-25
Climate Controls
Climate Control System
With this system you can control the heating, cooling and ventilation for your vehicle.
Operation
Turn the right knob clockwise or counterclockwise to direct the airflow inside of your vehicle. To change the current mode, select one of the following:
2 (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrument
panel outlets.
3-26
+2(Bi-Level): This mode directs half of the air to the
instrument panel outlets, then directs the remaining air to the floor outlets. Cooler air is directed to the upper outlets and warmer air to the floor outlets.
td (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to the
floor outlets. Use this mode to send air to the rear of the vehicle. Keep the area under the front seats free of objects that could obstruct airflow to the rear of the vehicle.
The right knob can also be used to select defog or defrost mode. For more information, see "Defogging and Defrosting" later in this section.
@ (Fan): Turn the left knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed. Turn the knob to 0 to turn off the fan. The fan must be turned on for the air conditioning compressor to operate.
(Recirculation): This mode keeps outside air from coming in the vehicle. It can be used to prevent outside air and odors from entering your vehicle or help heat or cool the air inside your vehicle more quickly.
Press this button to turn the recirculation mode on or off.
When the button is pressed, an indicator light will come on. The air-conditioning compressor also comes on. The recirculation mode can be used with vent and bi-level modes, but it cannot be used with floor, defog, defrost or outside air modes.
Temperature Control: Turn the center knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the air temperature inside your vehicle.
a A/C (AirConditioning): Press this button to turn
the air-conditioning system on or off. When N C is pressed, an indicator light in the button will come on to let you know that air conditioning is activated.
You may notice a slight change in engine performance when the air-conditioning compressor shuts off and turns on again. This is normal. The system is designed to make adjustments tohelp with fuel economy while still maintaining the selected temperature.
On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside air escape; then close them, This helps to reduce the time it takes for your vehicle to cool down. It also helps the system to operate more efficiently.
For quick cool down on hot days, do the following:
1. Select the vent mode.
2. Select the coolest temperature.
3n .
c \ - I - - + +L- ~;-h,.-t f q n p,-,mm& 3 G l G b L C I I C I I I ~ I I G G C t u 1 6 up---.
4. Select N C .
5. Select the recirculation mode.
Using these settings together for long periods of time may cause the air inside of your vehicle to become too
dry. To prevent this frcm happening, after the air
inside of your vehicle has cooled, turn the recirculation mode off.
The air-conditioning system removes moisture from the air, so you may sometimes notice a small amount of water dripping underneath your vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine. This is normal.
Defogging and Defrosting
There are two modes to clear fog or frost from your windshield. Use the defog mode to clear the windows of fog or moisture and warm the passengers. Use the defrost mode to remove fog or frost from the windshield more quickly.
Turn the right knob to select the defog or defrost mode.
+>(Defog): This mode directs air to the windshield
and the floor outlets. When you select this mode, the system turns off recirculation and runs the air-conditioning compressor unless the outside temperature is at or below freezing. The recirculation mode cannot be selected while in the defog mode.
v~fy (`u-er*rost-l;'
r
l
e.-a-
-a: l.-l-~.
y+L:-
LI 1 1 3
L U
. ~
L
~ I UuIIz~IbcQ
...- ,lluv. *+ tho
air to the windshield and the side window outlets,
with some air directed to the floor outlets. In this mode,
the system will automatically turn off recirculation
and run the air-conditioning compressor, unless the
outside temperature is at or below freezing.
Recirculation cannot be selected while in the
defrost mode.
3-27
Rear Window Defogger
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to remove fog from the rear window.
REAR: Press this button to turn the rear window defogger on or off. An indicator light in the button will come on to let you know that the rear window defogger is activated.
The rear window defogger will turn off approximately 10 minutes after the button is pressed. If turned on again, the defogger will only run for approximately five
minutes before turning off. The defogger can also
be turned off by pressing the button again or by turning off the engine.
Notice: Don't use anything sharp on the inside of the rear window. If you do, you could cut or damage the warming grid, and the repairs wouldn't be covered by your warranty. Do not attach a temporary vehicle license, tape, a decal or anything similar to the defogger grid.
Dual Climate Control System
Your vehicle may have a dual climate control system. With this system you can control the heating, cooling and ventilation for your vehicle.
I
I
Operation
Turn the right knob clockwise or counterclockwise to direct the airflow inside of your vehicle. To change the current mode, select one of the following:
f;' (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrument
panel outlets.
3-28
+2(Bi-Level): This mode directs half of the air to the
instrument panel outlets, then directs the remaining
air to the floor outlets. Cooler air is directed to the upper
outlets and warmer air to the floor outlets.
(Floor): This mode directs most of the air to the floor outlets. Use this mode to send air to the rear of the vehicle. Keep the area under the front seats free of objects that could obstruct airflow to the rear of the vehicle.
The right knob can also be used to select defog or defrost mode. For more information, see "'Defogging and Defrosting" later in this section.
@ (Fan): Turn the left knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed. Turn the knob to OFF to turn off the fan. The fan must be turned on for the air conditioning compressor to operate.
a (Outside Air): Press this button to turn the
ouiside GY ., air [-<Iu& 61-1
-LC uII.
\vAvl dt . n r \ I
+hie mnrln
l a i ) I IIvub
ic
-p-q
outside air will circulate throughout your vehicle. When
this mode is on, an indicator light in the button will
come on to let you know that it is activated. The outside
air mode can be used with all modes, but it cannot
be used with the recirculation mode.
& (Recirculation): This mode keeps outside air
from coming in the vehicle. It can be used to prevent outside air and odors from entering your vehicle or help heat or cool the air inside your vehicle more quickly. Press this button to turn the recirculation mode on or off. When the button is pressed, an indicator light will
come on. The air-conditioning compressor also comes
on. The recirculation mode can be used with vent and bi-level modes, but it cannot be used with floor, defog, defrost or outside air modes.
Temperature Control: Use the driver's and passenger's temperature levers to increase or decrease the air temperature inside your vehicle.
a A/C (Air Conditioning): Press this button to turn
the air-conditioning system on or off. When A/C is
pressed, an indicator light in the button will come on to let you know that air conditioning is activated.
You may notice a slight change in engine performance when the air-conditioning compressor shuts off and turns on again. This is normal. The system is designed to make adjustments to help with tuel economy wniie still maintaining the selected temperature.
On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside air escape; then close them. This helps to reduce the time it takes for your vehicle to cool down. It also helps
t h e system io operate KOi-e efficiently.
3-29
For quick cool down on hot days, do the following:
1. Select the vent mode.
2. Select the coolest temperature. 3. Select the highest fan speed.
4. Select N C . 5. Select the recirculation mode.
Using these settingstogether for long periods of time may cause the air inside of your vehicle to become too dry. To prevent this from happening, after the air inside of your vehicle has cooled, turn therecirculation mode off.
The air-conditioning system removes moisture from the air, so you may sometimes notice a small amount of water dripping underneath your vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine. This is normal.
Defogging and Defrosting
There are two modes to clear fog or frost from your windshield. Use the defog mode to clear the windows of fog or moisture and warm the passengers. Use the defrost mode to remove fog or frost from the windshield more quickly.
Turn the right knob to select the defog or defrost mode.
+3(Defog): This mode directs air to the windshield
and the floor outlets. When you select this mode, the system turns off recirculation and runs the air-conditioning compressor unless the outside temperature is at or below freezing. The recirculation mode cannot be selected while in the defog mode.
3-30
@ (Defrost): Pressing this button directs mostof the
air to the windshield and the side window outlets, with some air directed tothe floor outletsI.n this mode, the system will automatically turnoff recirculation and run the air-conditioning compressor, unless the outside temperature is at or below freezing. Recirculation cannot be selected while in the defrost mode.
Rear Window Defogger
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to remove fog from the rear window.
REAR: Press this button to turn the rear window defogger on or off. An indicator light in the button will come on to let you know that the rear window defogger is activated.
The rear window defogger will turn off approximately 10 minutes after the button is pressed.If turned on again, the defogger will only run for approximately five minutes before turning off. The defogger can also be turned off by pressing the button again or by turning off the engine.
Notice: Don't use anything sharp on the inside of the rear window. If you do, you could cut or damage the warming grid, and the repairs wouldn't be covered by your warranty. Do not attach a temporary vehicle license, tape, a decal or anything similar to the defogger grid.
Dual Automatic Climate Control System
Your vehicle may have the dual automatic climate control system. With this system you can control the heating, cooling and ventilation for your vehicle.
Automatic Operation
AUTO (Automatic): When the urivers iemperaiure knob is pressed to select AUTO and the temperature is set, the system will automatically control the inside temperature, the air delivery and the fan speed. AUTO will also appear on the display.
Use the steps below to place the entire system in automatic mode:
1. Press the driver's temperature knob.
2. Adjust the temperature to a comfortable setting.
Choosing the coldest or warmest temperature will not cause the system to heat or cool any faster.
In cold weather, the system will start at reduced fan speeds to avoid blowing cold air into your vehicle until warmer air is available. Then, as the air warms, it will be delivered through the instrument panel outlets. The length of time needed for warm up will depend on the outside temperature and the length of time that has elapsed since your vehicle was last driven.
3. Wait for the system to regulate. This may take from
10 to 30 minutes. Then adjust the temperature as
necessary.
3-31
Manual Operation
MODE: Press this button to manually change the direction of airflow in your vehicle; keep pressing the button until the desired mode appears on the display.
To change the current mode, select one of the following:
2 (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrument
panel outlets.
42(Bi-Level): This mode directs approximately half of
the air to the instrument panel outlets, then directs the remaining air to the floor outlets and the defroster and side window outlets. Cooler air is directed to the upper outlets and warmer air to the floor outlets.
td (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to
the floor outlets. Use this mode to send air to the rear of the vehicle. Keep the area under the front seats free of objects that could obstruct airflow to the rear of the vehicle.
The MODE button can also be used to select defog or defrost mode. For more information, see "Defogging and Defrosting" later in this section.
% (Fan): Press this button to increase to decrease
the fan speed; keep pressing the up or down arrow until the desired fan speed appears on the display.
VENT: Press this button to turn the outside air mode on or off. When this mode is on, outside air will be circulated throughout your vehicle. VENT can be used with all modes, but it cannot be used with the recirculation mode.
(Recirculation): This mode keeps outside air from coming in the vehicle. It can be used to prevent outside air and odors from entering your vehicle or help heat or cool the air inside your vehicle more quickly. Press this button to turn the recirculation mode onor off. When the button is pressed, an indicator light will come on. The air-conditioning compressor also comes on. The recirculation mode can be used with vent and bi-level modes, but it cannot be used with floor, defog, defrost or outside air modes.
Temperature Control: Use the DRIVER knob to increase or decrease the air temperature inside your vehicle. If the front passenger would like their temperature to be warmer or cooler, use the PASS knob to adjust the passenger's temperature.
Air Conditioning: The air-conditioning compressor will automatically come on when a temperature cooler than the interior temperature is chosen using the temperature knobs.
3-32
You may notice a slight change in engine performance when the air-conditioning compressor shuts off and turns on again. This is normal. The system is designed to make adjustments to help with fuel economy while still maintaining the selected temperature.
On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside air escape; then close them. This helps to reduce the time it takes for your vehicle to cool down. It also helps the system to operate more efficiently.
For quick cool down on hot days, do the following:
1. Select the vent mode.
2. Select the recirculation mode.
3. Select the coolest temperature.
4. Select the highest fan speed.
Using these settings together for long periods of time
may cause the air inside of your vehicle to become too
dry. To prevent this from happening, after the air
. y u u l ! - - - ! - I - -1 . - - . . I .--h:-l- h n m nrrnlnrl + s u m +ha rapirplIlo+inn
I 1 I > I L l t ; VI
V G I I I ~ I GI I U 3 C I U U I ~ U ,L U I I I I# I" . " V a l Vu.--.-.
mode off.
The air-conditioning system removes moisture from the air, so you may sometimes notice a small amount of water dripping underneath yourvehicle while idling
or after turnix~zlf: the engine. This is norma!.
Defogging and Defrosting
There are two modes to clear fog or frost from your windshield. Use the defog mode to clear the windows of fog or moisture and warm the passengers. Use the defrost mode to remove fog or frost from the windshield more quickly.
Use the MODE button to select the defog mode.
+3(Defog): This mode directs air to the windshield and
the floor outlets. When you select this mode, the system turns off recirculation and runs the air-conditioning compressor unless the outside temperature is at or below freezing. The recirculation mode cannot be selected while in the defog mode.
Press the defrost button to select defrost.
(Defrost): Pressing this button directs most of the
air to the windshield and the side window outlets,
with some air directed to the floor outlets. In this mode,
the system will automatically turns off recirculation
-..- - . - A
+LA -:" m-.-.rl;*;n-;-m
TrAmnrPCCnr
u E ~ ! S . C C IU I U I I
a t 1 -Gut lulklwl1tt 1 3
vvvvl,
the outside temperature is at or below freezing.
Recirculation cannot be selected while in the
defrost mode.
3-33
Rear Window Defogger
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to remove fog from the rear window.
REAR: Press this button to turn the rear window defogger on or off. An indicator light in the button will come on to let you know that the rear window defogger is activated.
The rear window defogger will turn off approximately 10 minutes after the button is pressed. If turned on again, the defogger will only run for approximately five minutes before turning off. The defogger can also be turned off by pressing the button again or by turning off the engine.
If your vehicle has heated outside rearview mirrors, the mirrors will heat to help clear fog or frost from the surface of the mirror when the rear window defog button is pressed.
Notice: Don't use anything sharp on the inside of the rear window. If you do, you could cut or damage the warming grid, and the repairs wouldn't be covered by your warranty. Do not attach a temporary vehicle license, tape, a decal or anything similar to the defogger grid.
Outlet Adjustment
Use the knob located in the center of the outlet, to change the direction of the air flow.
Operation Tips
Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air inlets on the hood that may block the flow of air into your vehicle. Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may adversely affect the performance of the system.
* Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects
to help circulate the air inside your vehicle more effectively.
3-34
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to your warning lights and gages could also save you or others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a problem with one of your vehicle's functions. As you will see in the details on the next few pages, some warning lights come on briefly when you start the engine just to let you know they're working. If you are familiar with this section, youshould not be alarmed when this happens.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem with one of your vehicle's functions. Often gages and warning lights work together to let you know when there's a problem with your vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on when you are driving, or when one of the gages shows there may be a problem, check the section that
tells you what to do about it. Please follow this
manual's advice. Waiting to do repairs can be costly - and even dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights and gages. They're a big help.
Your vehicle also has a message center that works along with the warning lights and gages. See Message Center on page 3-47.
3-35
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You'll know how fast you're going, how much fuel you're using, and many other things you'll need to drive safely and economically. The indicator warning lights and gages are explained on the following pages.
3-36
Speedometer and Odometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h). Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has been driven, in either miles (used in the United States) or kilometers (used in Canada).
Your vehicle has a tamper-resistant odometer.
You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a new odometer installed. If the new one can be set to the mileage total of the old odometer, then that will be done. If it can't, then it's set at zero and a label must be put on the driver's door to show the old mileage reading when the new odometer was installed.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Driver Information Center (DIC), you may togglethe odometer to either miles (used in the United States) or kilometers (used in Canada). See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-56.
Trip Odometer
In addition to the standard odometer, the cluster can also display a trip odometer. The display can be toggled between the odometer and the trip odometer by quickly pressing and releasing the tripheset button located to the right of the temperature gage. The trip odometer will continue to keep track of miles (kilometers) driven even if they are not currently displayed. To reset the trip odometer to zero (0), push and hold the tripheset button for at least one and a half seconds, but less than three seconds. The trip odometer that is showing in the display will be reset.
3-37
Retro-Active Reset
The trip odometer has a feature called retro-active reset. This feature can be used to set the trip odometer to the number of miles (kilometers) driven since the ignition was last turned on. This can be used if you forget to reset your trip odometer at the beginning of a trip. To use the retro-active reset feature, push and hold the tripheset button for at least three seconds. The trip odometer will then display the number of miles (kilometers) driven since the ignition was last turned
on and you began driving. (If you use the retro-active
reset feature after you have started the vehicle, but before you begin moving, the display will show the number of miles (kilometers) you drove during the last ignition cycle.) Once you begin driving, the trip odometer will accumulate mileage. For example, if you have driven 5.0 miles (8.0 km) since you started your vehicle, and then activate the retro-active reset feature, the display will show 5.0 miles (8.0 km). As you drive, the display will then increase to 5.1 miles (8.2 km), 5.2 miles (8.4 km), etc.
3-38
Tachometer
The tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute (rpm). Notice: Do not operate the engine with the tachometer in the red area, or engine damage may occur.
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the key is turned to ON or START, a chime will
come on for several seconds to remind peopleto fasten
their safety belts.
The safety belt light will also come on and stay on for several seconds. If the driver's belt is already buckled, neither the chime nor the light will come on.
If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your air bag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle serviced right away.
Air Bag Readiness Light
There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument panel, which shows the air bag symbol. The system checks the air bag's electrical system for malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical problem. The system check includes the air bag sensor, the air bag modules, the wiring and the diagnostic module. For more information on the air bag system, see Air Bag
Systems on page 1-74.
I1 .de air bag .eadiness Ha-.-Jays on after you start your vehicle, it means the air bag system may not be working properly. The air bags in your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they could even inflate without a crash. To help avoid injury toyourself or others, have your vehicle serviced right away if the air bag
readiness light stays on after you start your
vehicle.
I This light will come on when you start your
The air bag readiness light should flash for a few seconds when you turn the ignition key to ON. If the
vehicle, and it will tlash tor light doesn't come on then, have it fixed so It wili
a few seconds. Then
be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
the light should go out.
This means the system is
ready.
3-39
Brake System Warning Light
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light will come on when you set your parking brake. The light will stay on if your parking brake doesn't release fully. If it stays on after your parking brake is fully released, it means you have a brake problem. Your vehicle's hydraulic brake system is divided into two parts. If one part isn't working, the other part can still work and stop you. For good braking, though, you need both parts working well. If the warning light comes on, there could be a brake problem. Have your brake system inspected right away.
BRAKE
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to the floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle towed for service. See Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light on page 3-41 and Towing Your Vehicle c oage 4-33.
Your brake system may not be working properly if the brake system warning lightis on. Driving with the brake system warning light on can lead to an accident. If the light is still on after you've pulled off the road and stopped carefully, have the vehicle towedfor service.
I
United States
Canada
This light should come on briefly when you turn the ignition key to ON. If it doesn't come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there's a problem.
3-40
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light
Traction Control System (TCS) Warning Light
ANTI LOCK
TRAC OFF
-~
States United
Your vehicle may have an anti-lock brake system warning light. If it does, the light should come on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition key to ON. If the anti-lock brake system warning light stays on longer than normal after you've started your engine, turn the ignition off. Or, if the light comes on and stays on when you're driving, stop as soon as possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engine again to reset tne system. i i ine iignisiiii siays url, ur c;uriles u i - 1 dy&i-l while you're driving, theanti-lock brake system needs service and you don't have anti-lock brakes.
The anti-lock brake system warning light should come on briefly when you turn the ignition key to ON. If the iight doesn't come on then, have it fixed so ii wili be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
United States
Canada
Your vehicle may have a traction control system warning light. The traction control system warning light may come on for the following reasons:
If you turn the system off by pressing the TRAC OFF button located in the instrument panel switchbank the warning light will come on and stay on.To turn the system back on, press the button again. The warning light should go off. See Traction Control System (TC.5,)nn , n a p 4-7 7 for more information.
0 If there's an engine-related and brake system problem that is specifically relatedto traction control, the traction control system will turn off and the warning light will come on.
If the traction control system warning light comes on
and stays on for an extended period of time when the system is turned on, your vehicle needs service.
3-41
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Service Engine Soon Light in the United States or Check Engine Light in Canada
United States
Canada
This gage shows the engine coolant temperature. If the gage pointer moves into the red area, your engine is too hot!
It means that your engine coolant has overheated. If you have been operating your vehicle under normal driving conditions, you should pull off the road, stop your vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible.
See Engine Overheating on page 5-25.
SERVICE ENGINE SOON
ds
~
~~
United States
Canada
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer which monitors operation of the fuel, ignition and emission control systems.
3-42
This system is called OBD I1 (On-Board Diagnostics-SecondGeneration) and is intended to assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner environment. The SERVICE ENGINE SOON or CHECK ENGINE light comes on to indicate that there is a problem and service is required. Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system before any problem is apparent. This may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle. This system is also designed to assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing any malfunction.
Nofice: If you keep driving your vehicle withthis light on, after a while, your emission controls may not work as well, your fuel economy may not be as good and your engine may not run as smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that may not be covered by your warranty.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine, transaxle, exhaust, intake or fuel system of your
vehicle or the replacementof the original tires with
other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle's emission controls and may cause this light to comoen. Modifications to these systems could lead to costly repairs not covered by your warranty. This may also result in a failure to pass a required Emission lnspection/Maintenance test.
This light should come on, as a check to show you it is working, when the ignition is on and the engine is not running. If the light doesn't come on, have it repaired. This light will also come on during a malfunction in one of two ways:
Light Flashing - A misfire condition has been detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions and may damage the emission control system on your vehicle. Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and service may be required.
Light On Steady - An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle. Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and service may be required.
3-43
If the Light Is Flashing
The following may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle:
Reducing vehicle speed.
Avoiding hard accelerations.
Avoiding steep uphill grades.
If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible.
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see "If the Light Is On Steady" following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so, stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart the engine. If the light remains on steady, see "If the Light Is On Steady" following. If the light is still flashing, follow the previous steps, and drive the vehicle to your dealer or qualified service center for service.
If the Light Is On Steady
You may be able to correct the emission system malfunction by considering the following:
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
the cap. See Filling Your Tank on page 5-7. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing
fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should turn the light off.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition will usually be corrected when the electrical system dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
Are you low on fuel?
As your engine starts to run out of fuel, your engine may not run as efficiently as designed since small amounts of air are sucked into the fuel line causing misfire. The system can detect this. Adding fuel should correct this condition. Make sure to install the fuel cap properly. See Filling Your Tank on page5-7. It will take a few driving trips to turn the light off.
3-44
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See
Gasoline Octane on page 5-5. Poor fuel quality will
cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed. You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on acceleration or stumbling on acceleration. (These conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.) This will be detected by the system and cause the light to turn on.
If you experience one or more of these conditions, change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
have your dealer or qualified service center check the vehicle. Your dealer has the proper test equipment and diagnostictools to fix any mechanical orelectrical problems that may have developed.
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have or may begin programs to inspect the emission control equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle registration.
Here are some things you need to know to help your vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the SERVICE ENGINE SOON or CHECK ENGINE light is on or not working properly.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD (on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical emission control systems have not been completely diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be considered not ready for inspection. This can happen if you have recently replaced your battery or if your battery has run down. The diagnostic system is designed to evaluate critical emission control systems during normal driving. This may take several days of routine driving. If you have done this and your vehicle still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD system readiness, see your dealer or qualified service center to prepare the vehicle for inspection.
3-45
Fuel Gage
United States
Canada
When the indicator nears empty, you still have a little fuel left, but you should get more soon.
If your fuel is low, the warning message in the message center will come on. See Low Fuel Warning Message on page 3-53.
Your fuel gage tells you about how much fuel you have left when the ignition is on.
Here are four things that some owners ask about. All these things are normal and do not indicate that anything is wrong with the fuel gage.
e At the gas station, the gas pump shuts off before the gage reads full.
e It takes a little more (or less) fuel to fill up than the gage reads. For example, the gage reads half full, but it took more (or less) than half of the tank's capacity to fill it.
e The gage pointer may move while cornering, braking or speeding up.
e The gage may not indicate empty when the ignition is turned off.
3-46
Message Center
The message center is located at the top of the instrument panel cluster in between the tachometer and speedometer. It gives you important safety and maintenance facts.
Service Traction System Warning Message
If there's an engine-related and brake system problem that is specifically related to traction control, the traction control system will turn off and the warning message will come on.
If the traction control system warning message comes on and stayson for an extended period of time when the system is turned on, your vehicle needs service.
Traction Active Message
I
1 I
1
SERVICE TRACTION SYSTEM
United States
Canada
.I.f ynir vehicle has the traction control system and this message is displayed when you're driving, there may be a problem with your traction control system. Your vehicle may need service.
When this message is displayed, the traction control system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
TRACTION ACTIVE
I
I
I
I
United States
Canada
If your vehicle has the traction control system, the TRACTION ACTIVE message will appear when the traction coniroi sysierrl is iiiiiiiii-ly d7& spir;. YGU Z X ~ feel or hear the system working, but this is normal.
Slippery road conditions may exist if this message appears, so adjust your driving accordingly. The message will stay on for a few seconds after the traction ccntrs! system stops limiting wheel spin.
3-47
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Message
HOT COOLANT
TEMP
Charging System Indicator Message
The charging system battery symbol will come on in the message center when you turn on the ignition as a check to show you it is working.
United States
Canada
This message will come on when your engine gets too hot.
I f this message comes on, it means that your engine coolant has overheated. I f you have been operating your vehicle under normal driving conditions, you should
pull off the road, stop your vehicle and turn off the
engine as soon as possible.
See Engine Overheating on page 5-25.
It will remain on as long as the engine is not running. It should go out once the engine is running. If it stays on, or comes on while you are driving, you may have a problem with the charging system. It could indicate that you have problems with a generator drive belt, or another electrical problem. Have it checked right away. Driving while this indicator appears in the message center could drain your battery.
If you must drive a short distance with the message on, be certain to turn off all your accessories, such as the radio and air conditioner.
3-48
Low Oil Pressure Message
' 7
LOW OIL PRESSURE
~~
__
~
United States
Canada
Your vehicle is equipped with a low oil pressure warning message.
Your oil pressure message lets you know when you may have a problem with your engine oil pressure.
When the engine is running and this message appears, the engine oil level may be too low. There may also be another problem causing low oil pressure.
Don't keep driving if the oilpres%.-. is low. If you do, your engine can becomeso hot that it catches fire. You or others could be burned. Check your oil as soon as possible and have your vehicle serviced.
I
Notice: Damage to your engine from neglected oil problems can be costly and is not covered by your warranty.
3-49
Low Engine Oil Level Message
LOW ENG OIL
LEVEL
United States
Canada
If this message comes on, it means your engine is low on oil. You need to check the oil level right away. Have your vehicle serviced immediately.
Change Engine Oil Message
CHANGE ENGINE
OIL
United States
Canada
3-50
If this message comes on and stays on after you started the engine, have the oil changed.
For additional information on when to change the oil and resetting the system, see Engine Oil on page 5-13.
Low Tire Message
I- LOW TIRE PRESSURE
United States
Canada
Your vehicle may have the check tire pressure system which can alert you to a large change in the pressure of one tire. After the system has been properly calibrated, the low tire pressure message will come on and a chime will sound if a pressure difference (low pressure) is detected in one tire.
The message will stay on until you turn off the ignition or reset (calibrate) the system. See Check Tire Pressure System on page 5-56.
If the anti-lock brake system warning light comes on, the check tire pressure system may not be working properly. See your dealer for service. Also, see Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light on page3-41.
Door Ajar Warning Message -
DOOR AJAR
PASS-Key@111 Security Message
I
I
I
I
c;B SECURITY
States United
I
I
I
I
United States
Canada
This message will come on when the ignition is turnea to ON or §TART and the driver's or passenger's door is open.
Rear Hatch Ajar Warning Message
E
1 AJAR
States United
l1 -
1 1L w 1
If you are ever driving and this message comes on and stays on, you will be able to restart your engine if you turn it off.
Your PASS-Key@Ill system, however, is not working properly and must be serviced by your dealer. Your vehicle is not protected by the PASS-Key@Ill system at this time. See PASS-Key 111 on page 2-77for more information.
This message will come on when the ignition is turnea to ON or §TART and the liftgate is open.
3-51
All-Wheel Drive Disable Warning Message
AWD DISABLE
$4
United States
~~
Canada
Your vehicle may have this message. If it does, it will come on when there is a spare tire on the vehicle, or when the anti-lock brake system warning light comes on, or when the rear differential fluid is overheating. This message will go out when the differential fluid cools.
The all-wheel-drive system will be disabled until the compact spare tire is replaced by a full-size tire. If the warning message is still on after putting on the full-size tire, you need to reset the warning message. To reset the warning message, turn the ignition off and then back on again. If the message stays on, see your dealer right away. See All- Wheel Drive (AWD) System on page 4-12 for more information.
Low Washer Fluid Warning Message
7 7
LOW
WASHER
FLUID
1
I I
I
United States
Canada
If your washer fluid is low, the warning message will come on and stay on until you add washer fluid. See Windshield WasherNuid on page 5-36 for adding washer fluid instructions.
If the warning message is still on after adding fluid, you need to reset the warning message. To reset the warning message, turn the ignition off and then back on. If the message stays on, see your dealer right away.
3-52
Low Fuel Warning Message
Low BrFaWlkueaidrning
Message
LOW BRAKE
FLUID
United States
Canada
United States
Canada
If your fuel is low, the warning message will come on
If your brake fluid is low, the warning message will
and stay on until you add fuel.
come on and stay on until you add brake fluid.
If the warning message is still on after adding fuel, you
The brake system warning light will also be illuminated.
needtoresethewarning
message. To resethe
If this message appearst,hebrakes need attention.
warning message, turn the ignition off and then back on. You should have your vehicle serviced immediately. See
If thmeessagsetayosns,eyeour
dealer.
Brake System Warning Light on page 3-40 and Brakes
on page 5-37.
If the warning message is still on after adding fluid, you may need toreset the warning message. To reset the
~ : z r ~ ~i Rz~~S S Z J P ,t ~ !h~e iynition off and thenback on.
If the message stays on, see your dealer right away.
3-53
Service Vehicle Soon Message
Program Mode Message
SERVICE VEHICLE
SOON
United States
Canada
This light will come on if your vehicle has certain non-emission related problems.
For example, if the entire electrical system fails to send and receive messages from the vehicle's components, this message will come on.
These problems may not be obvious and may affect vehicle performance or durability. Consult a qualified dealership for necessary repairs to maintain top vehicle performance.
PROGRAM MODE
i
I
1 L
United States
Canada
If you receive this message, your vehicle is in program mode. You are ready to begin programming your vehicle's customization features.
If your vehicle does not have the Driver Information Center (DIC), see Vehicle Personalizationon page 2-50. If your vehicle is equipped with the Driver Information Center (DIC), see DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-59.
3-54
Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter Battery Low Warning Message
If you receive this message, one or both of the vehicle's parking lamp bulbs needs replacement. See Bulb Replacement on page5-48 for bulb replacement instructions.
KEY FOB
BATTERY
LOW
I
J I
States United
Highbeam Out Warning Message
I
If you receive this message, the battery in the remote keyless entry needs to be replaced. See "Battery Replacement" under Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on page2-5 for instructions.
Park Lamp Warning Message
. I I I
1
PARK LAMP .. OUT
1
$ irt
i.izfm..".n.........""...........-I.I........":,.".........li
:.:iL.:F...:.:.:.".s.:.:.:..z..........:.I . . ... . .. . :.....-.......-....."............ i
....
*.z.
L_____-
I I
I
States United
United States
Canada
If you receive this message, one or both of the vehicle's high-beam headlamp bulbs needs replacement. See Bulb Replacement on page 5-48 for more information.
3-55
Driver Information Center (DIC)
DRIVER INFO CENTER
NE AVG ECON 5.9 6 5 F L/ 100 KM
If your vehicle is equipped with the Driver Information Center (DIC), the display is located on the instrument panel cluster in the tachometer gage. The DIC will show information about the vehicle and the surroundings. The DIC is capable of displaying English or French. See DIC Controls and Displays on page 3-58 to change the display from English to metric. The DIC contains a compass display to show you which direction the vehicle is driving.
Compass Variance
Compass variance is the difference between magnetic north and geographic north. In some areas of the country, the difference is great enough to cause the compass to give false readings. If this occurs, the compass must be set.
Automatic Compass Calibration
The compass is self-calibrating,which eliminates the need to manually set the compass. When the vehicle is new, the calibration process may not be complete. In
these cases, the calibration symbol C will be displayed
where the compass reading is normally displayed.
To calibrate the compass, in an area free from large metal objects, make three 360 degree turns. The calibration symbol will turn off and the compass reading will be displayed.
3-56
Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears erratic and the calibration symbol does not appear, you must manually put the compass into the calibration mode. To get into this mode, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on and cycle the DIC to the compass/temperature mode.
2. Press and hold the SET button for longer than three seconds.
ZONE # PRESS & HOLD SET TO CHANGE: This display mode will be displayed when you are manually calibrating the system. The current zone number for compass variance will be displayed in place of the # symbol. Use the SET button to select the zone number from the graphic shown to select the current area of the country that you are driving in.
PRESS SET TO CALIBRATE COMPASS: After selecting your zone, press the MODE button and this will be displayed on the DIC. Press the SET button and complete three 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal objects.
The following two messages will toggle in the display until you calibrate the compass:
DRIVE VEHICLE IN CIRCLE
CALIBRATING COMPASS
When calibration is complete, the display will return to its normal mode.
3-57
DIC Controls and Displays
When the ignition is turned to ON or START, the DIC will display the following: BUICK: BUICK will be displayed for three seconds. DRIVER #: This message will be displayed for another three seconds after BUCK appears in the display. This display lets the driver know which driver's remote keyless entry transmitter is being used and the driver's customization features.
The DIC controls are located to the left of the steering column on the instrument panel.
The DIC will be in the last mode displayed when the engine was turned off. To select a different mode, press MODE. The display will cycle through its options at
each press of MODE.
MODE: This button lets you cycle through the options on the display.
SET: This button is used to select and set the options to your preference.
The DIC will always display the compass reading and the outside temperature. If the temperature is below 38°F (3"C), the temperature reading will toggle between displaying the temperature and the word ICE for two minutes.
AVG ECONOMY (Average Economy): Average fuel economy is viewed as a long term approximation of your overall driving conditions. To learn the average fuel economy from a new starting point, press and hold the SET button while the average fuel economy is displayed on the DIC. The average fuel economy will set to zero.
INST ECONOMY (Instant Economy): Instant fuel economy varies with your driving conditions, such as acceleration, braking and the grade of the road being traveled.
FUEL RANGE: The fuel range is an estimated distance that your vehicle can travel on the remaining fuel. The fuel economy used to calculate the range is based on your driving history since the last reset of the average speed.
3-58
FUEL USED: The fuel used display will show you how much fuel has been used since the last time it was reset. To reset the fuel used to zero, press and hold the SET button while the fuel used is displayed on the DIC and until the display goes to zero.
AVG SPEED (Average Speed): The average speed display will show your average speed from when you first started your vehicle. To reset the average speed, press and hold the SET button while the average speed is displayed on the DIC and until the speed resets to your current speed.
OIL LIFE LEFT HOLD SET TO RESET: This message displays the current percentage of the GM Oil Life System. Be careful not to reset this display other than when the oil has been changed. See "How to Reset the System" under Engine Oil on page 5-13 for more information.
TIRE PRESSURE: The check tire pressure system can alert you to a large change in the pressure of one tire. You must begin driving before the system will detect
.-, -- u I~""" " -. p.` 1 +,I,;~*an1rV t xVcVIW I r. n Cn-a /-I..h.m- ---?.kTire Pressr~reSystem
on page 5-56.
USE SET TO SELECT ENGLISH METRIC: You can use this display to select English or metric. Press the SET button to toggle between English or metric. The DIC, the odometer, the trip odometer and head-up display will change.
OFF: No driver information will be displayed in this
mode. If the DIC is left in this mode for more than three seconds, the display will turn off. Press the MODE button to start the DIC.
DIC Vehicle Personalization
The DIC is used to program the choices of two drivers. The drivers are recognized as DRIVER 1 or DRIVER 2 in the DIC display. You will let the DIC know which driver you are by using your remote keyless entry transmitter. Each remote keyless entry transmitter was pre-programmed to belong to DRIVER 1 or DRIVER 2. Each transmitter may be programmed differently for each driver's preferences.
After you press the LOCK button on your transmitter and the ignition key is in ON, the DIC will display the identified driver number. The vehicle will also recall the vehicle customization features that were last programmed to correspond to your transmitter.
If you unlock your vehicle using your key instead of your
I . V . -,.-.. -..- 3nd nlP dri\/orq phsnnn I n t i l l nnt +hn + C -I -~-~--~;*~ +I InI rI L L G ICI,IU
YIV 1 ~ 1 1 1
3.-
ynlJr
vehicle will recall the information from the last transmitter
used.
3-59
Entering Programming Mode
To program features, your vehicle must be in the programming mode. Follow these steps:
1. Turn the ignition key to ON with the vehicle in PARK (P).
2. Press and release the MODE button, scrolling through the DIC messages, until PERSONALIZATION PRESS SET TO BEGIN is displayed.
3. Press the SET button and TO SELECT DRIVER PRESS REMOTE LOCK will appear. Press the LOCK button on the remote keyless entry. This identifies which remote keyless entry transmitter is being programmed by displaying PERSONALIZATION FOR DRIVER 1 or DRIVER 2.
PROGRAM MODE
1
I
United States
Canada
4. The program mode message will appear in the message center as an indication that your vehicle is ready to begin programming.
5. Follow the instructions given by the DIC.
Headlamp Exit Delay
This feature allows you to customize the headlamps and parking lamps. This feature can be programmed to one of the following modes:
OFF: The headlamps and parking lamps will not turn on at the same instant that the ignition is turned to OFF.
15: The headlamps and parking lamps will stay on for 15 seconds when the ignition is turned to OFF.
30: The headlamps and parking lamps will stay on for
30 seconds when the ignition is turned to OFF.
60: The headlamps and parking lamps will stay on for 60 seconds when the ignition is turned to OFF.
3-60
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was programmed in 30 second activation mode. The mode to which the vehicle has been programmed may have been changed since it left the factory. To determine the mode to which your vehicle is programmed or to program your vehicle to a different mode, do the following:
1. Follow the instructions for "Entering Programming Mode" listed previously.
2. Press the MODE button until HEADLAMP EXIT DELAY appears in the DIC.
3. Press the SET button until the arrow is before the mode you prefer.
The mode youselected is now set. You caneither exit programming modeby following the instructions later in this section or program thenext feature available on your vehicle.
Interior Lighting Delay
The interior liqhting delay feature can be programmed to one of the following modes:
OFF: This feature will not illuminate the interior of your vehicle when all of the doors are closed.
ON: This feature will continue to illuminate the interior
iamps for 25 seconds after all doors have been
closed so that you can find your ignition and buckle your safety belt at night.
Interior lighting delay will not occur while the ignition is in ON. After 25 seconds, the interior lamps will fade out. The lamps will fade out before the 25 seconds if:
The ignition is turned to ON,
0 all doors are locked using the remote keyless entry transmitter, or
there is no occupant activity detected for an illumination period of 25 seconds.
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was programmed in ON. The mode to which the vehicle has been programmed may have been changed since it left the factory. To determine the mode to which your vehicle is programmed or to program your vehicle to a different mode, do the following:
1. Follow the instructions for "Entering Programming Mode" listed previously.
2. Press the MODE button until INTERIOR LIGHTING DELAY appears on the DIC.
3. Press the SET button until the arrow is before ON or OFF-.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle.
3-61
Interior Lighting On
The interior lighting on feature can be programmed to one of the following modes:
KEY OUT: The interior lamps will come on for about 25 seconds whenever you remove the key from the ignition.
DOOR: The interior lamps will come on for about 25 seconds when any door is opened.
Interior lighting on will not occur while the ignition is in
ON.After 25 seconds, the interior lamps will fade
out. The lamps will fade out before the 25 seconds if:
The ignition is turned to ON,
LOCK is pressed on the remote keyless entry transmitter, or
there is no occupant activity detected for an illumination period of 25 seconds.
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was programmed in DOOR. The mode to which the vehicle has been programmed may have been changed since it left the factory. To determine the mode to which your vehicle is programmed or to program your vehicle to a different mode, do the following:
1. Follow the instructions for "Entering Programming Mode" listed previously.
2. Press the MODE button until INTERIOR LIGHTING ON appears on the DIC.
3. Press the SET button until the arrow is before KEY OUT or DOOR.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle.
3-62
Auto Door LocMUnlock
The doors will automatically lock when the vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P). For automatic unlocking, you can program your vehicle to one of the following modes:
OFF: When the shift lever is put in PARK (P),your
doors will not unlock automatically.
DRIVER: When the shift lever is put in PARK (P), only your driver's door will unlock.
ALL: When the shift lever is put in PARK (P), all doors will unlock.
Before your vehicle vms shipped from the facto?;, it was programmed in ALL. The mode to which the vehicle has been programmed may have been changed since it left the factory. To determine the mode to which your vehicle is programmed or to program your vehicle to a different mode, do the following:
1. Follow the instructions for "Entering Programming Mode" listed previously.
2. Make sure that the AUTO DOOR LOCK feature is programmed to ON.
3. Press the MODE button until AUTO DOOR
UNLOCK appears on the DIC.
4. Press the SET button until the arrow is before OFF, DRIVER or ALL.
If the auto door unlock feature has been programmed to DRIVER or ALL, the automatic door unlock feature can also be programmed to one of the following modes:
PARK: Unlock when the shift lever is put in PARK (P).
KEY OUT: Unlock when the ignition key is removed.
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was programmed in PARK. The mode to which the vehicle has been programmed may have been changed since it left the factory. To determine the mode to which your vehicle is programmed or to program your vehicle to a different mode, do the following:
1. Follow the instructions for "Entering Programming Mode" listed previously.
2. Follow the instructions for programming AUTO DOOR UNLOCK to DRIVER or ALL listed previously.
3. Press the MODE button until AUTO DOOR UNLOCWPARK KEYOUT appears on the DIC.
4. Press the SFT button until the arrow is before PARK or KEY OUT.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit programming mode by following the instructions later in this sectionor program the next feature available on your vehicle.
3-63
Delayed Locking
The delayed locking feature can be programmed to one of the following modes:
ON: Lock your vehicle using the power door lock switch or the remote keyless entry transmitter while any door is opened, you will hear three chimes and the doors will not lock. Five seconds after the last door is closed, all doors will lock.
Once delayed locking is programmed to ON, you can do the following:
Cancel the delayed locking by pressing unlock using the power door lock switch or by fully inserting the key in the ignition,
override the delayed locking feature by pressing lock immediately using the power door lock switch, or
let the delayed locking feature complete the locking of the vehicle.
OFF: The doors will always lock immediately when you lock the doors using the power door lock switch or press LOCK on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was programmed in ON. The mode to which the vehicle has been programmed may have been changed since it
left the factory. To determine the mode to which your vehicle is programmed or to program your vehicle to a different mode, do the following:
1. Follow the instructions for "Entering Programming Mode" listed previously.
2. Press the MODE button until DELAYED LOCKING appears on the DIC.
3. Press the SET button until the arrow is before ON
or OFF.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle.
Remote Door Unlock
The remote door unlock feature can be programmed to one of the following modes:
DRIVEWALL: With the first press of UNLOCK on the remote keyless entry transmitter, the driver's door will unlock, and with the second press of UNLOCK, within five seconds of the first press, all passenger's doors will unlock.
3-64
ALL: All doors will unlock with every press of UNLOCK on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was programmed in ALL. The mode to which the vehicle has been programmed may have been changed since it left the factory. To determine the mode to which your vehicle is programmed or to program your vehicle to a different mode, do the following:
1. Follow the instructions for "Entering Programming Mode" listed previously.
2. Press the MODE button until REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK appears on the DIC.
3. Press the SET button until the arrow is before DRlVERiALL or ALL.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle.
Unlock Feedback
The unlock feedback feature can be programmed to one of the following modes:
LIGHTS: This mode does the following:
e During the day, when the ignition is in OFF and UNLOCK on the remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed, the headlamps and parking lamps will flash, or
e During the night, when the ignition is in OFF, the headlamps and parking lamps will be activated for 30 seconds when UNLOCK is pressed on the remote keyless entry transmitter. If you would like to
chI lna1-Ige the amwnt e?time the !amps stay QE,
change the headlamp exit delay feature.
OFF: The headlamps and parking lamps will not flash when UNLOCK is pressed on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
3-65
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was programmed in LIGHTS. The mode to which the vehicle has been programmed may have been changed since it left the factory. To determine the mode to which your vehicle is programmed or to program your vehicle to a different mode, do the following:
1. Follow the instructions for "Entering Programming Mode" listed previously.
2. Follow the instructions for programming HEADLAMP EXIT DELAY earlier in this section, to make sure which mode it is programmed to.
3. Press the SET button until UNLOCK FEEDBACK appears on the DIC.
4. Press the MODE button until the arrow is before
LIGHTS or OFF.
5. Press the SET button once you have determined which mode you prefer.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle.
Lock Feedback
The lock feedback feature can be programmed to one of the following modes:
OFF: When LOCK is pressed on the remote keyless entry transmitter, the headlamps and parking lamps will not flash and the horn will not sound.
LIGHTS: When LOCK is pressed on the remote keyless entry transmitter, the headlamps and parking lamps will flash briefly.
LIGHTS and HORN: When LOCK is pressed a second
time on the remote keyless entry transmitter within five seconds, the headlamps and parking lamps will flash briefly and the horn will sound.
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was programmed in LIGHTS and HORN. The mode to which the vehicle has been programmed may have been changed since it left the factory. To determine the mode to which your vehicle is programmed or to program your vehicle to a different mode, do the following:
3-66
1. Follow the instructions for "Entering Programming Mode" listed previously.
2. Press the MODEbutton until LOCKFEEDBACK appoenars the DIC.
3. Press the SETbutton until the arrow is before OFF, LIGHTS or LIGHTS and HORN.
Themodeyouselectedisnowset.
You can either exit
3. Press the SET button until the arrow is before ON or OFF.
If the seat recall feature has been programmed to ON, the seat recall feature can also be programmed to
onoef the
modes:
MEMORY: The position recalled will be the memory driving position.
Seat RecalI
The seat recall feature can be programmed to one of the following modes:
ON: The previously programmed memory seat position will be recalled when the UNLOCK button is pressed on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
OFF: No memory seat position will be recalled when you press the UNLOCK button on the remote keyless
22:try tE??S%?l?tPr-.
To determine the mode to which your vehicle is programmed or to program your vehicle to a different mode, do the following:
1. Follow the instructions for "Entering Programming Mode" listed previously.
2. Press the MODE button until SEAT RECALL appears on the DIC.
To determine the mode to which your vehicle is programmed or to program your vehicle to a different mode, do the following:
I . FO!!OW the instrcrctions for "Entering Programming Mode" listed previously.
2. Follow the instructions for programming SEAT RECALL to ON listed previously.
3. Press the MODE button until RECALL POSITION
appears on the DIC.
_ _ 1 n..- &I-- ~ I - TI-..*&--
4. TlebS LIIe 3 c I UULLUII
MEMORY or EXIT.
.,-+:I + L _w~r_..,
;e hnfnrr\
UIILII L I I G a i i u v v I J U C I I U I ~
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle.
3-67
Tilt Mirror
The tilt mirror feature can be programmed to one of the following modes:
ON: The passengers side outside rearview mirror will tilt down towards the curb when the vehicle is shifted to REVERSE (R) and returns to its previous position when the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (R).
OFF: The mirror will not tilt.
To determine the mode to which your vehicle is programmed or to program your vehicle to a different mode, do the following:
1. Follow the instructions for "Entering Programming Mode" listed previously.
2. Press the MODE button until TILT appears on the DIC.
3. Press the SET button until the arrow is before ON or OFF.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle.
Exiting Programming Mode
To exit programming mode, do one of the following:
Shift out of PARK(P),
turn the ignition key out of ON, or
do not program any commands for one minute while in the programming mode.
The programming mode message will turonff to let you know that you areno 1onge.r in the programming mode.
Once you have reached the end of the personalization features, PERSONALIZATION SELECTION DONE will appear briefly. Then PRESS SET TO EXIT MODE TO CONTINUE will appear. Pressing SET will exit you out of the DIC. Pressing MODE will take you to the beginning of personalization.
3-68
Audio System(s)
Setting the Time
Notice: Before you add any sound equipment to
your vehicle - like a tape player, CB radio, mobile
telephone or two-way radio - be sure you can
add what youwant. Ifyou can, it's very important to do it properly. Added sound equipment may interfere with the operationof your vehicle's engine, Delphi Electronics radio or other systems, and even damage them. Your vehicle's systems may interfere with the operation of sound equipment that has been added improperly.
So, before adding sound equipment, check with your dealer and be sureto check federal rules covering msbiie radio arid telephone units.
Your audio system hasbeen designed to operate easily and to give yearsof listening pleasure. You will get the most enjoyment ouot f it if you acquaint yourself with it first. Find out what your audio systecamn do and how to operate all of its controltso be sure you're getting the most out of the advancedenqineerinq that went into it.
Your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP, you can play your audio
system even after the ignition is turned off. See Retained
Accessory Power under lgnition Positions on page 2-20.
Press and hold H until the correct hourappears on the display. AMwill also appear for morning hours. Press and hold M until the correct minute appears on thedisplay. The time may be set with the ignition on or off.
To synchronize the time with an FM station broadcasting Radio Data System (RDS) information,press and hold H and M atthe same time until TIME UPDATED appears on the display. If the time is not available from the station, NO UPDATE will appear on the display instead.
Radio with CD
3-69
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Push this knob to turn the system on and off.
VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to decrease the volume.
DlSP (Display): Press this button to switch the display between the radio station frequency and the time. The time can be displayed with the ignition on or off.
SCV (Speed-Compensated Volume): With SCV, your audio system adjusts automatically to make up for road and wind noise as you drive. To get to SCV, press the TUNE/AUDIO button repeatedly until SPEED VOL is displayed. Turn the TUNE/AUDlO button to select OFF, MIN, MED or MAX. Each higher choice allows for more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds. Then, as you drive, SCV automatically increases the volume, as necessary, to overcome noise at any speed. The volume level should always sound the same to you as you drive. If you don't want to use SCV, select OFF.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to switch between AM, FMI, FM2. The display will show your selection.
TUNE: Turn this knob to choose a radio station.
la SEEK Dl : Press the right or the left arrow to go to the next or to the previous station and stay there.
To scan stations, press and hold one of the SEEK arrows for two seconds until SCAN appears on the display. The radio will go to a station, play for a few seconds, then go on to the next station. Press one of the SEEK arrows again to stop scanning.
To scan preset stations, press and hold one of the SEEK arrows for more than four seconds until PSCAN and the preset number appear on the display. You will hear a double beep. The radio will go to the first preset station stored on your pushbuttons, play for a few seconds, then go on to the next preset station. Press one of the SEEK arrows again to stop scanning presets.
The radio will seek and scan only to stations that are in the selected band and only to those witha strong signal.
3-70
Setting Preset Stations
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your
favorite stations. You can set up to 18 stations (six AM,
six FMI and six FM2) by performing the following
steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select AM, FMI or FM2.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press EQ to select the EQ setting. It will be stored with the preset station.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons. When you hear the radio produce one beep, reiease the pushbution. Whenever you press that numbered pushbutton, the station you set will return.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
Setting the Tone (BasslTreble)
AUDIO: Push and release AUDIO until BASS, MID or TREBLE appears on the display. Then turn the AUDIO knob to increase or to decrease. If a station is weak or noisy, you may want to decrease the treble.
To adjust bass, midrange or treble to the middle position, select BASS, MID or TREBLE. Then push and hold AUDIO for more than two seconds until you hear a beep. BASS and a zero, MID and a zero or TREBLE and a zero will appear on the display.
To adjust both tone controls and both speaker controls to the middle position, end out of audio mode by pushing the AUDIO knob until the display goes blank. Then push and hold AUDIO for more than two seconds until you hear a beep. ALL CENTERED will appear on the disdav.
3-71
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right and the left speakers, push and release AUDIO until BAL appears on the display. Then turn the AUDIO knob to move the sound toward the right or the left speakers. A bar graph with indicators will show how the sound is balanced between the right and the left speakers.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear speakers, push and release AUDIO until FADE appears on the display. Then turn the AUDIO knob to move the sound toward the front or the rear speakers. A bar graph with indicators will show how the sound is balanced between the front and rear speakers.
To adjust balance or fade to the middle position, select BAL or FADE. Then push and hold AUDIO for more than two seconds until you hear a beep. The indicator will be centered on the display.
To adjust both tone controls and both speaker controls to the middle position, end out of audio mode by pushing the AUDIO knob until the display goes blank. Then press and hold AUDIO for more than two seconds until you hear a beep. ALL CENTERED will appear on the display.
EQ (Equalizer): Press this button to choose bass, mid and treble equalization settings designed for different program types.
3-72
Using RDS
Your audio system is equipped with a Radio Data System (RDS). RDS features are available for use only on FM stations that broadcast RDS information. Using this system, the radio can do the following:
Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of programming,
receive announcementsconcerninglocaland national emergencies,
display messages from radio stations, and
seek to stations with traffic announcements.
This system relies upon receiving specific information from these stations and will only work when the information is available. In rare cases, a radio station may broadcast incorrect information that will cause the radio features to work improperly. If this happens, contact the radio station.
While you are tuned to an RDS station, the station name or the call letters will appear on the display, instead of the frequency. RDS stations may also provide the time of day, a program type (PTY) for current programming and the name of the program being broadcast.
Finding a PTY Station
SCAN: You can also scan through the channels within
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
1. Press P-TYP. The PTY symbol will be displayed on the screen.
2. Select a category by turning the AUDIO knob.
3. Once the desired category is displayed, press either SEEK arrow to select the category and take you to the category's first station.
4. If you want to go to another station within that category and the category is displayed, press
a category by performing the following:
1. Press P-TYP. The PTY symbol will be displayed on the screen.
2. Select a category by turning the AUDIO knob.
3. Once the desired category is displayed, press and hold either SEEK arrow, and the radio will begin scanning within your chosen category.
4. Press and hold either SEEK arrow again to stop at a particular station.
either SEEK arrow once. If the category is not
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
displayed, press either SEEK arrow twice to display allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the
the category and then to go to another station.
same program type. Press and hold BAND for two
5. If PTY times out and is no longer on the display, go back to Step 1.
seconds to turn alternate frequency on. AF ON will appear on the display. The radio may switch to stronaer stations. Press and hold BAND again for two
TousethePTYinterrupt feature, press and hold the
seconvds to turn alternate frequency off. AF OFF
P-TYPbutton until youheara beep on the PTY
will appear on the display. Theradio will not switch to
youwant to interruptwith.An asterisk will appear nextother
stations. When you turn the ignition off and then on
to the PTY name (for example CLASSICAL*). When you again, the alternate frequency feature will automatically
arelisteningtoa CD, thelast selected RDS station
be turned on.
will interrupt play if that selected PTY format is
broadcast.
3-73
RDS Messages
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies. When an alert announcement comes on the current radio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You will hear the announcement, even if the volume is muted or a compact disc is playing. If a compact disc is playing, play will stop during the announcement. You will not be able to turn off alert announcements.
ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency broadcast system. This feature is not supported by all RDS stations.
INFO (Information): If the current station has a message, INFO will appear on the display. Press this button to see the message. The message may display the artist and song title, call in phone numbers, etc.
If the whole message is not displayed, parts of it will appear every three seconds. To scroll through the message at your own speed, press the INFO button repeatedly. A new group of words will appear on the display with each press. Once the complete message has been displayed, INFO will disappear from the display until another new message is received. The old message can be displayed by pressing the INFO button until a new message is received or a different station is tuned to.
3-74
TRAF (Traffic): Press this button to seek to a station that broadcasts traffic announcements. TRAF will appear on the display. If no station is found, NO TRAF will appear on the display.
When a traffic announcement comes on the current station or on a related network station, you will hear it, even if the volume is muted or a compact disc is playing. If the compact disc player is being used, play will stop during the announcement.
Radio Messages
CAL (CALIBRATE): Your audio system has been calibrated for your vehicle from the factoryI.f this message appears on the display it means that your radio has not been configured properly for your vehicle and must be returned to the dealership for service.
Playing a Compact Disc
Insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up. The player will pull it in. The disc should begin playing. If you want to insert a CD while the ignition or the radio is off, first press the eject button or DISP.
If you turn off the ignition or radio with a disc in the player, it will stay in the player. When you turn on the ignition or system, the disc will start playing where it stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
If an error appears on the display, see "Compact Disc Errors" later in this section.
144 (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
quickly reverse within a track. Release is it to play the passage. You will hear sound at a reduced level.
D) 2 (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to
quickly advance within a track. Release it to play the passage. You will hear sound at a reduced level.
4 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. Press RDM again to turn off random play.
DlSP (Display): Press this button to see which track is playing. Press it again within five seconds to see how long it has been playing. To change what is norxally s h ~ ~ 0v11nthe disp!ay (track or e!apsed time), press this button until you see the display you want, then hold the button until the display flashes.
la SEEK Dl : Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current track if more than eight seconds have
played. If you hold the button or press it more than once,
.-.- ... - 11-
.-I-.
:I1 - - - + ; m s n n
m r \ \ r i n n hqp.l/ +hrnlInh tho Aicp
lflc PIdyGl V V l l l LUllllllUG I l l W V l l l y uuv~~l ' # # v u y * e
----I
Press the right arrow to go to the next track. If you hold the button or press it more than once, the player will continue moving forward through the disc.
To scan CD tracks, press and hold one of the SEEK arrows for two seconds until SCAN appears on the display. You will hear a beep. The disc will go to the next track, play for a few seconds, then go on to the next track. The sound will mute and SCAN and the track number will appear on the display while scanning. The disc will only scan forward. Press one of the SEEK arrows again to stop scanning.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a CD is playing.
CD: Press this button to change to p!aying a. CD when listening to the radio.
A (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD.
3-75
Compact Disc Errors
CHECK CD: If this message appears on the radio display, it could be due toone of the following reasons:
You're driving on a very rough road. When the road is smoother, the disc should play.
The disc is dirty, scratched, wet or upside down.
The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and try again.
If the CD is not playing correctly,for any other reason, try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can't be corrected, contact your dealer. If your radio displays an error number, write it down and provide it toyour dealer when reporting the problem.
Radio with Cassette and CD
Radio Data System (RDS): Your audio system is equipped with a Radio Data System (RDS). RDS features are available for use only on FM stations that broadcast RDS information.
Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of programming, receive announcements concerning local and national emergencies, display messages from radio stations, and seek to stations with traffic announcements.
3-76
This system relies upon receiving specific information from these stations and will only work when the information is available. In rare cases, a radio station may broadcast incorrect information that will cause the radio features to work improperly. If this happens, contact the radio station.
While you are tuned to an RDS station, the station name or the call letters will appear on the display instead of the frequency. RDS stations may also providethe time of day, a program type (PTY) for current programming and the name of the program being broadcast.
XMTMRadio Satellite Service (USA Only): XMTMis a continental U.S. based satellite radio service that offers 100 coast to coast channeis inciuding music, news, sports, talk and children's programming. XMTM provides digital quality audio and text information, including song title and artist name. A service fee is required in order to receive the XMTMservice. For more information, contact XMTMat www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Digital Audio Broadcast (DAB) (Canada Only): DAB is a Canadian land-based radio service that offers digital quality audio and text information including song title, artist name, traffic, weather, emergency
. . announcements and more. Digital Audio Broadcast
t-----*--m-n i n T e r o n t ~ , Id1131111331UII selmvrl;bncnS U q rI G a m b UIrIrlnbn, t,l% wJU a\I/U aiI!U aU h.l" P
Montreal, Vancouver, Ottawa, and Windsor. In fringe areas signals may be interrupted by buildings, trees and other obstructions. Additional services will be added in the future. For current DAB coverage and other information consult the GM Canada website at www.gmcanada.com, your dealer or call 1-800-263-3777.
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Push this knob to turn the system on and off.
VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to decrease the volume.
SCV (Speed-Compensated Volume): With SCV, your
audio system adjusts automatically to make up for
road and wind noise as you drive. To get to SCV, press
the TUNE/AUDIO button repeatedly until SPEED
VOL is displayed. Turn the TUNE/AUDIO button to
select OFF, MIN, MED or MAX. Each higher choice
-- allows for more volume compensation at faster vehicle
> p c ; ~ u a . -----I-
TL-I I IGI I,
aa
.y,wAu*
-r l r k r r
UII V U
r
,
CP\/QI Itnmo)ipall\/
uv I uuLvl
increases the volume, as necessary, to overcome noise
at any speed. The volume level should always sound
the same to you as you drive. If you don't want to
use SCV, select OFF.
3-77
DlSP (Display): Press this button to switch the display between the radio station frequency and the time. Time display is available with the ignition turned off.
For XMTM(USA only, if your radio is equipped with XMTM Satellite Radio Service), pressing this button while in XMTMmode to retrieve various pieces of information related to the current song or channel. By pressing and releasing the RCL button, you may retrieve four different categories of information: Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY, Channel Number/Channel Name.
For DAB (Canada only, if your radio is equipped with DAB), pushing this knob switches the display between channel name and PTY name.
To change the default on the display, push this button until you see the display you want, then hold the knob until the display flashes. The selected display will now be the default.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to switch between AM, FM, FM2, or XM1, XM2 (USA only, if your radio is equipped with XMTMSatellite Radio Service) or DAB1, DAB2 (Canada only, if your radio is equipped with DAB). The display will show your selection.
TUNE: Turn this knob to choose a radio station.
For DAB (Canada only, if your radio is equipped with DAB), the TUNE knob allows you to navigate the DAB frequency range. Turning this knob will tune up or tune
3-78
down the range. The radio will display theletter L with a number next to it (1 through 23). EachL number refers to a frequency and there can be multiple stations contained in one frequency. It may alsotake a few seconds, once you have tuned to a frequency, for that frequency to gather all of the stations. Depending onhow many stations are within a frequency, with every tunuep or down, you may be tuning to another statioonr to another frequency. The display will show your selections.
la SEEK Dl : Press the right or the left arrow to go to the next or to the previous station and stay there.
To scan stations, press and hold one of the SEEK arrows for two seconds until SCAN appears on the display. The radio will go to a station, play for a few seconds, then go on to the next station. Press one of the SEEK arrows again to stop scanning.
To scan preset stations, press and hold one of the SEEK arrows for more than four seconds until PSCAN and the preset number appear on the display. You will hear a double beep. The radio will go to the first
preset station stored on your pushbuttons, play for a few
seconds, then go on to the next preset station. Press one of the SEEK arrows again to stop scanning presets.
The radio will seek and scan only to the stations that are in the selected band and only to those with a strong signal.
Setting Preset Stations
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations. You can set upto 30 stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2, six XMI and six XM2 (USA only, if your radio is equipped with the XMTMSatellite Radio Service) or DAB1 and DAB2 (Canada only, if your radio is equipped with DAB), by performing the following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select AM, FM1 or FM2, or XMI, XM2, or DABI, DAB2.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press EQ to select the EQ setting. !t will he stored with the preset station.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons. When you hear the radio produce one beep, release the pushbutton. Whenever you press that numbered pushbutton, the station you set will return.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
Setting the Tone (BassITreble)
AUDIO: Push and release AUDIO until BASS, MID or TREBLE appears on the display. Then turn the AUDIO knob to increase or to decrease. If a station is weak or noisy, you may want to decrease the treble.
To adjust bass, midrange or treble to the middle position, select BASS, MID or TREBLE. Then push and hold AUDIO for more than two seconds until you hear a beep. BASS and a zero, MID and a zero or TREBLE and a zero will appear on the display.
To adjust both tone controls and both speaker controls to the middle position, end out of audio mode by pushing the AUDIO knob until the display goes blank. Then push and hold AUDIO for more than two seconds until you hear a beep. ALL CENTERED will appear on the display.
EQ (Equalizer): Press this button to choose bass, mid
and treble equalization settings designed for different program types.
3-79
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right and the left speakers, push and release AUDIO until BAL appears on the display. Then turn the AUDIO knob to move the sound toward the right or the left speakers. A bar graph with indicators will show how the sound is balanced.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear speakers, push and release AUDIO until FADE appears on the display. Then turn the AUDIO knob to move the sound toward the front or the rear speakers. A bar graph with indicators will show how the sound is balanced.
To adjust balance or fade to the middle position, select BAL or FADE. Then push and hold AUDIO for more than two seconds until you hear a beep. The indicator will be centered onthe display.
To adjust both tone controls and both speaker controls to the middle position, end out of audio mode by pushing the AUDIO knob until the display goes blank. Then press and hold AUDIO for more than two seconds until you hear a beep. ALL CENTERED will appear on the display.
EQ (Equalizer): Press this button to choose bass, mid
and treble equalization settings designed for different program types.
3-80
Finding a PTY Station (RDS, XMTM and DAB)
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
1. Press P-TYP. The PTY symbol will be displayed on the screen.
2. Select a category by turning the AUDIO knob.
3. Once the desired category is displayed, press either SEEK arrow to select the category and take youto the category's first station.
4. If you want to go to another station within that category and the category is displayed, press either SEEK arrow once. If the category is not displayed, press either SEEK arrow twice to display the category and then to go to another station.
5. If PTY times out and is no longer on the display, go back to Step 1.
To use the PTY interrupt feature, press and hold the P-TYP button until you hear a beep on the PTY you want to interrupt with. An asterisk will appear next to the PTY name (for example CLASSICAL*). When you are listening to a compact disc, the last selected RDS station will interrupt play if that selected PTY format is broadcast.
An asterisk will not display for XM or DAB service.
SCAN: You can also scan through the stations within a category by performing the following:
1. Press P-TYP. The PTY symbol will be displayed on the screen.
2. Select a category by turning the AUDIO knob.
3. Once the desired category is displayed, press and hold either SEEK arrow, and the radio will begin scanning within your chosen category.
4. Press and hold either SEEK arrow again to stop at a particular station.
If both P-TYP and TRAF are on, the radio will search for stations with the selected PTY and traffic announcements.
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the same program type. Press and hold BAND for two seconds to turn alternate frequency on. AF ON will appear on the displav. The radio may switch to stronger stations. Press and hold BAND again for two seconds to turn alternate frequency off. AF OFF will appear on the display. The radio will not switch to other stations. When youturn the ignition off and then on again, the alternate frequency feature will automatically
be turned on.
This function does not apply for XMTMor DAB.
RDS and DAB Messages
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies. When an alert announcement comes on the current radio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You will hear the announcement, even if the volume is muted or a cassette tape or compact disc is playing. If a cassette tape or compact disc is being used, play will stop during the announcement. You will not be able to turn off alert announcements.
ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency broadcast system. This feature is not supported by all RDS stations.
INFO (Information): If the current station has a message, INFO wiii appear on ihe dispiay. Press this button to see the message. The message may display the artist and song title, call in phone numbers, etc.
If the whole message is not displayed, parts of it
will appear every three seconds. To scroll through the
..... message at your own speed, press the INFO button
I . ~ ~ ~ I.--c---+p-Jl*,catculy.
A
A
Y I V U ~n f -CIIIIm v n t l n
IIGVY
VI
\n,nrrlc
\Atill -arnrn-n-a. r QC
~
the display with each press. Once the complete
message has been displayed, INFO will disappear from
the display until another new message is received.
The old message can be displayed by pressing
the INFO button until a new message is received or a
different siaiion is tuned to.
3-81
TRAF (Traffic): TRAF will appear on the display if the tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements. To receive the traffic announcement from the tuned station, press this button. Brackets will be displayed around
TRAF and when a traffic announcement comes on the
tuned radio station you will hear it.
If the current tuned station does not broadcast traffic announcements, press this button and the radio will seek to a station that does. When the radio finds a station that broadcasts traffic announcements, it will stop. Brackets will be displayed around TRAF and when a traffic announcement comes on the tuned radio station you will hear it. If no station is found, NO TRAF will appear on the display.
For DAB (Canada only, if your radio is equipped with DAB), when the TRAF button is pressed, DAB does not seek to a station that broadcasts traffic. DAB only checks the current frequency for traffic support.
Traffic Interrupt Feature: Your radio can interrupt the play of a cassette, CD, or XMTM,or DAB station. Press the TRAF button. The radio will seek to a station that broadcasts traffic announcements. When the radio finds a station that broadcasts traffic announcements, it will stop. Brackets around TRAF will appear on the display. When a traffic announcement
comes on the station that was found, you will hear
it. When the traffic announcement is over, the radio will resume play of the cassette, CD, or XMTM,or DAB station. If no station is found, NO TRAF will appear on the display.
3-82
Radio Messages
CAL (CALIBRATE): Your audio system has been calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If this message appears on the display it means that your radio has not been configured properly for your vehicle and must be returned to the dealership for service.
I
RDadisipolay
Message
XL (Explicit Language Channels)
i Updating No Signal
I LoadingXM
XMTMRadio Messages
I
Condition
Action Required
XL on the radio display, after the channel name, indicates content with explicit language.
These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a customer's request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Updating encryption code
The encryption code in your receiver is being updated, and no action is required. This process should take no h g e r than 30 seconds.
Loss of signal
Your system is functioning correctly, but you are in a location that is blocking the XM signal. When you move into an open area, the signal should return.
1" Off Air
I Channel not in service
Channel no longer available
1 This channel is not currently in service. Tune to another channel.
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned. Tune to another station. If this station was one of your presets, you may need to choose another station for that Dreset button.
3-83
XMTMRadio Messag-es (cont'd)
Radio Display Message
Condition Action Required
I No Info
I Artist Name/Feature not I No artist information is available at this time othnis
I
available
channel. Your system is working properly.
No Info
Song/Program Title not No song title information is available at this time on this
available
channel. Your system is working properly.
No Info
Category Name not
No category information is available at this time on this
available
channel. Your system is working properly.
I No Info
No Texthformational message available
No text or informational messages are available at this time on this channel. Your system is working properly.
I Not Found
No channel available for There are no channels available for the category you
the chosen category
selected. Your system is working properly.
XM Locked
Theft lock active
The XM receiver in your vehicle may have previously been in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles. If you receive this message after having your vehicle serviced, check with the servicing facility.
Radio ID
Radio ID label (channel 0)
If you tune to channel 0, you will see this message alternating with your XM Radio 8 digit radio ID label. This label is needed to activate your service.
Unknown
Radio ID not known (should only be if hardware failure)
If you receive this message when you tune to channel 0, you may have a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer.
Hardware failure
If this message does not clear within a short period of time, your receiver may have a fault. Consult with your retail location.
3-a4
Playing a Cassette Tape
The longer side with the tape visible should face to the right. If the ignition and the radio are on, the tape can be inserted and will begin playing. If you hear nothing or hear a garbled sound, the tape may not be in squarely. Press the eject button to remove the tape and start over.
While the tape is playing, use the VOLUME and AUDIO controls just as you dofor the radio. The display will show an arrow to show which side of the tape is playing.
If you want to insert a tape while the ignition or radio is off, first press the eject button or DISP. Cassette tape adapter kits for portable compact disc players will work in your cassette tape piayer.
Your tape bias is set automatically.
If an error appears on the display, see `Cassette Tape Messages'' later in this section.
144 (Reverse): Press this pushbutton to reverse the
tape rapldly. Ihe radio wiii piay wniie ine rape reverses. Press it again to return to playing speed.
DD 2 (Forward): Press this pushbutton to advance
quickly to another part of the tape. The radio will play while the tape advances. Press this pushbutton again to return to playing speed.
6 SIDE: Press this pushbutton to play the other side of the tape.
la SEEK Dl : Your tape must have at least three seconds of silence between each selection for seek to work. Press the left or the right arrow to go to the previous or to the next selection on the tape.
To scan cassette tape selections, press and hold one of the SEEK arrows for two seconds until SCN appears
OR the display. Y o ~wl ill hear a beep. The tape wil! gcr tn
the next selection, play for a few seconds, then go on to the next selection. The cassette tape will only scan forward. Press one of the SEEK arrows again to stop scanning.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a ~ 2 ~ s ~tatpteen r Cl-) is playing.
CD TAPE: Press this button to play a cassette tape or a CD when listening to the radio.
(Eject): Press this button to eject a tape.
3-85
Cassette Tape Messages
If an error message appears while trying to play a cassette tape, it could be for one of the following reasons:
TIGHT TAPE: The tape is tight and the player can't turn the tape hubs. Remove the tape. Hold the tape with the open end down and try to turn the right hub counterclockwise with a pencil. Turn the tape over and repeat. If the hubs do not turn easily, your tape may be damaged and should not be used in the player. Try a new tape to make sure your player is working properly.
BROKEN TAPE: The tape is broken. Try a new tape.
CLEAN PLAYER: If this message appears on the display, the cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage to the tapes and player. See Care of Your Cassette Tape Playeron page 3-114.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can't be corrected, contact your dealership. If your radio displays an error number, write it down and provide it to your dealership when reporting the problem.
CD Adapter Kits
It is possible to use a portable CD player adapter kit with your cassette tape player after activatingthe bypass feature on your tape player.
To activate the bypass feature, use the following steps:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Insert the adapter into the cassette slot.
4. Press and hold the CD TAPE button until READY is displayed.
The override feature will remain active until the eject button is pressed.
Playing a Compact Disc
Insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up. The player will pull it in. The disc should begin playing. If you want to insert a CD while the ignition or the radio is off, first press the eject button or DISP.
If you turn off the ignition or radio with a disc in the
player, it will stay in the player. When you turn on the ignition or system, the disc will start playing where it stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
If an error appears on the display, see `Compact Disc Errors" later in this section.
3-86
144 (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
quickly reverse within a track. You will hear sound.
DD 2 (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton
to quickly advance within a track. You will hear sound.
4 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. Press RDM again to turn off random play.
DlSP (Display): Press this button to see which track is playing. Press it again within five seconds to see how long it has been playing. To change the default on the display (track or elapsed time), push this button until you see the display you want, then hold the knob unti! the disp!ay flashes; The selected display will now be the default.
la SEEK Dl : Press the left SEEK arrow to go to the start of the current track if more than eight seconds have played. If you hold the button or press it more than once, the player will continue moving back through the disc.
Press the right SEEK arrow to go to the next track. If you hold the button or press it more than once, the player will continue moving forward through the disc.
next track, play for a few seconds, then go on to the next track. The disc will only scan forward. Press one of the SEEK arrows again to stop scanning.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a cassette tape or CD is playing.
CD TAPE: Press this button to change to playing a cassette tape or a CD when listening to the radio.
A (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD.
Compact Disc Errors
CHECK CD: If this message appears on the radio display, it could be due to one of the following reasons:
0 You're driving on a very rough road. When the road becomes smoother, the disc should play.
0 The disc is dirty, scratched, wet or upside down.
0 The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and try again.
It the GU is not piaying correciiy, ior any oiiier r e a s w ~ , try a known good CD. If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can't be corrected, contact your dealer. If your radio displays an error number, write it down and provide it to your deaier when reporting the problem.
3-a7
Radio with Six-Disc CD
~
Radio Data System (RDS): Your audio system is equipped with a Radio Data System (RDS). RDS features are available for use only on FM stations that broadcast RDS information.
Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of programming, receive announcements concerning local and national emergencies, display messages from radio stations, and seek to stations with traffic announcements. This system relies upon receiving specific information from these stations and will only work when the information is available. In rare cases, a radio station 3-88
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause the radio features to work improperly. If this happens, contact the radio station.
While you are tuned to an RDS station, the station name or thecall letters will appear on the display instead of the frequency. RDS stations may also provide the timofe day, a program type (PTY) for current programming and the name of the program being broadcast.
XMTMRadio Satellite Service (USA Only):XMTMis a continental U S . based satellite radio service that offers 100 coast to coast channels including music, news, sports, talk and children's programming. XMTM provides digital quality audio and text information, including song title and artist name. A service fee is required in order to receive the XMTM service. For more information, contact XMTM at www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Digital Audio Broadcast (DAB) (Canada Only):DAB is a Canadian land-based radio service that offers digital quality audio and text information including songtitle, artist name, traffic, weather, emergency announcements and more. Digital Audio Broadcast transmission services are currently available in Toronto, Montreal, Vancouver, Ottawa, and Windsor. In fringe areas signalsmay be interrupted by buildings, trees and other obstructions. Additional services will be addedin the future. For current DAB coverage andother information consult the GM Canada website at www.gmcanada.com, your dealer or call 1-800-263-3777.
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Push this knob to turn the system on and off.
VOL (Volume): Turn the knob to increase or to decrease volume.
AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): Your system has a feature called automatic volume. With this feature, your audio system adjusts automatically to make up for road and wind noise as you drive.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to select MIN, MED or MAX. Each higher setting will allow for more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds. Then, as you drive, automatic volume increases the volume, as necessary, to overcome noise at any speed. The volume level should always sound the same to you as you drive. If you don't want to use automatic volume, select OFF.
RCL (Recall): Push this knob to switch the display between the radio station frequency and the time. Pushing this knob with the ignition off will display the time.
For XMTM (USA onliyf ,your radio is equipped with XMTM Satellite Radio Service), pressingthis button while in XMTMmode to retrieve various pieces of information related to the current song or channel.By pressing and releasing the RCL button, you may retrieve four different categories of information: Artist, SongTitle, Category or PTY, Channel Number/Channel Name.
For DAB(Canada only, if your radio isequipped with DAB), pushing this knob switches the display between channel name and PTY name.
To change the default on the display, push the knob until you see the display you want,then hold the knob until the display flashes. Theselected display will now bethe default.
3-89
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to switch between AM, FM, FM2, or XM1, XM2 (USA only, if your radio is equipped with XMTMSatellite Radio Service) or DABI, DAB2 (Canada only, if your radio is equipped with DAB). The display will show your selection.
TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations.
For DAB (Canada only, if your radio is equipped with DAB), the TUNE knob allows you to navigate the DAB frequency range. Turning this knob will tune up or tune down the range. The radio will display the letter L with a number next to it (1 through 23). Each L number refers to a frequency and there can be multiple stations contained in one frequency. It may also take a few seconds, once you have tuned to a frequency, for that frequency to gather all of the stations. Depending on how many stations are within a frequency, with every tune up or down, you may be tuning to another station or to another frequency. The display will show your selections.
k SEEK >I : Press the right or the left arrow to go to the next or to the previous station and stay there.
The radio will seek only to stations that are in the selected band and only to those with a strong signal.
k SCAN >I : Press and hold either SCAN arrow for two seconds until SC appears on the display and you hear a beep. The radio will go to a station, play for a few seconds, then go on to the next station. Press either SCAN arrow again to stop scanning.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either SCAN arrow for more than four seconds. PRESET SCAN will appear on the display. You will hear a double beep. The radio will go to a preset station stored on your pushbuttons, play for a few seconds, then go on to the next preset station. Press either SCAN arrow again to stop scanning presets.
The radio will scan only to stations that are in the selected band and only to those with a strong signal.
Setting Preset Stations
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to 30 stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2, six XM1 and six XM2 (USA only, if your radio is equipped with the XMTM Satellite Radio Service) or DAB1 and DAB2 (Canada only, if your radio is equipped with DAB), by performing the following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select AM, FM1 or FM2, or XMI, XM2, or DABI, DAB2.
3. Tune in the desired station.
3-90
4. Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever you press that numbered pushbutton, the station you set will return and the equalization that you selected will also be automatically selected for that pushbutton.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
Setting the Tone (Bassnreble)
AUDIO: Push the AUDIO knob until BASS, MID or TREB appears on the display. Turn the knob to increase or to decrease. If a station is weak or noisy, you may want to decrease the treble.
To adjust bass, midrange or treble to the middle position, select BASS, MID or TREB and push and hold the AUDIO knob. The radio will produce one beep and adjust the display level to zero.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle pssiti~np, ~ 2nhd hn!d the 4ILll3lO knob when no tone or speaker control is displayed. The radio will produce one beep and CENTERED will appear on the display.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this button to choose between bass, midrange and treble equalization settings designed for country, jazz, talk, pop, rock and classical program types.
To return to the manual mode (CUSTOM), press the AUTO EQ button until CUSTOM appears on the display. Then you will be able to manually adjust the bass, midrange and treble using the AUDIO knob.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right and the left speakers, push the AUDIO knob until BAL appears on the display. Turn the knob to move the sound toward the left or the right speakers.
To adjust the fade between the front and rear speakers, push and hold the AUDIO knob until FAD appears on the display. Turn the knob to move the sound toward the front or the rear speakers.
To adjust the balance and the fade to the middle position, select balance or fade and push and hold the AUDIO knob. The radio will beep once and will adjust the display level to the middle position.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle p~sitinnp, lush and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone or speaker controls are displayed. The radio will produce one beep and CENTERED will appear on the display.
3-91
Finding a PTY Station (RDS, XMTM and DAB)
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
1. Press the P-TYPE button. P-TYPE and the last selected PTY will be displayed on the screen.
2. Select a category by turning the P-TYPE knob.
3. Once the desired category is displayed, press either SEEK arrow to select the category and take you to the category's first station.
4. If you want to go to another station within that category and the category is displayed, press either SEEK arrow once. If the category is not displayed, press either SEEK arrow twice to display the category and then to go to another station.
5. If PTY times out and is no longer on the display, go back to Step 1.
If both P-TYPE and TRAF are on, the radio will search for stations with the selected PTY and traffic announcements.
To use the PTY interrupt feature, press and hold the P-TYPE button until you hear a beep on the PTY you want to interrupt with. When selected, an asterick will appear beside that PTY on the display. You may select multiple interrupts if desired. When you are
listening to a compact disc, the last selected RDS station will interrupt play if that selected program type format is broadcast.
SCAN: You can also scan through the channels within a category by performing the following:
1. Press the P-TYPE button. P-TYPE and the last selected PTY will be displayed on the screen.
2. Select a category by turning the P-TYPE knob.
3. Once the desired category is displayed, press and hold either SCAN arrow, and the radio will begin scanning within your chosen category.
4. Press either SCAN arrow again to stop at a particular station.
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the same program type. Press and hold BAND for two seconds to turn alternate frequency on. AF ON will appear on the display. The radio may switch to stronger stations. Press and hold BAND again for two seconds to turn alternate frequency off. AF OFF will appear on the display. The radio will not switch to other stations. When you turn the ignition off and then on again, the alternate frequency feature will automatically be turned on.
This function does not apply for XMTMor DAB.
3-92
Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only)
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite PTYs. These buttons have factory PTY presets. You can set up to 12 PTYs (six FMI and six FM2) by performing the following steps:
1. Press BAND to select FMl or FM2.
2. Press the P-TYPE button to activate program type select mode.
3. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever you press that numbered pushbutton, the PTY you set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
RDS and DAB Messages
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies. When an alert announcement comes on the current radio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You will hear the announcement, even if the volume is muted or a compact disc is playing. If the compact disc player is playing, play will stop during the announcement. You will not be able to turn off alert announcements.
ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency broadcast system. This feature is not supported by all RDS stations.
INFO (Information): If the current station has a message, INFO will appear on the display. Press this butterr to see ths message; The message may display the artist and song title, call in phone numbers, etc.
If the whole message is not displayed, parts of it will appear every three seconds. To scroll through the message at your own speed, press the INFO button repeatedly. A new group of words will appear on the display with each press. Once the complete message has been displayed, INFO will disappear from the display until another new message is received. The old message can be displayed by pressing the INFO button until a new message is received or a different stationis tuned to.
3-93
TRAF (Traffic): TRAF will appear on the display if the tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements. To receive the traffic announcement from the tuned station, press this button. Brackets will be displayed around TRAF and when a traffic announcement comes on the tuned radio station you will hear it.
If the current tuned station does not broadcast traffic announcements, press this button and the radio will seek to a station that does. When the radio finds a station that broadcasts traffic announcements, it will stop. Brackets will be displayed aroundTRAF and when a traffic announcement comes on the tuned radio station you will hear it. If no station is found, NO TRAFFIC will appear on the display.
For DAB (Canada only, if your radio is equipped with DAB), when the TRAF button is pressed, DAB does not seek to a station that broadcasts traffic. DAB only checks the current frequency for traffic support.
Traffic Interrupt Feature: Your radio can interrupt the play of a CD, or XMTM,or DAB station. Press the TRAF button. The radio will seek to a station that broaddcasts traffic announcements. When the radio finds a station that broadcasts traffic announcements, it will stop. Brackets around TRAF will appear on the display. When a traffic announcement comes on the station that was found, you will hear it. When the traffic announcement is over, the radio will resume play of the CD, or XMTM,or DAB station. If no station is found, NO TRAFFIC will appear on the display.
3-94
Radio Display Message
XL (Explicit Language Channels)
Updating
XMTMRadio Messages
I
Condition
I
Action Required
XL on the radio display, after the channel name, indicates content with explicit language.
These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a customer's request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Updating encryption code
The encryption code in your receiver is being updated, and no action is required. This process should take no longer than 30 seconds.
~~~
~
No Info
~
~
~~
No Info
Artist Name/Feature not available
Song/Program Title not available
No artist information is available at this time on this channel. Your system is working properly.
No song title information is avaiiabie ai this time on this
channel. Your system is working properly.
3-95
XMTMRadio Messages (cont'd)
Radio Display Message
Condition Action Required
t No Info No Info
CNaatmegeory
not
available
No TexVlnformational message available
No category information is available at this time on this channel. Your system is working properly.
No text or informational messages are available at this time on this channel. Your system is working properly.
Not Found
No channel available for There are no channels available for the category you
the chosen category
selected. Your system is working properly.
XM Locked Radio ID
Theft lock active
Radio ID label
(channel 0)
The XM receiver in your vehicle may have previously been
in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM receivers
cannot be swapped between vehicles. If you receive this
message after having your vehicle serviced, check with the
servicing facility.
~~
~
~~
~~
If you tune to channel 0, you will see this message
alternating with your XM Radio 8 digit radio ID label. This
label is needed to activate your service.
Unknown Radio
ID not known (should only be if hardware failure)
If you receive this message when you tune to channel 0, you may have a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer.
Chk XMRcvr Hardware
failure
If this message does not clear within a short periodof time,
1 your receiver may have a fault. Consult with your retail
location.
3-96
Playing a Compact Disc
If an error appears on the display, see "Compact Disc Messages" later in this section.
6 LOAD CD : Press the LOAD side of this button to
load CDs into the compactdisc player. This compact disc player will hold up to six discs.
To insert one disc, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press and release the LOAD side of the LOAD CD button.
3. Wait for the light, located to the right of the slot, to turn green.
4. Load a disc. Insert the disc partway into the slot, label side up. The player will pull the disc in.
When a disc is inserted, the CD symbol will be displayed. If you select an equalization setting for your disc, it will be activated each time you play a disc.
If the radio is on or off. the disc will begin to play automatically.
To insert multiple discs, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press and hold the LOAD side of the LOAD CD button fnr two seconds, You will hear a beep and the light, located to the
right of the slot, will begin to flash.
3. Once the light stops flashing and turns green, load a disc. Insert the disc partway into the slot, label side up. The player will pull the disc in. Once the disc is loaded, the light will begin flashing again. Once the light stops flashing and turns green you can load another disc. The disc player takes up to six discs. Do not try to load more than six.
To load more than one disc but less than six, complete Steps 1 through 3. When you have finished loading discs, with the radio on or off, press the LOAD side of the LOAD CD button to cancel the loading function. The radio will begin to play the last CD loaded. When a disc is inserted, the CD symbol will be displayed. If more than one disc has been ioaded, a number for each disc will be displayed. If you select an equalization setting for your disc, it will be activated each time you play a disc. If the radio is on or off, the last disc loaded will begin to play automatically. As each new track starts to piay, ine irack number wiii appear on the display.
3-97
Playing a Specific Loaded Compact Disc
For every CD loaded, a number will appear on the radio display. To play a specific CD, first press the CD AUX button to start playing a CD. Then press the numbered pushbutton that corresponds to the CD you want to play. A small bar will appear under the CD number that is playing, and the track number will appear.
If an error appears on the radio display, see "Compact Disc Messages" later in this section.
LOAD CD (Eject): Pressing the CD ejecst ide of this button will eject a single disc or multiple discs. To eject the disc that is currently playing, press and release this button. To eject multiple discs, press and hold this button for two seconds. You will hear a beep and the light will flash to let you know when a disc is being ejected.
REMOVE CD will be displayed. You can now remove the disc. If the disc is not removed, after 25 seconds, the disc will be automatically pulled back into the receiver. If you try to push the disc back into the receiver, before the 25 second time period is complete, the receiver will sense an error and will try to eject the disc several times before stopping.
Do not repeatedly press the CD eject side of the LOAD CD eject button to eject a disc after you have tried to push it in manually. The receivers 25-second
3-98
eject timer will reset at each press of eject, which will cause the receiver to not eject the disc until the 25-second time period has elapsed.
Once the player stops and the disc is ejected, remove the disc. After removing the disc, press the PWR
knob off and then on again. This will clear the
disc-sensing feature and enable discs to be loaded into the player again.
<< REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button to
reverse quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a reduced volume. Release it to play the passage. The display will show elapsed time.
>> FWD (Forward): Press and hold this button to
advance quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a reduced volume. Release it to play the passage. The display will show elapsed time.
RPT (Repeat): With repeat, you can repeat one track or an entire disc. To use repeat, do the following:
To repeat the track you are listening to, press and release the RPT button. RPT will appear on the display. Press RPT again to turn it off.
To repeat the disc you are listening to, press and hold the RPT button for two seconds. RPT will appear on the display. Press RPT again to turn oitfK
RDM (Random): With random, you can listen to the tracks in random, rather than sequential, order, on one disc or on all of the discs. To use random, do one of the following:
e To play the tracks on the disc you are listening to in random order, press and hold RDM for more than two seconds. You will hear a beep and RANDOM ONE will appear on the display. Press RDM again to turn it off.
e To play the tracks on all of the discs that are loaded in random order, press and release the RDM button. RANDOM ALL will appear on the display. Press RDM again to turn it off.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press AUTO EQ
to select the desired equalization setting while playing a compact disc. The equalization will be automatically set whenever you play a compact disc. For more
information on AUTO EQ, see "AUTO E Q listed
previously in this section.
k SEEK >I : Press the left arrow to qo to the start of the current track, if more than ten seconds have passed. Press the right arrow to go to the next track. If you press the button more than once, the player will continue moving backward or forward through the disc.
k SCAN >I : To scan one disc, press and hold either SCAN arrow for more than two seconds until SCAN appears on the display and you hear a beep. Use this feature to listen to 10 seconds of each track of the currently selected disc. SCAN will appear on the display. Press either SCAN arrow again, to stop scanning.
To scan all loaded discs, press and hold either SCAN arrow for more than four seconds until DISC SCAN appears on the display and you hear a beep. Use this feature to listen to 10 seconds of the first tracks of each disc loaded. Press either SCAN arrow again, to stop scanning.
RCL (Recall): Push this knob to see how long the current track has been p l q i q . To change the default on the display (track and elapsed time), push the knob until you see the display you want, then hold the knob until the display flashes. The selected display will now be the default.
BAND: Press this button to play the radio when a disc(s) is in the player.
3-99
Using Song List Mode
The integrated six-disc CD changer has a feature called song list. This feature is capable of saving 20 track selections.
To save tracks into the song list feature, perform the following steps:
1. Turn the disc player on and load it with at least one disc. See "LOAD CD" listed previously in this section for more information.
2. Check to see that the disc changer is not in song list mode. S-LIST should not appear in the display. If S-LIST is present, press the SONG LIST
button to turn it off.
3. Select the desired disc by pressing the numbered pushbutton and then use the SEEK SCAN right arrow button to locate the track that you want to save. The track will begin to play.
4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for two or more seconds to save the track into memory. When SONG LIST is pressed a beep will be heard immediately. After two seconds of pressing SONG LIST continuously, two beeps will sound to confirm that the track has been saved.
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving other selections.
If you attempt to save more than 20 selections, S-LIST FULL will appear on the display.
To play the song list, press the SONG LIST button. One
beep will be heard and S-LIST will appear on the
display. The recorded tracks will begin to play in the order that they were saved.
You may seek through the song list by using the SEEK SCAN arrows. Seeking past the last saved track will return you to the first saved track.
To delete tracks from the song list, perform the following steps:
1. Turn the disc player on.
2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on. S-LIST will appear on the display.
3. Press the SEEK SCAN arrows to select the desired track to be deleted.
4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for two seconds. When pressing SONG LIST, one beep will be heard immediately. After two seconds of pressing the SONG LIST button continuously, two beeps will be heard to confirm that the track has been deleted.
After a track has beendeleted, the remaining tracks are moved up the list. When another traciks added to the song list, the track will be addedto the end of the list.
3-100
To delete the entire song list, perform the following steps:
1. Turn the disc player on.
2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on. S-LIST will appear on the display.
3. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for more than four seconds. A beep will be heard, followed by two beeps after two seconds and a final beep will be heard after four seconds. S-LIST EMPTY will appear on the display indicating that the song list has been deleted.
If a disc is ejected, and the song list contains saved tracks from that disc, thosetracks are automatically deleted from the song list. Any tracks saved to the song list again are added to the bottom of the list.
To end song list mode, press the SONG LIST button. One beep will be heard and S-LIST will be removed from the display.
Compact Disc Messages
CHECK CD: If this message appears on the raaio display, it could be due to one of the following reasons:
You're driving on a very rough road. When the road becomes smoother, the disc should play.
The disc is dirty, scratched, wet or upside down.
0 The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and try again.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason, try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can't be corrected, contact your dealer. If your radio displays an error message, write it down and provide it to your dealer when reporting the problem.
Entertainment System
Your vehicle may have a Digital Video Disc (DVD) entertainment system. The entertainment system includes a DVD player, a video display screen, wireless headphones, and a remote control.
The video entertainment system is for passengers in the second and third row seats only. The driver cannot safely view the video screen while driving and should not try to do so.
In severe or extreme temperature conditions your entertainment system should not be operateci untii the temperature is within the operating range. This will keep your video components from being damaged when the temperature is below -4°F (-20°C) or above 140°F (60°C). To resume operation, shut off the entertainment system, pull down the video screen and
heat or cool the vehicle until the temperature is
within the operating range.
3-101
Headphones
The entertainment system includes wireless headphones.
The wireless headphones have an ON/OFF switch, and a volume control. To use the headphones turn the switch to ON. An indicator light will illuminate. If the light does not illuminate, the batteries may need to be replaced. See "Battery Replacement" later in this section for more information. Switch the headphones to OFF when not in use.
If the system is shut off, or if the headphones are out of range of the transmitters below the overhead entertainment system control panel for more than three minutes, the headphones will shut off automatically to save the batteries. If you move too far forward or step out of the vehicle, the headphones will lose the audio signal.
Use the volume control to adjust the volume of the headphones.
Notice: Do not store the headphones in heat or direct sunlight. This could damage the headphones and would not be covered by your warranty. Keep the headphones stored in a cool place.
Battery Replacement
To change the batteries, do the following:
1. Slide open the battery compartment door located on the left side of the headphones.
2. Replace the two AAA batteries in the compartment. Make sure that they are installed correctly.
3. Slide the battery door shut.
If the headphones are to be stored for a long period of time, remove the batteries, and keep them in a cool, dry place.
Stereo RCA Jacks
The RCA jacks and the mini-headphone jacks are located on the most forward side of the overhead console. The RCA jacks allow you to hook up an auxiliary device such as a camcorder or a video game unit. The yellow RCA jack is used for video, the redRCA jack for right audio, and the white RCA jack for left audio. You may require adapter connectors or cables to connect your auxiliary device to the RCA jacks. Refer to the manufacturer's instructions for proper usage.
To use the auxiliary audio and video inputs on the
entertainment system, connect an external auxiliary device such as a camcorder to the RCA jacks and turn on both the auxiliary device power and the power on the front of the entertainment system player.
3-102
If a disc is not present in the player, the auxiliary signal will immediately be displayed on the entertainment system. If a disc is present when the entertainment system power is turned on, the player will automatically begin playing the disc andthe user will need to press the SRCE button on the remote control or on the DVD player faceplate to display the auxiliary input signals. Each successive press of the SRCE button on the remote control or on the DVD player faceplate switches the system between disc and auxiliary input. See "DVD Player", and "Remote Control" later in this section for more information.
Audio Speakers
Only one audio source can be heard throughthe speakers at a time.
Audio from the radio, cassette or CD player will be heard through all speakers when the front audio system is being used and the rear seat audio system is off.
Sound from the DVD player or an auxiliary device can be heard through all speakers when the front audio
system and rear seat audio are off and a DVD or
auxiliary device is playing. To hear the DVD, auxiliary device or the rear seat audio system, when the
front audio system is on, you must use the headphones.
Video Screen
The video screen is located in the overhead console.
To use the video screen, do the following:
1. Push forward on the release button and the screen will fold down.
2. Push the screen away from you and adjust its position as desired.
When the video screen is not in use, push it up into its locked position.
The DVD player and display will continue to operate when the display is in either the up or down position.
Notice: Avoid directly touching the video screen, as damage may occur.Do not touchthe video screen. See "Cleaning the Video Screen" in the Index for more information.
DVD Player
The DVD player is located in the overhead console.
The DVD player can be controlled by the buttons on the DVD player, and by the buttons on the remote control. See "Remote Control" later in this section for more information.
3-1 03
The entertainment system is only compatible with Region 1 DVDs authorized for use in the United States, Canada, Puerto Rico, Bermuda, the Virgin Islands, and some islands in the Pacific. On some DVD jackets, you will see the region displayed. Regular audio CDs can also be played by the DVD player. The video screen will default to off when an audio CD is played. Home recorded CDs (CDRs) will not play in this DVD player. Try the audio system's CD player instead.
DVD Player Buttons
C. Main Menu: Press this button to view the media menu. The media menu is different on every disc. Use the up, down, right and left arrow buttons to move the cursor around the media menu. After making a selection press enter.
D. Power: Press this button to turn the DVD player on and off.
E. Power Light: Shows if power is on or off.
F. Stop: Press this button to stop playing, rewinding or fast forwarding.
G. Play/Pause: Press this button to start play. Press this button while a DVD is playing to pause it. Press it again to continue playing the DVD.
H. Display Control Button: Press this button to adjust color, tint, brightness, contrast, and display mode (normal, full or zoom).
I. Directional Control Circle: Press these buttons to move through menu choices, or move forward or back in a movie.
J. Enter: Press this button to select choices highlighted in the menu.
A. Eject: Press this button to eject the disc.
B. SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch the system between disc and auxiliary input.
3-104
Playing a Disc
To play a disc, gently insert the disc (with the label side up) into the loading slot. The DVD player will continue loading the disc and the player will automatically start.
If a disc is already in the player, pressthe play/pause button on the face of the player or on the remote control.
Some DVDs will not allow you to fast forward or skip the copyright or previews. Some DVDs will begin playing after the previews have finished. If the DVD does not begin playing refer to the on-screen instructions.
Stopping and Resuming Playback
To stop a disc, press the stop button on the DVD player
or the remote contrd.
To resume playback, press the play/pause button on
the DVD player or the remote control. As long as the disc has not been ejected, and the stop button has not been pressed on the remote control, the movie should resume play from where it was last stopped.
cr If 14 +h- A;-- h - m h n n m ninntnd
I I 11 IC UIJb I IUJ UbbI I b J b U L b U ,
step h g f f c ) c~ ) t~he
remote control has beenpressed, the disc will resume
play at the beginning.
Ejecting a Disc
Press the eject button on the DVD player to eject the disc.
If a disc is ejected from the player, but not removed, the DVD player will reload the disc after a short period of time.
DVD Messages
The following errors may be displayed.
Disc Format Error: This message will be displayed if a disc is inserted upside down. if the disc is not able to be read or if the disc format is not compatible. This message will also be displayed for unsupported for!mats
such 25 CE-RVis.
Disc Play Error: This message will be displayed if the mechanism cannot play the disc. Several scratches on the disc will cause this error.
Region Code Error: This message will be displayed for
all non-Region 1 discs (DVDs sold outside North
A .--2--\
HI I IGI ILa).
Load/Eject Error: This message will be displayed if the disc is not properly lined up in the mechanism.
Disc Not Present: This message will be displayed
-- when the play, eject, or DVD aux buttons are pressed,
---I
dllu
IIU
-I:-- :U l b G 13
;III
+L.-
LIIG
t.JICyGl.
3-105
Remote Control
Remote Control Buttons
To use the remote control, aim it at the display above the video screen and press the desired button. Direct sunlight or very bright light may affect the ability of the entertainment system to receive signals from the remote control. Be sure the remote's batteries are not discharged, as this will also affect the function of the remote control. Objects blocking the line of sight may also affect the function of the remote control.
Notice: Do not store theremote control in heat or direct sunlight. This could damagethe remote control and would not be covered by your warranty. Keep the remote control stored in caool, dry place.
A. Power: Press this button to turn the DVD player on
or off.
B. Title: Press this button to go back to the title screen, if there is one.
C. Directional Arrows: Press these buttons to move through DVD menus.
3-106
D. Display Control Button: Press this button to adjust color, tint, brightness, contrast, and display mode (normal, full or zoom). This button is also used to adjust the dynamic range compression feature that is used to avoid the loud noise produced by some DVD discs, and to improve the audio quality.
E. Sound: This button moves to next the language or
commentary.
F. Rewind: Press this button to reverse the DVD. To stop reversing, press this button twice. This button may not work when the DVD is playing the copyright or the previews.
G. SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch the system between disc and auxiliary input.
ri. Stop: Press this button to stop playing, rewinding 01 fast forwarding.
I. Prior Chapter: Press this button to move back one chapter or to restart the chapter currently being viewed.
J. Number Buttons: Number entry is used for some UVU menus.
K. Backlight: This button turns on backlighting on the remote for use at night.
L. Main Menu: Press this button to view the media menu. The media menu is different on every disc. Use the up, down, right and left arrow buttons to move the cursor around the media menu. After making a selection, press enter.
M. Enter: Press this button to select choices highlighted in the menu.
N. Return: Press this button to return to the previous menu display.
0. Camera: This button changes camera angles on DVDs that have this feature.
P. Subtitles: This button turns on subtitles and moves through subtitle options (English, Spanish, French, etc., if available).
Q. Fast Forward: Press this button to fast forward the DVD. To stop fast forwarding, press this button twice. This button may not work when the DVD is playing the copyright or the previews.
R. Play/Pause: Press this button to start play. Press
this button while a DVD is playing to pause it.
;+ n\ln nvenr.
I IC33 I L
uyu111
t-
LU
-nnt;n,,fi
'CIWIlL11 IUb
n~o,,;mm
yluyllly
+hn.
Lilb Y
v
Y.
S. Next Chapter: Press this button to jump to the
beginning of the next chapter.
3-107
Setup Menu
To access the setup menu, ensure a DVD disc is in the player and the video is stopped. Press the main menu button. Once the menu is activated, use the directional arrows and enter button to navigate the screen.
The setup menu allows the user to select default preferences for Menu Language, Subtitle Language, Audio Language, TV Aspect, TV Mode, and Dynamic Range Compression.
Not all DVDs support all the feature defaults in the setup menus. In the event a particular feature is not supported, defaults will be provided by the DVD media.
Exit the setup menu by pressing the return button on the remote control. If you make changes to the system setup defaults, the disc will resume play from its
beginning and not where it previously left off.
Battery Replacement
To change the batteries, do the following:
1. Open the battery door located on the back of the remote control.
2. Remove the batteries from the compartment.
3. Replace the two AA batteries. Make sure that they are installed correctly.
If the remote control is to be stored for a long period of time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool, dry place.
3-1 08
Tips and Trouble
Problem No power. Disc will not play.
No sound.
The picture is distorted during fast forward or reverse. The picture does not fill the screen. There are black borders on the top and bottom or on both sides or it looks stretched out.
I ejected the disc and tried to take it out, but it
was pulled back into
the slot.
Recommended Action
The ignition might be off.
The InpuVTitle on the remote might be set for auxiliary. The disc is upside down or is not compatible.
The volume on the headphones could be too low.
This is normal for this operation.
Press and release the
display control button on
the remote and choose
Display Mode. Then
select Full. This will fill the
screen. If there are
hercJn-cen
the
tnn
--r
a-.n.-d
bottom, the movie may
have been made that way
for a standard screen.
Eject the disc again.
Problem
Recommended Action
The language in the audio Press the main menu or on the screen is wrong. button on the remote. This
will access the DVD's media menu. Then follow
the prompts.
The remote does not work.
Point the remote directly at the display not the player. The batteries could be weak or put in wrong.
How do I get subtitles on Press and hold the
or off?
subtitles button on the
remote.
After stopping the player, I Press the stop button on
push piay but sometimes the remote to resume
the DVD starts where I where the DVD left off.
left off, and sometimes at Press the stop button
the beginning.
twice to start the DVD at
the beginning. If the
power is off and the DVD
is still in the player, press
the Play button.
The DVD is playing but there is no picture or sound. The auxiliary device is running but there is no picture or sound.
Press the SRCE button on the remote to get to auxiliary input. The auxiliary device's cords could be plugged into the wrong jack.
3-109
Problem The audio or video skips or jumps.
When I return to the DVD from the main menu, sometimes it plays from the beginning and sometimes from where it left off.
The fast forward, reverse, previous and next functions do not work.
My disc is stuck in the player. The eject button does not work.
I lost the remote andlor the headphones.
Recommended Action
~~
-
The DVD could be dirty or
scratched. Try cleaning
the DVD.
If the stop button was
pressed once, it resumes
play from where it left off.
If the stop button was
pressed twice, it will start at the beginning of
the DVD.
Some commands that do one thing for DVDs will not always work or perform the same function for audio, CDs or games.
Press the eject button on
the DVD player. Turn the
power off, then on and do
not attempt to force or remove the disc from the
player.
See your dealer for assistance.
Problem
Recommended Action
What is the best way to Pour some isopropyl or
clean the screen?
alcohol on a clean cloth.
Sometimes the wireless This could be caused by
headphone audio cuts out interference from cell
or buzzes for a moment, towers or by using your
then it comes back.
cell phone inside the
vehicle.
Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
This feature allows rear seat passengers to listen to and control any of the music sources: radio, cassette tapes and CDs. However, the rear seat passengers can only control the music sources that the front seat passengers are not listening to. For example, rear seat passengers may listen to a cassette tape or CD through headphones, while the driver listens to the radio through the front speakers. The rear seat passengers have control of the volume for each set of headphones.
The front seat audio controls always have priority over the RSA controls. If the front seat passengers switch the source for the main radio to a remote source, the RSA will play the same remote source. The rear speakers will be muted when the RSA power is turned on. You may operate the RSA functions even when
the main radio is off.
3-110
Primary Radio Controls
The following function is controlled by the knob on the main radio: PWR (Power): Push this knob twice to turn RSA off.
Rear Seat Radio Controls
The following functions are controlled by the RSA system burtons: PWR (Power): Press this button to turn RSA on or off. VOL (Volume): Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the knob to increase or to decrease volume. Push the knob hack into its stored position when you're
not using it. The upper VOL knob controls the upper headphone and the lower VOL knob controls the lower headphone.
BAND: Press this button to switch between AM, FMI, FM2, or XMl or XM2 (USA only, if your radio is equipped with XMTMSatellite Radio Service), or DAB1 or DAB2 (Canada only, if you radio is equipped with DAB). If the front passengers are already listening tothe radio, the RSA controller will not switch between the bands and cannot change the frequency. Press this button to play a cassette tape or a compact disc when listening to theradio.
A v SEEK : While listening to the radio, press the up
or the down arrow to tune to the next or the previous
station and stay there. The SEEK button is inactive ifthe front radio is in use.
While listening to a cassette tape, press the up or the down arrow to hear the next or the previous selection. The SEEK button is inactive if the tape mode on the front radio is in use.
While listening to a CD, press the up arrow to hear the next track on the CD. Press the down arrow to go back to the start of the current track (if more than eight seconds have played). The SEEK button is inactive if the CD mode on the front radio is in use.
3-1 11
To scan stations, press and hold one of the SEEK arrows until the radio goes into scan mode. The radio will scan to a station, play for a few seconds, then go on to the next station. Press SEEK again to stop scanning. The scan function is inactive if front radio is in use.
PSET PROG (Preset Program): The front passengers must be listening to something different for each of these functions to work:
Press this button to scan through the preset radio stations set on the pushbuttons on the main radio. The radio will go to a preset station stored on your pushbuttons, play for a few seconds, then go on to the next preset station. Press this .button again to stop scanning presets.
When a cassette tape is playing, press this button to go to the other side of the tape.
When a CD is playing, press this button to select a disc.
TAPE CD: Press this button to switch between playing
a cassette tape or a compact disc when listening to the radio. The inactive tape or compact disc will remain safely inside the radio for future listening.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCK@is designed to discourage theft of your radio. It works by using a secret code to disable all radio functions whenever battery power is removed and the radio is placed in a different vehicle. This feature requires no user input to be activated. It is automatically armed when it is put into the vehicle for the first time.
When the ignition is turned off, the blinking red light indicates that THEFTLOCK@is armed.
If THEFTLOCK@is activated, your radio will not operate if stolen. The radio will display LOCKED and a red LED indicator light will come on above the key symbol to indicate a locked condition. If this occurs, the radio will need to be returned to the dealer.
3-1 12
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
If your vehicle has this feature, you can control certain radio functions using the buttons on your steering wheel.
SOURCE: Press this button to play a cassette tape or compact disc when listening to the radio. If a cassette tape and a compact disc areboth loaded, the system will go to the tape play first. MUTE: Press this button to silence the system. Press it again to turn on the sound.
v : A VOL (Volume) Press the up or down arrow to
increase or decrease volume.
v : A SEEK
Press the up arrow to seek to the next
station and the down arrow to seek to the previous
station. The sound will mute while seeking. When
playing a cassette tape or a compact disc, press the up
arrow to hear the next selection.
BAND: Press this button to choose AM, FM1, FM2, XM1 or XM2 (USA only, if your radio is equipped with XMTMSatellite Radio Service) or DAB1 or DAB2 (Canada only, if your radio is equipped with DAB).
SCAN: Press this button to scan your radio preset stations. The radio will scan to the first preset station stored on your pushbuttons, play for a fewseconds, then go on to the next preset station. The radio will scan preset stations with a strong signal only. Press this button again to stop scanning.
DVD Distortion
You may experience video distortion when operating cellular phones, scanners, CB radios, Global Position Systems (GPS)*. two-way radios, mobile fax, or walkie talkies.
It may be necessary to turn off the DVD player when operating one of these devices in or near the vehicle.
*Excludes the Onstar@System.
3-1 13
Understanding Radio Reception
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM, especially at night. The longer range, however, can cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pick up noise from things like storms and power lines. Try reducing the treble to reduce this noise if you ever get it.
FM Stereo
FM stereo will give you the best sound, but FM signals will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing the sound to come and go.
XMTMSatellite Radio Service
XMTMSatellite Radio gives you digital radio reception from coast to coast. Just as with FM, tall buildings or hills can interfere with Satellite radio signals, causing the sound to come and go. Your radio may display "NO SIGNAL" to indicate interference.
DAB Radio
DAB gives you digital radio reception. Just as with FM, tall buildings or hills can interfere with radio signals, causing the sound to come and go. Your radio may display "NO SIGNAL" to indicate interference.
3-1 14
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes or a damaged mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight and extreme heat. If they aren't, they may not operate properly or may cause failure of the tape player.
Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every 50 hours of use. Your radio may display CLEAN PLAYER to indicate that you have used your tape player for 50 hours without resetting the tape clean timer. If this message appears on the display, your cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage to your tapes and player. If you notice a reduction in sound quality, try a known good cassette to see if the tape or the tape player is at fault. If this other cassette has no improvement in sound quality, clean the tape player.
For best results, use a scrubbing action, non-abrasive cleaning cassette with pads which scrub the tape head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn. The recommended cleaning cassette is available through your dealership.
The cut tape detection feature of your cassette tape player may identify the cleaning cassette tape as a damaged tape, in error. If the cleaning cassette ejects, insert the cassette at least three times to ensure thorough cleaning.
You may also choose a non-scrubbing action, wet-type cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt to clean the tape head. This type of cleaning cassette will not eject on its own. A non-scrubbing action cleaner may not cleanas thoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner. The use of a non-scrubbing action, dry-type cleaning cassette is not recommended.
After you clean the player, press and hold the eject button for five seconds to reset the CLEAN PLAYER indicator. The radio wiiidispiay --- to snow the indicator was reset.
Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality may degrade over time.Always make sure the cassette tape is in good condition before you have your tape player serviced.
Care of Your CDs and DVDs
Handle discs carefully. Store them in their original cases or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight and dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution and clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.
Be sure never to touch the side without writing when handling discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge.
Care of Your CD and DVD Player
The use of CD lens cleaner discs is not advised, due to
the risk of zon:amina:ing the lens of the CE optics
with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.
Cleaning Your DVD Player
When cleaning the outside DVD cabinet face and buttons, use only a clean cloth dampened with clean water.
3-1 15
Cleaning the Video Screen
When cleaning the video screen, use only a clean cloth dampened with clean water. Use care when directly touching or cleaning the screen, as damage may result.
Integrated Windshield Antenna
The antenna in your vehicle is a very thin, metal layer in the windshield. If you look near the edges of the windshield, you can see the outline of the antenna. The connector is at the top of the windshield, where the headliner ends.
If you experience difficulty with remote transmitters, such as a garage door opener, try pointing the device through the very top of the windshield.
XM Satellite Radio Antenna System
Your XMTMSatellite Radio antenna is located on the roof of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of snow and ice build up for clear radio reception.
The performance of your XMTM system may be affected if your sunroof is open.
Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle can interfere with the performance of your XMTM system. Make sure that the XMTMsatellite antenna is not obstructed.
DAB Radio Antenna System
Your DAB antenna is located on the roof of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of snow and ice buila up for clear radio reception.
If your vehicle is purchased in Canada and driven into the United Stated the DAB radio antenna system will not function. DAB radio reception is available in Canada only.
The performance of your DAB system may be affected if your sunroof is open.
Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle can interfere with the performance of your DAB system. Make sure that the DAB antenna is not obstructed.
3-116
Section
Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving. the Road. and Your Vehicle ..........4-2
Driver Behavior .............................................. 4.2
DrivEinngvironment .......................
......4.2
Vehicle Design ............................................... 4.3
Defensive Driving ........................................... 4.3
Drunken Driving ............................................. 4-4
Control of a Vehicle ........................................4-7
Braking ......................................................... 4-7
Traction Control System (TCS) ....................... 4-11
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System ....................... 4-12
Steering ...................................................... 4-12
Off-Road Recovery ....................................... 4-15
Passing ...................................................... -4-15
Loss of Control ............................................. 4-16
Driving at Night ............................................ 4-18
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-19 City Driving ..................................................4.22
Freeway Driving .......................................... -4-23
Before Leaving on a Long Trip ....................... 4-24 Highway Hypnosis ........................................ 4.25
Hill and Mountain Roads ................................ 4-25
Winter Driving ......................
.............4-27
If YouAre Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ...................................... 4-32
Towing .......................................................... Towing Your Vehicle ..................................... Recreational Vehicle Towing .......................... Loading Your Vehicle .................................... Towing a Trailer ........................................
4.33 4-33 -4-33 4-34 4-36
4- 1
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle
Whenever we drive, we're taking on an important responsibility. This is true for any motor vehicle - passenger car, van, truck, sport utility. Driver behavior, the driving environment, and the vehicle's design all affect how well a vehicle performs. But statistics show that the most important factor, by far, is how we drive.
Knowing how these three factors work together can help you understand how your vehicle handles and what you can do to avoid many types of crashes, including a rollover crash.
Driver Behavior
The single most important thing is this: everyone in the
vehicle, including the driver, should buckle up. See Safety
Belts: They Are for Everyoneon page 1-22.In fact, most
serious injuries and fatalities to unbelted occupants can be reduced or prevented by the use of safety belts.In a
rollover crash, an unbelted personis significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat beInlt.addition, avoiding excessive speed, suddenor abrupt turns and drunken or aggressive driving can help make trips safer and avoid the possibility of a crash, especially a rollover crash. This section provides many useful tiptso help you drive more safely.
Driving Environment
You can also help avoid a rollover or other typeof crash by being prepared for driving in inclement weather, at night, or during other times where visibility or traction may be limited (such as on curves, slippery roads or hilly terrain). Unfamiliar surroundings can also have hidden hazards.
To help you learn more about driving in different conditions, this section contains information about city, freeway and off-road driving, as well as other hints for driving in various weather conditions.
4-2
Vehicle Design
According to the US. Department of Transportation, utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. Utility vehicles do have higher ground clearance and a narrower track or shorter wheelbase than passenger cars, to make them more capable for off-road driving. Specific design characteristics like these give the driver a better view of the road, but also give utility vehicles a higher center of gravity than other types of vehicles. This means that you shouldn't expect a utility vehicle to handle the same way a vehicle with a lower center of gravity, like a car, would in similar situations.
13uf driver behavior factors are far more often. the cause
of a utility vehicle rollover than are environmental or vehicle factors. Safe driver behavior and understanding the environment in which you'll be driving can help avoid a rollover crash in any type of vehicle, including utility vehicles.
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is: Drive defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in your vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone on page 1-22.
Defensive driving really means "be ready for anything." On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means "always expect the unexpected."
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they might do. Be ready for their mistakes.
Fear-ende-oiiisiorisare aboit the most piedentabis of
accidents. Yetthey are common. Allowenough following distance. It's the best defensive driving maneuver, in both city and rural driving. You never know whenthe vehicle in front of you is going tobrake or turn suddenly.
Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on the driving task. Anvthing that distracts from the driving task - such as concentrating on a cellular telephone call, reading, or reaching for something on the floor - makes proper defensive driving more difficult and can even cause a collision, with resulting injury. Ask a passenger to help do things like this, or pull off the road in a safe place to dothem yourself. These simple defensive driving techniques could save your life.
4-3
Drunken Driving
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is a national tragedy. It's the number one contributor to the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims every year.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a vehicle:
Judgment
Muscular Coordination
Vision
Attentiveness.
Police records show that almost half of all motor vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases, these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking and driving. In recent years, more than 16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been associated with the use of alcohol, with more than 300,000 people injured.
Many adults - by some estimates, nearly half the adult population - choose never to drink alcohol, so they never drive after drinking. For persons under 21, it's against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical, psychological and developmental reasons for these laws.
4-4
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then drive. But what if people do? How much is "too much" if someone plans to drive? It's a lot less than many might think. Although it depends on each person and situation, here is some general information on the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone who is drinking depends upon four things:
The amount of alcohol consumed
The drinker's bodyweight
0 The amount of food that is consumed before and during drinking
The length of time it has taken the drinker to consume the alcohol.
According to the American Medical Association, a 180 Ib (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce (355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glasses of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1 - 1/2 ounces (45 ml) of a liquor like whiskey, gin or vodka.
It's the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces or 90 mI of liquor each) within an hour, the person's BAG would be close to 0.12 percent. A person who consumes food just before or during drinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level.
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally have a lower relative percentage of body water than men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, this means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC level than a man of her same body weight when each has the same number of drinks.
The law in an increasing number of U S . states, and throughout Canada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. In some other countries, the limit is even lower. For example, it is 0.05 percent in both France and Germany. The BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United States is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we've seen, it depends on how much aiconoi is in the drinks, and how quickly the person drinks them.
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC
of 0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills
of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All
&+:ers
@I`:& t' EA.c. !p\.!p!s zhQ\!p Q-nE; percent.
Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision
increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC
of 0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level
of 0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having
a collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance
0: this driver having a collisim is 12 times grezter;
at a level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times
greater!
4-5
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold showers will speed that up. "1'11 be careful" isn't the right answer. What if there's an emergency, a need to take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street? A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able to react quickly enough to avoid the collision.
There's something else about drinking and driving that many people don't know. Medical research shows that alcohol in a person's system can make crash injuries worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord or heart. This means that when anyone who has been drinking - driver or passenger - is in a crash, that person's chance of being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the person had not been drinking.
Drinking and then drivingis very dangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness and judgement can be affected byeven a small amount of alcohol. You can have a serious-or even fatal-collision if you drive after drinking. Please don't drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if you're with a group, designate a driver who will not drink.
4-6
Control of a Vehicle
You have three systems thamt ake your vehicle go where you want it to go. They atrhee brakes, the steering and the accelerator.All three systems have to do their work at the places where thetires meet the road.
Braking
Braking action involves perception time and reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal. That's perception time. Then you have to bring up your foot and do it. That's reaction time.
Average reaction time is about 3/4of a second. But
that's only an average. It might be less with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs and frustration. But even in 3/4 of a second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (I00 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). That
couid be a lot of distance in an eme:~ency, SG keepkg enough space between your vehicle and others is
important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly with the surface of the road (whether it's pavement or gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied.
Sometimes, as when you're driving on snow or ice, it's
easy to ask more of those control systems than the
ruau , can ,,," a1 Iu +:.-A,.
nnrl
lllG3
n-rl
mqn
buI I
nrnlrirln
plw v t u b .
That ,,~
Lm nua,n,vc
~'OU
!QS~
control of your vehicle. Also see Traction Control System
(TCS) on page4-11.
4-7
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in spurts - heavy acceleration followed by heavy braking - rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace with the traffic and allow realistic following distances, you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. That means better braking and longer brake life.
If your engine ever stops while you're driving, brake normally but don't pump your brakes. If you do, the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine stops, you will still have some power brake assist. But you will use it when you brake. Once the power assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal will be harder to push.
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle may have anti-lock brakes. ABS is an advanced electronic braking system that will help prevent a braking skid.
ANTILOCK
United States
I
Canada
If your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, this warning light or1 the instrument panel will come on briefly when you start your vehicle.
When you start your engine, or when you beginto drive away, your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You may hear a momentary motoror clicking noise while this test is going on, and you may even notice that your brake pedal moves or pulses a little. This is normal.
4-8
Let's say the road is wet and you're driving safely. Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam on the brakes and continue braking. Here's what happens with ABS: A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer will separately work the brakes at each wheel. The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure faster than any driver could. The computer is programmed to make the most of available tire and road conditions. This can help you steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
4-9
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates on wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly.
Remember: Anti-lock doesn't change the time you need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in front of you, you won't have time to apply your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even though you have anti-lock brakes.
4-10
Using Anti-Lock
Don't pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel a slight brake pedal pulsation or notice some noise, but this is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
At some time, nearly every driver gets into a situation that requires hard braking.
If you have anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the same time. However, if you don't have anti-lock, your first reaction - to hit the brake pedal hard and hold it down - may be the wrong thing to do. Your wheels can stop rolling. Once they do, the vehicle can't respond to your steering. Momentum will carry it in whatever direction it was headed when the wheels stopped rolling. That could be off the road, into the very thing you were trying to avoid, or into traffic.
If you don't have anti-lock, use a "squeeze" braking technique. This will give you maximum braking while maintaining steering control. You can do this by pushing on the brake pedal with steadily increasing pressure.
In an emergency, you will probably want to squeeze the brakes hard without locking the wheels. If you hear or feel the wheels sliding, ease off the brake pedal. This will help you retain steering control. If you do have anti-lock, it's different. See "Anti-Lock Brakes."
In many emergencies, steering can help you more than even the very best braking.
Traction Control System (TCS)
Your vehicle may have a traction control system that limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery road conditions. The systemoperates only if it senses that one or both of the front wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction. When this happens, the system works the front brakes and reduces engine power to limit wheel spin.
The TRACTION ACTIVE message will come on when the traction control system is limiting wheel spin. See Traction Active Message on page 3-47. You may feel or hear the system working, but this is normal.
if your vehicie is in cruise coctrd when the tractior; control system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise control will automatically disengage. When road conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may reengage the cruise control. See "Cruise Control" under Turn SignaVMultifunction Lever on page 3-7.
SERVICE TRACTION
SYSTEM
United States
I
Canada
If this message comes on and stays on or comes on
while you are driving, there's a problem with your traction control system.
See Service Traction System Warning Message on page 3-47. When this warning message is on, the TRAC
OFF iignt wiii come on to remind you that the system
will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
The traction control system automatically comes on whenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery road conditions, you should always leave the system on. But you can turn the traction control system off if you ever need to. You should turn the system off if your vehicle ever gets stuck in sand, mud or snow and rocking the vehicle is required. See I f You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on page 4-32.
4-1 1
To turn the system off, press the TRAC OFF button located on the instrument panel switchbank.
If the system is limiting wheel spin when you press the button, the message will go off, but the system will not turn off until there is no longer a current need to limit wheel spin. The TRACOFF light will come on to remind you the system is off. You can turn the system backon at any time by pressing the button again. The traction control system warning message should go off.
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System
If your vehicle has all-wheel drive (AWD), the AWD system operates automatically without any action required by the driver. If the front drive wheels begin to slip, the rear wheels will automatically begin to drive the vehicle as required. There may be a slight engagement noise during hard use but this is normal.
During heavy AWD applications, the engine torque may be reduced to protect AWD system components. If the vehicle is exposed to extended heavy AWD usage, the AWD system will shut itself off to protect the system from overheating. When the system cools down, the AWD system will activate itself again automatically; this cool-down can take up to 20 minutes depending on outside temperature and vehicle use. See All-Wheel Drive Disable Warning Message on page 3-52.
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but it will take much more effort.
4-12
Steering Tips
Driving on Curves
It's important to take curves at areasonable speed.
A lot of the "driver lost control" accidents mentioned on the news happen on curves. Here's why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to the same laws of physics when driving on curves. The traction of the tires against the road surface makes it possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn the front wheels. If there's no traction, inertia will keep the vehicle going in the same direction. If you've ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you'll understand this.
The traction you can getin a curve depends on the condition of your tires andthe road surface, the angle at which the curve is banked, and your speed.While you're in a curve, speedis the one factoryou can control.
Suppose you're steeringthrough a sharp curve. Then you suddenly accelerate. Bothcontrol systems -steering
ana braking-nave io uo iileir w u ~ W k i-~eIeti-ic iires i77eet
the road. Unless you havefour-wheel anti-lock brakes, adding the hard braking can demand too much of those places. Youcan lose control.
The same thing can happen if you're steering through a sharp curve and you suddenly accelerate. Those two
control systems -steering and acceleration-can
overwhelm those places where the tires meet the road and make you lose control. See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4- 11.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on the brake or accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you want it to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds are based on good weather and road conditions. Under less favorable conditions you'll want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a curve, do it before! you enter the curve, while your front wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can "drive" through the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then accelerate gentiy into tne straigniaway.
4-1 3
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked cars and stops right in front of you. You can avoid these problems by braking - if you can stop in time. But sometimes you can't; there isn't room. That's the time for evasive action - steering around the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like these. First apply your brakes.
See Braking on page 4-7. It is better to remove as much
speed as you can from a possible collision. Then steer around the problem, to the left or right depending on the space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o'clock positions, you can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-1 4
Off-Road Recovery
You may find that your right wheels have dropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you're driving.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to ens-qnarter turn unti! the right front tire contacts the pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel to go straight down the roadway.
Passing
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a two-lane highway waits for just the right moment, accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the worst of all traffic accidents - the head-on collision.
Sc?here are scme tips for passing:
"Drive ahead." Look down the road, to the sides and to crossroads for situations that might affect your passing patterns. If you have any doubt whatsoever about making a successful pass, wait for a better time.
Watch for trattic signs, pavement markings ana lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass. A broken center line usually indicates it's all right to pass (providing the road ahead is clear). Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or a double solid line, even if the road seems empty of approaching traffic.
4-15
Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass while you're awaiting an opportunity. For one thing, following too closely reduces your area of vision, especially if you're following a larger vehicle. Also, you won't have adequate space if the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops. Keep back a reasonable distance.
When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up, start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and don't get too close. Time your move so you will be increasing speed as the time comes to move into the other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will have a "running start" that more than makes up for the distance you would lose by dropping back. And if something happens to cause you to cancel your pass, you need only slow down and drop back again and wait for another opportunity.
If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle, wait your turn. But take care that someone isn't trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulder and check the blind spot.
Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and start your left lane change signal before moving out of the right lane to pass. When you are far enough ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your inside mirror, activate your right lane change signal and move back into the right lane. (Remember that your right outside mirror is convex. The vehicle you just passed may seem to be farther away from you than it really is.)
e Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the next vehicle.
0 Don't overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly. Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it may be slowing down or starting to turn.
e If you're being passed, make it easy for the following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you can ease a little to the right.
Loss of Control
Let's review whatdriving experts say about what happens when the three control systems (brakes, steering and acceleration) don't have enoughfriction where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked.
In any emergency, don't give up. Keep trying to steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of less danger.
4-16
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle. Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable care suited to existing conditions, and by not "overdriving" those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle's three control systems. Inthe braking skid, your wheels aren't rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much speed orsteering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force. Andin the acceleration skid, too much throttle causesthe driving wheelsto spin.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.
If you have the Traction Control System, remember: It helps avoid only the acceleration skid. If you do not have this system, or if the system is off, then an acceleration skid is also best handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the accelerator pedal and qurckly steer the way you wani the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough, your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for a second skid if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice, gravel or other material is on the road. For safety, you'll want to slow down and adjust your driving to these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration or braking (including engine braking by shifting to a lower gear). Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning clues - such as enough water, ice or packed snow on the road to make a "mirrored surface" - and slow down when you nave any doubt.
If you have the anti-lock braking system, remember: It
helps avoid only the braking skid. If you do not have
anti-lock, then in a braking skid (where the wheels are
no longer rolling), release enough pressure on the
brakes to get the wheels rolling again. This restores
-+--Am-
alGGlllly
n~n+rrrl
bUllLlWl.
D.,.-h +hn hr.ll/n
1 UQII C I I U U I U , \ b
nn,-4ql
pevu,
UVllll
"c+."nu gduil",,J
when you have to stop suddenly. As long as the wheels
are rolling, you will have steering control.
4-1 7
Driving at Night
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving. One reason is that some drivers are likely to be impaired - by alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue.
4-1 8
Here are some tips on night driving.
Drive defensively.
Don't drink and drive.
Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the glare from headlamps behind you.
e Since you can't see as well, you may need to slow down and keep more space between you and other vehicles.
e Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your headlamps can light up only so much road ahead.
e In remote areas, watch for animals.
e If you're tired, pull off the road in a safe place and rest.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But as we get older these differences increase. A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice as much light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your night vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses.Your eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you're driving, don't wear sunglasses at night. They may cut down on glare from headlamps, but they also
make a lot of things invisible.
You can btemporarily blinded by approaching headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several seconds, for your eyes to re-adjust to the dark. When you are faced with severe glare (as from a driver who doesn't lower the high beams, or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid staring directly into the approaching headlamps.
Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle clean - inside and out. Glare at night is made much worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would, making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a roadway when you are in a ~ U Kor c m e . Keep your eyes moving; that way, it's easier to pick out dimly lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from night blindness - the inability to see in dim light - and aren't even aware of it.
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
.,- \ .
'
b
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
.3c \ A t a l l Fn-Pl
.,AI 1 nn-'t C t n m q n n A l A V q t 0 Ar +I
y u u I W U U ,
bull I QLWfJ, UUUCI,CIIC.IL"
"I ,ut,,u v " " V a l
because your tire-to-road traction isn't as good as on
dry roads. And, if your tires don't have much tread left,
you'll get even less traction. It's always wise to go
slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while you are
driving. The surface may get wet suddenly when your
refiexesare tuned for dri.ving dry- pa"p.iiieiit.
4-1 9
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy rain can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road and even people walking.
It's wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape and keep your windshield washer tank filled with washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts when they show signs of streaking or missing areas 011 the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to separate from the inserts.
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even going through some car washes can cause problems, too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid puddles. But if you can't, try to slow down before you hit them.
- - et - _lkes can cause accidents. They won't work as well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to one side. You could lose control of the vehicle. After driving through a large puddle of water or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly until your brakes work normally.
4-20
Hydroplaning
DI- gThroughFlowinW! ater
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up under your tires that they can actually ride on the water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and you're going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
Hydroplaning doesn't happen often. But it can if your tires do not have much tread or it the pressure in one or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is standing on the road. If you can see reflections from trees, telephone poles or other vehicles, and raindrops "dimple" the water's surface, there could be hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There just isn't a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
rvo.r.r~e;if 1.
y u u l u w yulr;nly x _ _ UIIVC
ueep I-I-fl-.AI- _ _ L -I_ ---._ _ I
LIII WUYII
puddles or standing water, water can come in
through your engine's air intake and badly damage
your engine. Never drive through water thatis
slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle. If
you can't avoid deep puddles or standingwater,
drive through them very slowly.
Flowiorrushingwatercreatesstrong forces.-If you try to drive through flowing water, as you might at a low water crossing, your vehicle can be carriedaway. As little as six inches of flowing water can carry away a smaller vehicle. If this happens, you and other vehicle occupants could drown. Don't ignore police warning signs, and otherwise be very eaLstioi;s a b w t trying to drive through f!owiling water.
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
.,-,. Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
..,L.-- - I ! - I
A - - l L--
U I ~ L ~ I IHLIIU~ .U G
e^a^_y^e^u:-a.llll.y.
--"-L..l
L a l t z ~ uV~V I IGII y u u
pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear
room ahead, and be prepared to have your
view restricted by road spray.
Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires
on page 5-55.
4-2 1
City Driving
4-22
One of the biggest problems with city streets is the amount of traffic on them. You'll want to watch out for what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to traffic signals.
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
Know the best way to get to where you are going. Get a city map and plan your trip into an unknown part of the city just as you would for a cross-country trip.
Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most large cities. You'll save time and energy. See the next part, "Freeway Driving."
0 Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic light is there because the corner is busy enough to need it. When a light turns green, and just before you start to move, check both ways for vehicles that have not cleared the intersection or may be running the red light.
Freeway Driving
Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways, expressways, turnpikes or supeinignwaysj are ihe safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules.
The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the same speed most of the other drivers are driving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to check traffic. Try to determine where you expect to blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often as necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed io the
posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it's slower. Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use your turn signal.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your silouider io rrlake sure iilere isn'i ariuii-lec vei-licit: i-1
your "blind" spot.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you allow a reasonable following distance. Expect to move slightly slower at night.
4-23
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do not, under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive on to the next exit.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply. The exit speed is usually posted.
Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not to your sense of motion. After driving for any distance at higher speeds, you may tend to think you are going slower than you actually are.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Make sure you're ready. Try to be well rested. If you must start when you're not fresh-such as after a day's work-don't plan to make too many miles that first part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing and shoes you can easily drive in.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it serviced and maintained, it's ready to go. If it needs service, have it done before starting out. Of course, you'll find experienced and able service experts in dealerships all across North America. They'll be ready and willing to help if you need it.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
Windshield Washer Fluid:Is the reservior full? Are all windows clean inside and outside?
Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked all levels?
Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the recommended pressure?
Weather Forecasts:What's the weather outlook along your route? Should you delay your trip a short time to avoid a major storm system?
Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
4-24
Highway Hypnosis
Is there actually such a condition as "highway hypnosis"? Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road with the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the wind against the vehiclethat can make you sleepy. Don't let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can leave
the road in less than a second, and you could crash and
be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be aware tnat it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a comfortably cool interior.
Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and to the sides. Check your mirrors and your instruments frequently.
If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest, service or parking area and take a nap, get some exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness on the highway as an emergency.
Hill and Mountain Roads
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from &j.".ji?Y ji? flat ro;;inY
4-25
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you're planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make your trips safer and more enjoyable.
0 Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system and transaxle. These parts can work hard on mountain roads.
Know how to go down hills. The most important thing to know is this: let your engine do some of the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go down a steep or long hill.
I I, ,ou don't ,,lift down, bUdr brakes could get so hot that they wouldn't work well. You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down to let your engine assist your brakeson a steep downhill slope.
I
Coastingdown- _ _ _
- -TR- _-(N) or witb le
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have
to do all the worokf slowing down. They could
get so hot that they wouldn't workwell. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Always
have your engine running and your vehicle in
gear when you go downhill.
e Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down to a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your engine and transaxle, and you can climb the hill better.
Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane roads in hills or mountains. Don't swing wide or cut across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that let you stay in your own lane.
4-26
0 As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There could be something in your lane, like a stalled car or an accident.
0 You may see highway signs on mountains that warn of special problems. Examples are long grades, passing'or no-passing zones, a falling rocks
area or winding roads. Be alert to these and take
appropriate action.
Winter Driving
Here are some tips for winter driving:
0 Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
You may want to put winter emergency supplies in your vehicle.
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red cloth and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And, if you will be driving under severe conditions, include a
small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet or a couple of
burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you properly secure these items in your vehicle.
4-27
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where your tires meet the road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You'll have a lot less traction or "grip" and will need to very careful.
What's the worst time for this? "Wet ice." Very cold snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice can be even more trouble because it may offer the least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it's about freezing (32°F; OOC) and freezing rain begins to fall. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there.
Whatever the condition - smooth ice, packed, blowing or loose snow - drive with caution.
If you have traction control, keep the system on. It will improve your ability to accelerate when driving on a
slippery road. But you can turn the traction system off if
your vehicle ever gets stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow. See If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on page 4-32. Even though your vehicle has a traction system, you'll want to slow down and adjust your driving to the road conditions. See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4- 11.
4-28
If you don't have a traction system, accelerate gently. Try not to break the gentle traction. If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface under the tires even more.
Unless you have the anti-lock braking system, you'll want to brake very gently, too. (If you do have anti-lock, see Braking on page 4-7. This system improves your vehicle's stability when you make a hard stop on a slippery road.) Whether you have the anti-lock braking system or not, you'll want to begin stopping sooner than you would on dry pavement. Without anti-lock brakes, if you feel your vehicle begin to slide, let up on the brakes a little. Push the brake pedal down steadily to get the most traction you can.
Remember, unless you have anti-lock, if you brake so hard that your wheels stop rolling, you'll just slide. Brake so your wheels always keep rolling and you can still steer.
0 Whatever your braking system, allow greater following distance on any slippery road.
0 Watch for slippery spots. The roadmight be fine until you hit a spot that's covered with iceO. n an otherwise clear road, ice patchems ay appear in shaded areas where the sun can't reach:around clumps of trees, behind buildings or underbridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve or anoverpass may remain icy whenthe surrounding roadsare clear. If you see a patchof ice ahead of you, brake
before you are on it. Try not io brake whiie you're
actually on the ice, and avoidsudden steering maneuvers.
4-29
If You're Caught in a Blizzard
Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor mats - anything you can wrap around yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
If you are stoppd by heavy snow, you could be in a serious situation. You should probably stay with your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near help and you can hike through the snow. Here are some things to do to summon help and keep yourself and your passengers safe:
Turn on your hazard flashers.
Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that you've been stopped by the snow.
4-30
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
Snow can trap exhaust gases,,,der your vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas to get inside.CO could overcome you and kill you. You can'stee it or smell it, so you might not knowit is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from around the base of your vehicle, especially any that is blocking your exhaust pipe. And check around again from time to time to be sure snow doesn't collect there.
Open a window just a little on the sidoef the vehicle that's away from the wind. This will help keep CO out.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps the battery charged. You will need a well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on with your headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine again and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To help keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until help comes.
4-31
If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will need to spin the wheels, but you don't want to spin your wheels too fast. The method known as "rocking" can help you get out when you're stuck, but you must use caution.
IIf you let you1 -res spin at ...~.s.peed, i - - . ~ y can explode, and you or others could be injured. And, the transaxle or other parts of the vehicle can overheat. That could cause an engine compartment fire or otherdamage. When you're stuck, spin the wheels as little as possible. Don't spin the wheels above35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the speedometer.
Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the wheels too fast while shifting your transaxle back and forth, you can destroy your transaxleS.ee "Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out."
For information about using tire chains on your vehicle, see Tire Chains on page 5-64.
Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will clear the area around your front wheels. If your vehicle has traction control, you should turn your traction control system off. See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-1 1. Then shift back and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear, spinning the wheels as little as possible. Release the accelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transaxle is in gear. By slowly spinning your wheels in the forward and reverse directions, you will cause a rocking motion that may free your vehicle. It that doesn't get you out after a few tries, you may need to be towed out. If you do need to be towed out, see "Towing Your Vehicle" following.
4-32
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if you need to have your disabled vehicle towed. See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-5.
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome), see "Recreational Vehicle Towing" following.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle - such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as "dinghy towing" (towing your
vehicle with all four wheels on the ground) and "dolly
towing" (towing your vehicle with two wheels on
the ground and two wheels up on a device know as
..... a "dolly").
I
vvltrl
iile
pfuper
p l r e v a ~ a i b3-1~-16~
~u
i~
i
-
l
-l
~
i
- ilXi ,ai?y
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See "Dinghy
Towing" and "Dolly Towing," following.
Here are some important things to consider before you do recreational vehicle towing:
- i/?rhat'sthe t e ~ ~ icia~pagcity of the fo\.~!jn3n\w-* h.i-n-I-lP'?.
Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer's recommendations.
e How far will you tow? Some vehicles have restrictions on how far and how long they can tow.
e Do you have the proper towing equipment? See your dealer or trailering professional for additional advice and equipment recommendations.
e Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as you would prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you'll want to make sure your vehicle is prepared to be towed. See Before Leaving on a Long Trip on page 4-24.
Dinghy Towing
Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with all of its
Wi!?W!S Or] the CJrQ!l!ld. !f )'QL! hE!\/e a t!Vn-iWhee!-dri\/e vehicle, it can be towed with two of its wheels on the ground. See "Dolly Towing" following. If you have an all-wheel-drive vehicle, it cannot be towed with any of its wheels on the ground. It can be towed with car carrier equipment.
Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle with all four wheels on the ground, or even with only two of its wheels on the ground, will damage drivetrain components. Don't tow an all-wheel-drive vehicle if any of its wheels will be on the ground.
4-33
Dolly Towing
If you have a two-wheel-drive vehicle, it can be towed with two of its wheels on the ground. To dolly tow your vehicle, do the following:
1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.
2. Put the vehicle in PARK (P).
3. Set the parking brake and then remove the key.
4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead position with a clamping device designed for towing.
5. Release the parking brake.
If you have an all-wheel-drive vehicle, it cannot be towed with any of its wheels on the ground. It can be towed with car carrier equipment.
Notice; Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle with all four wheels on the ground, or even with only two of its wheels on the ground, will damage drivetrain components. Don't tow an all-wheel-drive vehicle if any of its wheels will be on the ground.
Loading Your Vehicle
n n GAWFGRRATWR
RRI
I-=--
I
1
b- F--J
RIM
COTLIDRE PRESSURt
on
nn
BEE m N E R ' S MANUALFORADDITIONAL INFORMATlONr
I
The Certificationrrire label is found on the rear edge of the driver's door.
The label shows the size of your original tires and the inflation pressures needed to obtain the gross weight capacity of your vehicle. This is called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo.
4-34
The Certification/Tire label also tells you the maximum weights for the front andrear axles, called the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).To find out the actual loads on your front and rear axles, you need to go to a weigh station and weighyour vehicle. Your dealer can help you with this. Be sure to spread out your load equally on both sides of the centerline.
Never exceed theGVWR for your vehicle or the GAWR for either the front or rear axle.
Notice: Your warranty does not cover parts or components that fail because of overloading.
If you put things inside your vehicle - like suitcases, tools, packages, or anything else - they will go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crE-'-, they'll keep going.
Do not load , ~ u rvehicle an, .leavier than the GVWR, or either the maximumfront or rear GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, and it can changethe way your vehicle handles. These could cause you to lose control and crash. Also, overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle.
.i
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or in a crash.
Put things in the cargo area of your vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly. Never stack heavier things, like suitcases, inside the vehicle so that some of them are abovethe tops of the seats. Don't leave an unsecured child restraint in your vehicle. When you carry something inside the vehicle, secure it whenever you can. Don't leave a seat folded down unless you need to.
4-35
Automatic Level Control
On vehicles equipped with the automatic level control, the rear of the vehicle is automatically kept level as you load or unload your vehicle. However, you should still not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR.
If the key is in ACCESSORY, ON or when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active, you may hear the compressor operating when you load your vehicle or shortly after you start your vehicle, and periodically as the system self-adjusts. This is normal. See "Retained Accessory Power (RAP)'' under Ignition Positions on page 2-20.
The compressor should operate for brief periods of time. If the sound continues for an extended period of time (longer than one minute) or occurs many times within one trip, your vehicle needs service.
Using heavier suspension components to get added durability might not change your weight ratings. Ask your dealer to help you load your vehicle the right way.
T-ing a Trailer
If you don't use the correct equipment an-. drive properly, you can lose control when you pull a trailer. Forexample, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work well -- or even
at all. You and your passengers could be seriously injured. Pull a trailer only if you have followed all the steps inthis section. Ask your dealer for advice and information about towing a trailer with your vehicle.
Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage your vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered by your warranty.To pull a trailer correctly, follow the advice in this part, and see your dealer for important information about towing a trailer with your vehicle. Additional rear axle maintenance is required for a vehicle used to tow a traileSre. e "Scheduled Maintenance Services" in the Index.
4-36
Your vehicle can tow atrailer. To identify what the vehicle trailering capacity is for your vehicle, you should read the information in "Weight of the Trailer'' that appears later in this section. But trailering is different than just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means changes in handling, durability and fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment, and it has to be used properly.
That's the reason for this section. In it are many time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of these are important for your safety and that of your passengers. So please read this section carefully before you pull a trailer.
Load-pulling components such as the engine, transaxle, wheel assemblies and tires are forced to work harder against the drag of the added weight. The engine is required to operate at relatively higher speeds and under greater loads, generating extra heat. What's more, the trailer adds considerably to wind resistance, increasing the pulling requirements.
If You Do Decide To Puil A lraiier
If you do, here are some important points:
There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
~ ; y bc; x r n m nr
YUUI
warn
\vsnvm; I I
r\
1Ic~yma-l,I
nnt
llwL
nw InI1l y\1Iv
r \l
hn lGl
rn G
y w uI
li\,a
Irv\r
but also where you'll be driving. A good source for
this information can be state or provincial police.
Consider using a sway control if your trailer will weigh 2,000 Ibs. (900 kg) or less. You should always use a sway control if your trailer will weigh more than 2,000 Ibs. (900 kg). You can ask a hitch dealer about sway controls. e Don't tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles (800 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine, axle or other parts could be damaged. Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you tow a trailer, don't drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and don't make starts at full throttle. This helps your engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
0 Yo! can use TH!!?D (3) (nr, as you need to, a !ower
gear) when towing a trailer. Operating your vehicle in THIRD (3) when towing a trailer will minimize heat buildup and extend the life of your transaxle. Three important considerations have to do with weight: 0 the weight of the trailer, the weight of the trailer tongue and the weight on your vehicle's tires.
4-37
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It should never weigh more than 1,400 Ibs. (630 kg) with up to five occupants in the vehicle or more than 2,000 Ibs. (900 kg) with up to two occupants. If you have the optional trailer towing package, your vehicle can tow up to 2,900 Ibs. (1 300 kg) with up to five occupants or up to 3,500 Ibs. (1 575 kg) with up to two occupants. But even that can be too heavy.
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all important. And, it can also depend on any special equipment that you have on your vehicle.
You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or advice, or you can write us at:
Buick Customer Assistance Center P.O. Box 33136 Detroit, MI 48232-51 36
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre, 163-005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight to measure because it affects the total or gross weight of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in the vehicle. And if you will tow a trailer, you must add the tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle will be carrying that weight, too. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-34 for more information about your vehicle's maximum load capacity.
4-38
A
If you're using a weight-carrying or a weight-distributing hitch, the trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B). Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight for your vehicle. Atter you've ioaaea your iraiier, weiyil iile iraiier dhci then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper. If they aren't, you may be able to get them right simply by moving some items around in the trailer.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle's Tires
Be sure your vehicle's tires are inflated to the upper limit for cold tires. You'll find these numbers on the
Certificationflire Labelat the rear edge of the driver's
door, or see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-34. Then be sure you don't go over the GVW limit for your vehicle, including the weight of the trailer tongue.
Hitches
It's important to have the correct hitch equipment. Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are a few reasons why you'll need the right hitch. Here are some rules to follow:
e If you'!! be pu!!ing a trailer that, when loaded, will
weigh more than 2,000 Ibs. (900 kg), be sure to use a properly mounted, weight-carrying hitch and sway control of the proper size. This equipment is very important for proper vehicle loading and good handling when you're driving.
e Will you have to make any holes in the body of your vehicle when you install a trailer hitch?
If you do, then be sure to seal the holes later when you remove the hitch. If you don't seal them, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can get into your vehicle. See Engine Exhaust n ` Jnl l pnuQyn L,aL 9-31. Eifl 2nd L!'JZter can,
4-39
Safety Chains
You should always attach chains between your vehicle and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting the road if it becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the manufacturer's recommendation for attaching safety chains and do not attach them to the bumper. Always leave just enough slack so you can turn with your rig. Never allow safety chains to drag on the ground.
Trailer Brakes
If your trailer weighs more than 1,000 Ibs. (450 kg) loaded, then it needs its own brakes - and they must be adequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so you'll be able to install, adjust and maintain them properly.
Because your vehicle may have anti-lock brakes, do not try to tap into your vehicle's brake system. If you do, both brake systems won't work well, or at all.
Dri+g with a Trailer
.i you - .--ve a rear-mos-Andow open L..-1 you pull a trailer with your vehicle, carbon monoxide (CO) could come into your vehicle. You can't see or smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness or death. See "Engine Exhaust'' in the Index. To maximize your safety when towing a trailer:
Have your exhaust system inspected for leaks, and make necessary repairs before starting on your trip. Keep the rear-most windows closed. If exhaust does come into your vehicle through a windowin the rear or another opening, drive with your front, main heating or cooling system on and with the fan on any speed. This will bring fresh, outside air into your vehicle.Do not use the comfort control setting for maximum air because it only recirculates the air inside yourvehicle. See "Comfort Controls" in theIndex.
4-40
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience. Before setting out for the open road, you'll want to get
to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer. And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
Before you start, check the trailer hitch and platform (and attachments), safety chains, electrical connector, lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the brakes are working. This lets you check your electrical connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasiormlly to be swe :ha: :he load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer brakes are still working.
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as ~ O IwJ ould when driving your vehicle without a trailer. This can help you avoid situations that require heavy braking and sudden turns.
Passing
You'll need more passing distance up ahead when you're towing a trailer. And, because you're a good deal longer, you'll need to go much farther beyond the passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand. Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible, have someone guide you.
Making Turns
Nofice: Making very sharp turns while trailering could cause the trailer to come in contact with the vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid making very sharp turns while trailering.
When you're turning with a trailer, make wider turns
than normal. Do this so your trailer won't strike
soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle has to have extra wiring.
The arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever you signal a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other drivers you're about to turn, change lanes or stop.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind you are seeing your signal when they are not. It's important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still working.
Driving On Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start down a long or steep downgrade. If you don't shift down, you might have to use your brakes so much that they would get hot and no longer work well.
If you are towing a trailer that weighs more than 1,000 Ibs. (450 kg), drive in THIRD (3) instead of AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D) (or, as you need to, a lower gear). This will minimize heat build-up and extend the life of your transaxle.
Parking on Hills
m-m-
You really should not park your vehicle, with a
trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People can be injured, and both your vehicleand the trailer can be damaged.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here's how to do it:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don't shift into PARK (P) yet.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your parking brake, and then shift to PARK (P).
5. Release the regular brakes.
4-42
When You Are Ready to Leave After Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down while you: start your engine,
shift into a gear, and
releasetheparking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal. 3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks. 4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you're pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more on this. Things that are especially important in trailer operation are automatic transaxle fluid (don't overfill), engine oil, belts, cooling system and brake system. Each of these is covered in this manual, and the Index will help you find them quickly. If you're trailering, it's a good idea to review these sections before you start your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts are tight.
Trailer Wiring Harness
Your vehicle may have a trailer wiring harness located at the rear of your vehicle. To use the trailer wiring harness you need a converter kit. Contact your dealer for more information.
4-43
e
P P
Section 5 Service and Appearance Care
Service ............................................................ 5.3
Doing Your Own Service Work .........................5-4
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle .............................................. 5-4
Fuel ................................................................ 5.5 Gasoline Octane ............................................ 5.5 Gasoline Specifications .................................... 5.5 California Fuel ............................................... 5.6 Additives ...................................................... -5-6 Fuels in Foreign Countries ............................... 5.7 Filling Your Tank ............................................5-7 Fi!!Ing a Portab!e Fue! Container ...................... -5-9
Checking Things Under the Hood .................... 5-10
Hood Release .............................................. 5.11
Engine Compartment Overview ....................... 5.12
Engine Oil ................................................... 5.13
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................ 5.18
Automatic Transaxle Fluid .............................. 5.19
tngine Cooiani ............................................
r nn
J-LL
Radiator Pressure Cap .................................. 5.25
Engine Overheating ....................................... 5.25
Cooling System ............................................ 5.28
Power Steering Fluid ................................... -5-35 Windshield Washer Fluid ................................ 5-36 Brakes ........................................................ 5-37 Battery ........................................................5.40 Jump Starting ............................................... 5-41
All-Wheel Drive .............................................. 5-46
Bulb Replacement .......................................... 5-48 Halogen Bulbs .............................................. 5-48 Headlamps .................................................. 5-48
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and Parking Lamps .......................................... 5-50
Taillamps, TLlrn Signa!, and Stop!amps ............5-50 Taillamps and Back-up Lamps .......................5-51 Replacement Bulbs ....................................... 5-52
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5-53
Tires .............................................................. 5-55 Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................ 5-56 Check Tire Pressure System .......................... 5-56 Tire Inspection and Rotation ........................... 5-58 When It Is Time for New Tires .......................5-59 Buying New Tires ......................................... 5-60
5- 1
Section 5 Service and Appearance Care
Uniform Tire Quality Grading .......................... 5.61 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-62 Wheel Replacement .................................. 5.62 Tire Chains .................................................. 5.64 Accessory Inflator ......................................... 5.65 If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................ 5.66
Changing a Flat Tire ..................................... 5-67 Compact Spare Tire ...................................... 5-85
Appearance Care ............................................ 5-87
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .................5-87
Care of Safety Belts ...................................... 5-90
Weatherstrips ............................................... 5-90
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle ..............5-90
Sheet Metal Damage ..................................... 5-92
Finish Damage .............
..................... 5-92
Underbody Maintenance ................................ 5.92 Chemical Paint Spotting ................................. 5.93 GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ...........5.93
Vehicle Identification ...................................... 5-95 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ................. 5-95 Service Parts Identification Label ..................... 5-95
Electrical System ............................................ 5-96 Add-on Electrical Equipment .......................... 5-96 Headlamp Wiring .......................................... 5-96 Windshield Wiper Fuses ................................ 5.96 Power Windows and Other Power Options .......5-96 Fuses and Circuit Breakers ............................ 5-96
Capacities and Specifications ....................... 5-102
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ........5.104
5-2
Service
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to be happy with it. We hope you'll go to your dealer for all your service needs. You'll get genuine GM parts and GM-trained and supported service people.
We hope you'll want to keep your GM vehicle all GM. Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
5-3
Doing Your Own Service Work
If you want to do some of your own service work, you'll want to use the proper service manual. It tells you much more about how to service your vehicle than this manual can. To order the proper service manual, see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7-9.
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to do your own service work, see Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-83.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage and the date of any service work you perform. See Part E: Maintenance Record onpage 6-16.
You can be injured and your vehicle couldbe damaged if you try to do service work on a vehicle without knowing enough abouitt.
Be sure you have sufficient knowledge, experience, the proper replacement parts and tools before you attempat ny vehicle maintenance task. Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and other fasteners. "English" and "metric" fasteners can be easily confused. If you use the wrong fasteners, partscan later break or fall off. You could be hurt.
Adding Equipment to the Outsideof Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind noise and affect windshield washer performance. Check with your dealer before adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.
5-4
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the proper maintenance of your vehicle.
Gasoline Octane
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane of 87 or higher. If the octane is less than 87, you may get a heavy knocking noise when you drive. if this occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible. Otherwise, you might damage your engine. A little pinging noise when you accelerate or drive uphill is considered normal. This does not indicate a problem exists or that a higher-octane fuel is necessary. If you are using 87 octane or higher-octane fuel and hear heavy knocking, your engine needs service.
Gasoline Specifications
It is recommended that gasoline meet specifications which were developed by the American Automobile Manufacturers Association and endorsed by the Canadian Vehicle Manufacturers Association for better vehicle performance and engine protection. Gasoline meeting these specifications could provide improved driveability and emission control system performance compared to other gasoline.
In Canada, look for the "Auto Makers' Choice" label on the pump.
Canada Only
California Fuel
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission Standards (see the underhood emission control label), it is designed to operate on fuels that meet California specifications. If this fuel is not available in states adopting California emissions standards, your vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications, but emission control system performance may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on (see Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-42 ) and your vehicle may fail a smog-check test. If this occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for diagnosis. If it is determined that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used, repairs may not be covered by your warranty.
Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States are now required to contain additives that will help prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing your emission control system to work properly. You should not have to add anything to your
fuel. Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and ethanol, and reformulatedgasolines may be available in your area to contibute to clean air. General Motors recommends that you use these gasolines, particularly if they comply with the specifications described earlier.
Notice; Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that contains methanol. Don't use fuel containing methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel system and also damage the plastic and rubber parts. That damage wouldn't be covered under your warranty.
Some gasolines that are notreformulatedfor low emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienylmanganese tricarbonyl (MMT); askthe attendant where you buy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT. General Motors does not recommend the use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance of the emission control systemmay be affected. The malfunction indicatorlamp may turn on.If this occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for service.
5-6
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel wouldn't be covered by your warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or contact a major oil company that does business in the country where you'll be driving.
Filling Your Tank
The fuel cap is located on the driver's side of the vehicle.
-"~.~-~.":~- ~ . ' ~ <o,-'ae?h& i k x
. ..
While refueling, let the fuel cap hang by the tether as shown.
Fuel vapor is highl, ..-........-le. It bur..,
violently, and that can cause very badinjuries.
Don't smoke if you're near fuel or refueling
: your vehicle. Keep sparks, flames and smoking materials away fromfuel.
5-7
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly to the left (counterclockwise). The fuel cap has spring in it; if you let go of the cap too soon, it will spring back to the right.
When you put the fuel cap back on, turn it to the right (clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound. Make sure you fully install the cap. The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lampon page 3-42.
If you get fuel on yourself and then something ignites it, you could be badly burned. Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap too
The malfunction indicator lamp (SERVICE ENGINE SOON or CHECK ENGINE light) will come on if the fuel cap is not properly installed.
quickly. This spray can happen if your tankis
Notice: If you needa new fuelcap, be sure toget the
nearly full, and is more likely in hot weather.
right type. Your dealer can ogneet for you.If you get
Open the fuel cap slowly and wait for any "hiss" the wrong type,it may not fit properly. Thmisay
noise to stopT.hen unscrew the cap all twheay.
cause your malfunction indicator lamp to laignhdt may damage your fuel tank and emisssioynsstem.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Clean fuel from painted
See "Malfunction Indicator Lamp" in thInedex.
surfaces as soon as possible. See Cleaning the Outside
of Your Vehicle on page 5-90.
5-8
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
-
Never fill a portable fuel container 1 ile it is i n your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the container can ignite the gasoline vapor. You can be badly burned and your vehicle damaged if this occurs.To help avoid injury to you and others:
Dispense gasoline only into approved containers.
CAUTION: (Continued)
0 Donotfillacontainer ...1ile it is
:a
vehicle, in a vehicle's trunk, pickup bed or
on any surface other than the ground.
0 Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
Don't smoke while pumping gasoline.
5-9
Checking Things Under the Hood
An electric fan under the hood can start and injure you even when the engine is not running. Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan.
CAUTI
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel, oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others could be burned. Be careful not to drop I or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.
5-10
Hood Release
To open the hood:
1. Pull the hood release handle, located on the driver's side under the instrument panel.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle and slide the secondary hood release handle from left to right.
3. Lift the hood.
4. If your vehicle has a prop rod, place it in the slot on the underside of the hood.
Before closing the hood be sure that all of the filler caps are on properly, then let the hood down and close it firmly.
5-1 1
Engine Compartment Overview
When you lift the hood, you'll see these items:
5-12
A. UnderhoodFuseBlock B. Remote Positive (+) Terminal C. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir D. Automatic Transaxle Fluid Dipstick E. Brake Master Cylinder F. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir G. Battery H. Radiator Pressure Cap I. Engine Oil Fill Cap J. Engine Oil Dipstick K. Engine Air CleanedFilter L. Engine Coolant Reservoir
Engine Oil
LOW ENG OIL LEVEL
If the low engine oil level message appears on the instrument cluster, it means you need to check your engine oil level right away. For more information, see Low Engine Oil Level Message on page 3-50. You should check your engine oil level regularly; this is an added reminder.
5-13
Checking Engine Oil
It's a good idea to check your engine oil every time you get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick is located at the front of the engine compartment, near the center. The dipstick handle has a biight, yellow loop design for easy identification.
When to Add Engine Oil
See Engine Compartment Overview on page5-12 for more information on location. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to drain back into the oil pan. If you don't, the oil dipstick might not show the actual level. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.
5-14
If the oil is at or below the cross-hatched area at the tip of the dipstick, then you'll need to add at least one quart of oil. But you must use the right kind. This part explains what kind of oil to use. For engineoil crankcase capacity, see Capacities and Specifications on page 5-102.
Nofice: Don't add too much oil. If your engine has so much oil that the oil level gets above the cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating range, your engine could be damaged.
1
A
The engine oil fill cap is
7located iust behind the
I engine Ail dipstick.
L SAE 5W-30 `I
See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 5-12 for more information on location.
Be sure to iiii ii enough io pui the ievei somewhere in
the proper operating range in the cross-hatched area. Push the dipstick all the way back in when you're through.
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Oils recommended for your vehicle can be identified by looking for the starburst symbol.
This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API). Do not use
any oil which does not carry this starburst symbol.
If you choose to perform the engine oil change service yourself, be sure
the oil you use has
the starburst symbol on the front of the oil
cmtainer. If you have your
oil changed for you, be sure the oil put into your engine is American Petroleum Institute certified for gasoline engines.
You should also use the proper viscosity oil for vour vehicle, as shown in the viscosity chart.
5-15
RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY GRADE ENGINE OILS
HOT
WEATHER
- 7
'OF
"C
+ l o o - - . t38
+ 8 0 - -- + 2 7
+ 6 0 - - + 16
+40-- - t4
+20--- - I
O - - - - 18
LOOK FOR THIS SYMBOL
.I
1 - 1 1 ACCE1POTWAB-3L0E
SAE
I
\
I
COLD
WEATHER
v IF 5W-30 IS NOT -30 AVAILABLE RECOMMENDED
DO NOT USE SAE iOW-40, SAE 20W-50 OR ANY OTHER VISCOSITY GRADEOIL NOT RECOMMENDED
5-16
As in the chart shown previously, SAE 5W-30 is the only viscosity grade recommended for your vehicle. You should look for and use only oils which have the API Starburst symbol and which are also identified as SAE 5W-30. If you cannot find such SAE 5W-30 oils, you can use an SAE IOW-30 oil which has the API Starburst symbol, if it's going to be 0°F (-18°C) or above. Do not use other viscosity grade oils, such as SAE 1OW-40 or SAE 20W-50 under any conditions.
Notice: Use only engine oil with the American Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended oil can result in engine damage not covered by your warranty.
GM Goodwrench@oil meets all the requirements for your vehicle.
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the temperature falls below -20°F (-29"C), it is recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30 synthetic oil or an SAE OW-30 oil. Both will provide easier cold starting and better protection for your engine at extremely low temperatures.
Engine Oil Additives
Don't add anything to your oil. The recommended oils with the starburst symbol are all you will need for good performance and engine protection.
When to Change Engine Oil (GM Oil Life SystemTM)
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at which an oil change will be indicated can vary considerably. For the oil life system to work properly, you must reset the system every time the oil is changed.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is necessary. A change engine oil message will come on. Change your oil as soon as possible within the next two times you stop for fuel. It is possible that, if you are driving under the best conditions, the oil life system may not indicate that an oil change is necessary for over a year. However, your engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and at this time the system ,-ilubs e ilese ii iIs* ~i-l-,putui"cL ;i-le&c;ki-yluiui-ui;
regularly and keep it at the proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your
.wl.a.lL slact"lo.l.i.cl..v-c"chla+LnlLlgtA:eo. iRl iesmcehmarbgeerdt.o reset the oil life system
How to Reset the Change Engine Oil Message
The GM Oil Life SystemTMcalculates when to change your engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Anytime your oil is changed, reset the system so it can calculate when the next oil change is required. If a situation occurs where you change your oil prior to a being turned on, reset the system.
If your vehicle does not have the optional Driver Information Center (DIC), do the following:
1. With the ignition key in ON but the engine off, fully push and release the acelerator pedal slowly three times within five seconds.
2. Turn the key C I !OFF.
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message comes back on, the engine oil life monitor has not reset. Repeat the procedure.
If your vehicle has the optional DIC, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition to ON with the engine off.
2. Press ine iviGZIE buiion uniii ine EiZ reaas G i i LIFE LEFT/HOLD SET TO RESET.
3. Press and hold the SET button until 100% is displayed. You will hear three chimes and the CHANGE
ENGINE OIL message wi!! go off- If the CHANGE
ENGINE OIL message comes back on, the monitor has not reset. Repeat the procedure.
5-17
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer. Don't let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer's
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have a problem properly disposing of your used oil, ask your dealer, a service station or a local recycling center for help.
Engine Air Cleanedfilter
The engine air cleaner/filter is located at the front of the engine compartment, on the driver's side of the vehicle, under the engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-72 for more information on location.
Checking or Replacing the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
1. Remove the two clamps on the duct. 2. Remove the duct. 3 . Unlatch the two hooks on top of the engine air
cleanedfilter housing. 4. Remove and replace the engine air cleanedfilter.
5-18
5. Align the tabs located on the bottom of the panel with the slots at the bottom of the housing.
6. Latch the hooks to secure the panel in place. If the panel moves easily, check that the tabs are seated correctly in the slots.
7. Put the duct back on and reinstall the clamps.
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter off can cause you or others to be burnedT.he air cleaner not only cleans the air, it stops flame if the errgine backfires. If it isrr't there and the engine backfires, you could be burned. Don't drive with it off, and be careful working on the engine with the air cleanerlfilteor ff.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can easily get into yourengine, which will damage it. Always have the air cleanedfilterin place when you're driving.
Automatic Transaxle Fluid
When to Check and Change
A good time to check your automatic transaxle fluid level is when the engine oil is changed.
Change both the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions:
In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
In hilly or mountainous terrain.
* When doing frequent trailer towing.
Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the fluid and filter at 100,000 miles (166 000 km).
See Part A - .5chedIlled Maintenance .5ervices nn
page 6-4.
5-19
How to Check
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may choose to have this done at the dealership service department.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage your transaxle. Too much can mean that some of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine or exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Too little fluid could cause the transaxle to overheat. Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check your transaxle fluid.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transaxle fluid level if you have been driving:
When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).
At high speed for quite a while.
0 In heavy traffic - especially in hot weather
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal operating temperature, which is 180°F to 200°F (82°C to 93°C).
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles (24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50°F (10°C). If it's colder than 50°F (IOOC), you may have to drive longer.
5-20
Checking the Fluid Level
Prepare your vehicle as follows:
0 Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine running.
0 With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever in PARK (P).
0 With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift lever through each gear range, pausing for about three seconds in each range. Then, position the shift lever in PARK (P).
0 Let the engine run at idle for three to five minutes.
I hen, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:
The dipstick is located toward the back of the engine compartment, next to the brake master cylinder.
The dipstick handle is a bright red loop. See Engine Compartment Overview on page5-12 for more information on location.
1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and then pull it back out again.
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower level. The fluid level must be in the cross-hatched area.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the dipstick back in all the way.
How to Add Fluid
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of transaxle fluid to use. See Part D: Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 6-15.
If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper fluid to bring the level into the cross-hatched area on the dipstick.
1. Pull out the dipstick.
2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid at the dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level.
It doesn't take much fluid, generally less than one pint (0.5 L). Don't ovedill.
Nofice: tiie recommend you use oniy iiuid iabeieci DEXRON@111, because fluid with that label is made especially for your automatic transmission. Damage caused by fluid other than DEXRON@ 111 is not covered by your new vehicle warranty.
3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as described under "How to Check."
4. When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the dipstick back in all the way.
5-2 1
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with DEX-COOL@engine coolant. This coolant is designed to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles (240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only DEX-COOL@extended life coolant.
The following explains your cooling system and how to add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem with engine overheating, see Engine Overheating on page 5-25.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL@coolant will:
Give freezing protection down to -34°F (-37°C).
Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
Protect against rust and corrosion.
Help keep the proper engine temperature.
Let the warning messages and gages work as they should.
Notice: When adding coolant, it is important that you use onlyDEX-COOL@(silicate-free) coolant. If coolant other thanDEX-COOL is added to the system, prematureengine, heater core or radiator corrosionmay result. In addition, the engine
-- coolant will require change soonerat 30,000 miles
(50,000 km) or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Damage caused by the use of coolant other than DEX-COOL@is not covered by younr ew vehicle warranty.
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and one-half DEX-COOL@ coolant which won't damage aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you don't need to add anything else.
5-22
Checking Coolant
Adding OL,,, plain water tG yvurcvv,...g system can be dangerous. Plain watero, r some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the proper coolantmixture will. Your vehicle's coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture.With plain water or the wrong mixture, yourengine could get too hot but you wouldn't get the overheat warning. Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL@coolant.
Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture, your engine could overheat and be badly damaged. The repair cost wouldn't be covered by your warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heatercore and other parts.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year, have your dealer check your cooling system.
!YC!tice: !f you use the praper cao!an?,you don'? have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim to improve the system. These can be harmful.
The engine coolant reservoir is located on the driver's side of the vehicle, above the engine air cleaner/filter.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12
fer zcre IR:fcrmaticR F,!cc2,ticx?.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your engine is cold, the coolant level should be at the FULL COLD mark, or a little higher. When your engine is warm, the level should be above the FULL COLD mark or a !itt!e higher.
5-23
Adding Coolant
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL@
coolant
at the coolarnefcovetraynk.
Turning .,rerad,,,orpress,,e
cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam
and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you
badly. With the coolant recovery tank, youwill
almost never have to add coolanat t the
radiator. Never turn the radiator pressure
-- -- cap even a little when the engine and
radiator are hot.
7 A can _ _ -Jrned IOU spillcoolantonhot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol, and it will burn if the engine partsare hot enough. Don't spill coolant on a hot engine.
I
Occasionally check the coolant level in the radiator. For information on how to add coolant to the radiator,
see Cooling System on page 5-28.
Add coolant mixture at the recovery tank, but be careful not to spill it.
5-24
Radiator Pressure Cap
Notice: Your radiator cap is a pressure-type cap and must be tightly installed to prevent coolant loss and possible engine damage from overheating. Be sure the arrows on the cap line up with the overflow tube on the radiator filler neck.
The radiator pressure cap is located at the front of the engine compartment on the passenger's side of the vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-72 for more information on location.
Engine Overheating
You wiii find an engine csoiant temperaiure gage on
your vehicle's instrument panel. See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage on page 3-42. You also have an engine coolant temperature warning message on your instrument panel. See Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Message on page 3-48.
Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode
This emergency operating mode allows your vehicle to be driven to a safe place in an emergency situation. If an overheated engine condition exists, an overheat protection mode which alternates firing groups of cylinders helps prevent engine damage. In this mode, you will notice a significant loss in power and engine performance. The temperature gage will indicate an overheat condition exists. Driving extended miles (km) and/or towing a trailer in the overheat protection mode should be avoided.
Notice: After driving in the overheated engine prsieetisn operating mode, to avoid engine damage, allow the engine to cool before attempting any repair. The engine oil will be severely degraded. Repair the cause of coolantloss, change the oil and reset the oil life system. See "Engine Oil" in the Index.
5-25
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
e-,ryone away fr-..] the vehicl- _ _ _ _ i l it cools
down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or coolant before you open the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine is overheated, the liquids init can catch fire. You or others could be badly burned. Stop your engine if it overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the engine is cool.
See "Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode" in the Index for information on driving to a safe place inan emergency.
Steam from an overheated engine can burn you badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away from the engine if yousee or hear steam coming from it. Just turn it off and get
CAUTION: (Continued)
Notice: If your engine catches fire because you keep driving with no coolant, your vehiclcean be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be covered by your warranty. See "Overheated Engine Protection OperatingMode" in the Index for information on driving to a safe place ainn emergency.
5-26
If No Steam Is Coming From Your
Engine
If you get an engine overheat warning but see or hear no steam, the problem may not be too serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you:
Climb a long hill on a hot day.
Stopafter high-speed driving.
Idle for long periods in traffic.
Tow a trailer.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam, try this for a minute or so:
1. If your air conditioner is on, turn it off.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan speed and open the window as necessary.
3. If you're in a traffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N); otherwise, shift to the highest gear while
driving - AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D).
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes. If the warning doesn't come back on, you can drive normally.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your vehicle right away.
If there's still no sign of steam, idle the engine for three minutes while you're parked. If you still have the warning, turn off the engine and get everyone out of the vehicle until it cools down. Also, see "Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode" listed previously in this section.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service help right away.
5-27
Cooling System
When you decide it's safe to lift the hood, here's what you'll see:
A. Radiator Pressure Cap B. Electric Engine Cooling Fans C. Coolant Recovery Tank
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can start up even when the engine is not running and can injure you. Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan.
If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling, don't do anything else until it cools down. The vehicle should be parked on a level surface.
5-28
The coolant level should be at or above the FULL COLD mark. If it isn't, you may have laeak at the pressure cap or in the radiator hoses,heater hoses, radiator, water pump or somewhere elsein the cooling SI .?m.
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Don't touch them. If you
do, you can be burned.
I
I CAIJTioN:
(c:
ontinuedj
Do run the engine i lere is a leak. If you run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could cause an engine fire, and you could be burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle. I
If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check to see if the electric engine cooling fans are running. If the engine is overheating, both fans should be running. If they aren't, your vehicle needs service.
Nctke: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant isn't covered by your warranty. See "Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode" in the Index for information on driving to a safe place in an emergency.
Notice: When adding coolant, it is important that vou use onlvDEX-COOL@(silicate-free) coolant. if coolant other thanDEX-COOL is added to the system, premature engine, heater core or radiator corrosion may result.In addition, the engine
coolant will require change soon-er at 30,000miles
(50 000 km) or 24 months, whichever occurs first.
Damage caused by the use of coolant other than DEX-COOL@is not covered by your new vehicle
warranty.
5-29
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant Recovery Tank
If you haven't found a problem yet, but the coolant level isn't at or above the FULL COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL@ engine coolant at the coolant recovery tank. See Engine Coolant on page 5-22 for more information.
Adding on11 .llainwater to urcot 1g
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid suchas alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant mixture will. Your vehicle's coolant warning systemis set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot but you wouldn't get the overheat warning. Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX COOL@coolant.
I
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts. Use the recommended coolant and the proper coolant mixture.
5-30
You can be Durned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn ifthe engine parts are hot enough. Don't spill coolant on a hot engine.
I
When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at or above the FULL COLD mark, start your vehicle. If the overheat warning continues, there's one more thing you can try. You can add the proper coolant mixture directly to the radiator, but be sure the cooling system is cool before you do it.
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling system can blow out and burn you badly. They are under pressure, and if you turn the radiator
-- pressure cap -- even ii little they cait come
out at highspeed. Never turn the cap when the cooling system, including the radiator pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and radiator pressure cap tocool if you ever have to turn the pressure cap.
5-31
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator
Notice: Your engine has a specific radiator fill procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could cause your engine to overheat and be severely damaged.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap, but now push down as you turn it. Remove the pressure cap.
1. You can remove the radiator pressure cap when the cooling system, including the radiator pressure cap and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise until it first stops. (Don't press down while turning the pressure cap.)
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss means there is still some pressure left.
5-32
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine partsare hot enough. Don't spill coolant on a hot engine.
Housing
Bypass Tube
3. After the engine cools, open the coolant air bleed valves.
There are two bleed valves. One is located on the
thermostat housing. The other is located on the thermostat bypass tube.
4. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX-COOL@ coolant mixture, up to the base of the filler neck. See Engine Coolanton page 5-22for more information about the proper coolant mixture.
If you see a stream of coolant coming from an air bleed valve, close the valve. Otherwise, close the valves after the radiator is tilled.
5. Rinse or wipe any spilled coolant from the engine and the compartment.
5-33
6. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the engine cooling fans.
7. By this time, the coolant level inside the radiator filler neck may be lower. If the level is lower, add more of the proper DEX-COOL@coolant mixture through the filler neck until the level reaches the base of the filler neck.
8. Then replace the pressure cap. At any time during this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap. Be sure the arrows on the pressure cap line up like this.
5-34
A
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected and repaired. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-72for reservoir location.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
Turn the key off, let the engine compartment cool down, wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean, then unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag. Replace the cap and completely tighten it. Then remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on the dipstick.
When the engine compartment is hot, the level should be at the H (hot) mark. When it's cold, the level should be at the C (cold) mark. If the fluid is at the ADD mark, you should add fluid.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see Part D: Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 6-15. Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read the manufacturer's instructions before use. If you will be operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient protection against freezing. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for reservoir location.
Adding Washer Fluid
Open the cap with the washer symbol on it. Add washer fluid until the tank is full.
5-36
Notice:
When using concentrated washer fluid, follow the manufacturer's instructions for adding water.
Don't mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze and damage your washerfluid tank and other parts of the washer system.Also, water doesn't clean as well as washer fluid.
0 Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quarters full when it's very cold. This allows for expansion if freezing occurs, which could damage the tank if it is completely full.
0 Dan'!: use engine c ~ d a n(tantifreeze) In your windshield washer. It can damage your washer system and paint.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
--
DOT3 7
Your brake master cylinder reservoir is filled with DOT-3
brake fluid. See Engine Compartment Overview on
" nrjnn E - f 3 f n r thn I n n o t i n n n f thn rnc-An,n;r
yUY"
I L I",
L I I U l V V U I l V C I V I ,I ,e I U . J b I " " I , .
5-37
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid level goes back up. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you should have your brake system fixed since a leak means that sooner or later your brakes won't work well, or won't work at all.
So, it isn't a good idea to "top off' your brake fluid. Adding brake fluid won't correct a leak. If you add fluid when your linings are worn, then you'll have too much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should add (or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
I
If you have too much brake fluidit, can spill on the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is hot enough. You or others could be burned, and your vehicle could bedamaged. Add brake fluid only when workis done on the brake hydraulic system. See "Checking Brake Fluid" in this section.
BRAKE
I
States United
I
I
Canada
When your brake fluid falls to a low level, your brake warning light will come on. See Brake System Warning Light on page3-40.
5-38
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container only. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-15. Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area around the cap before removing it. This will help keep dirt from entering the reservoir.
I ..dh the wron9 ,,,,d c , , h i d in your brake system, your brakes may not work well, or they may noteven work at all. This could cause a crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
ffotice:
Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
system parts. For example, just a few drops of
mineral-based oil, suchas engine oil, in your brake system can damage brake system parts so badly that they'ii have to be replaced. Don't let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.
If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle's painted surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be careful not to spill brake fluidon your vehicle. If you do, wash it off immediately. See "Appearance Care'' in the Index.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes. Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads are needed. The sound
may come and go or be heard all the time your I I- !:le ~~
is moving (except when you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly).
The brake wear warning sound means that soon your brakes won't workwell. That could lead to an accident.When you hear the brake wear warning sound, have your vehicle serviced.
5-39
Notice: .,Continuing to drive with worn-out brake pads could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied. This does not mean something is wrong with your brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in the proper sequence to GM torque specifications.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete axle sets.
See Brake System Inspection on page 6-14.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you apply the brakes, with or without the vehicle moving, your brakes adjust for wear.
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many parts have to be of top quality and work well together if the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality GM
5-40
brake parts. When you replace parts of your braking system - for example, when your brake linings wear down and you need new ones put in - be sure you get new approved GM replacement parts. If you don't, your brakes may no longer work properly. For example, if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle, the balance between your front and rear brakes can change - for the worse. The braking performance you've come to expect can change in many other ways if someone puts in the wrong replacement brake parts.
Battery
Your new vehicle comes with a maintenance free ACDelco@battery. When it's time for a new battery, get one that has the replacement number shown on the original battery's label. We recommend an ACDelco@ battery. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for battery location.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling.
Vehicle Storage
If you're not going to drive yourvehicle for 25 days or more, remove the black, negative (-) cable from the battery. This will help keep your battery from running down.
Jump Starting
If your battery has run down, you may want to use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your vehicle. Be sure to follow the steps below to do it safely.
rBatteries have acid that can burn you and gas that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you aren't careful. See "Jump Starting" in the Index for tips on working around a battery without getting hurt.
Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your vehicle for longer storage periods. Also, for your audio system, see Theft-Deterrent Feature on page3-112.
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous because:
They contain acid that can burn you. They contain gas that can explode or ignite. They contain enough electricity to burn you. If you don't follow these steps exactly, some or all of these things can hurt you.
- ---.--- --.--- --- in ~ ~ s t ! \ / I V d i r m . !3 n" n" n" ri' n3 n thncn d o nr-e rnclIIt t v w l l r l --- ---- -a- I
damage to your vehicle that wouldn't be covered by your warranty. Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pullinitg won't work, and it could damage your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt battery with a negative ground system.
5-41
Notice: If the other system isn't a 12-volt system with a negative ground, both vehicles can be damaged.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles aren't touching each other. If they are, it could cause a ground connection you don't want. You wouldn't be able to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding could damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in the jump starting procedure. Put an automatic transaxle in PARK (P) or a manualtransaxle in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.
Notice: If you leave your radio on, it could be badly damaged. The repairs wouldn't be covered by your warranty.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette lighter or in the accessory power outlet(s). Turn off the radios and all lamps that aren't needed. This will avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And it could save your radio!
4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find the positive (+) and negative (-) terminals on each vehicle.
You will not need to access your battery for jump starting. Your vehicle has a remote positive (+) jump starting terminal for that purpose. The terminal is located under a tethered cap at the front of the underhood fuse and relay center. See Engine Compartment Overview on page5-12 for more information on location.
Flip the cap up to access the remote positive(+) terminal. You should always use the remote positive (+) terminal instead of the positive (+)
minal on the battery.
An electric fan canstartupevenwhen
!
engine is not running and can injure you. Keep
hands, clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
I
5-42
Usingama.-.i near arycancausebattery gas to explode. People have beenhurt doing this, and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enoughwater. You don't need to add water to the ACDelco@ battery installed in your new vehicle. Butif a battery has fillercaps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there. If it is low, add water to take care of that first.If you don't, explosive gas could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you. Don't get it on you. If you accidentally get it in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with water and get medical help immediately.
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts once the engineis running.
5. Check that the jumper cables don't have loose or missing insulation. If they do, you could get a shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to positive (+j or to a remote positive (+) terminai if the vehicle has one. Negative (-) will go to a heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote negative (-) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Don't connect positive (+) to negative (-) or you'll
get a short that would damage the battery and
+-- I U Y U ~ m n s r h r r n + h n w
I I
W L I IGI
nmw+-
A-A
~ U ~ I 3L W W . n l IU
A,-.-,+ ------a UWI I L ~ UII IICLL
*I--
LI IC;
negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the dead battery. Use a remote
- nrn--.c**iti\m (+>termins! if the \I&!&
has =ne.
5-43
5-44
7. Don't let the other end touch metal. Connect it to the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Don't let the other end touch anything until the next step. The other end of the negative (-) cable doesn't go to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote negative (-) terminal on the vehicle with the dead battery.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (-) cable at least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery, but not near engine parts that move. The electrical connection is just as good there, and the chance of sparks getting back to the battery is much less.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery. If it won't start after a few tries, it probably needs service.
Notice: Damage to your vehicle may result from electrical shortingif jumper cables are removed incorrectly. To prevent electrical shorting, take care that the cables don't touch each other or any other metal. The repairs wouldn't be covered by your warranty.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (-) cable from the vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (-) cable from the vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other vehicle.
5. Return the remote positive (+) terminal cover to its original position.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote Negative (-) Terminal
13. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote Negative (-) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
5-45
All-Wheel Drive
If you have an all-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure to perform the lubricant checks described in this section. However, they have two additional systems that need lubrication.
Transfer Case (Power Transfer Unit)
When to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the lubricant. See Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections on page6-13.
How to Check Lubricant
5-46
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a level surface.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole, you'll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use. See Part Dr Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page6-15.
Carrier Assembly-Differential (Rear Drive Module)
When to Check and Change Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the lubricant and when to change it. See Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services on page 6-4.
How to Check Lubricant
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole, you'll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole. A fluid loss could indicate a problem; check and have it repaired, if needed.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-15.
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
ievei surface.
5-47
Bulb Replacement
For the type of bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on
page 5-52. For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this section, contact your dealer.
Halogen Bulbs
Headlamps
1. Open the hood.
2. Push in on the headlamp panel and lift up the headlamp retaining clip partway, but do not remove.
Haloger. --..x have press-. .zed gas inside
and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or others could be injured. Be sure to read and follow the instructions on the bulb package.
3. Undo the wing stud on the upper, outboard side of the lamp assembly.
4. Unsnap the headlamp assembly by pulling it forward, away from the vehicle.
5. Disconnect the electrical connector by pulling back on the locking tab, located on the electrical connector, to separate the two connectors.
5-48
6. Turn the bulb socket one-quarter of a turn clockwise.
7. Pull the bulb assembly out from the lamp housing.
8. Unhook the electrical connector by lifting up the gray tabs and separate the connector from the bulb base.
9. Install the new bulb into the electrical connector. Push the bulb firmly enough so that the gray tabs hook over the tab on the bulb.
5-49
10. Put the bulb assembly back into the lamp housing and turn the bulb socket one-quarter of a turn counterclockwise.
11. Align the retaining clips on the back of the headlamp with the rectangular holes in the mounting panel.
12. Push firmly on both ends of the headlamp to snap it into position.
13. Push the retaining clip down to its original position.
14. Reinstall the wing stud.
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and Parking Lamps
To replace the front turn signal, parking or sidemarker lamp bulbs, follow the headlamp bulb replacement procedure and replace the appropriate bulb.
Taillamps, Turn Signal, and Stoplamps
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Remove the two screws on the inboard taillamp panel.
3. Pull the lamp directly rearward from the vehicle.
4. Turn the bulb socket one-quarter of a turn counterclockwise.
5. Pull the bulb assembly out from the lamp housing.
6. Unhook the electrical connector by lifting up the tabs and separate the connector from the bulb base.
5-50
7. Install the new bulb into the electrical connector. Push the bulb firmly enough so that the tabs hook over the tab on the bulb.
8. Put the bulb assembly back into the lamp housing and turn the bulb socket one-quarter of a turn clockwise.
9. Reinstall the lamp to its pocket by lining up the mounting pin and pushing forward to set the position.
10. Reinstall the screws removed in Step 2.
11. Close the liftgate.
Taillamps and Back-up Lamps
This procedure is for the liftgate-mounted taillamps and back-up lamps.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Remove the panel inside the liftgate by lifting the tabs and pulling the panel off.
3. Remove the seven wing nuts and the four outboard nuts (two at each end).
4. Gently lower the liftgate. 5. Pull the lamp applique directly rearward from the
vehicle.
5-51
A. Taillamp (outboard) B. Taillamp (center) C. Back-up Lamp (inboard)
6. Turn the bulb socket one-quarter of a turn counterclockwise.
7. Pull the bulb assembly out from the lamp housing.
8. Pull the bulb out of the base. 9. Install the new bulb into the electrical connector.
Push the bulb firmly enough so that the tabs hook over the tab on the bulb.
10. Put the bulb assembly back into the lamp housing and turn the bulb socket one-quarter of a turn clockwise.
11. Replace the applique on the liftgate. 12. Gently lift the liftgate. 13. Reinstall the seven wing nuts and the four
outboard nuts. 14. Reinstall the panel inside the liftgate by connecting
the tabs. 15. Close the liftgate.
Replacement Bulbs
For any bulb not listed here contact your dealer.
Lamp
Bulb Number
Front Turn SiqnaVParkinq Lamps 3457K
1 Headlamtx Hiah-Beam
I
9005
I
I Headlamps Low-Beam
I
9006
I
Liftgate-Mounted Back-up Lamps
92 1
Liftgate-Mounted Taillamps
161
Rear Outboard Stop/Tail/Turn
3057K
Sidemarker Lamps
168
5-52
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at least twice a year for wear orcracking. See "Wiper Blade
Check" under Part B: Owner Checks and Services on
page 6-9 for more information.
Replacement blades come in different types and are removed in different ways. For proper type and length, see Normal Maintenance Replacement Pads on page 5-104.
Here's how to replace the windshield wiper blades:
1. Turn the wipers on to the lowest intermittent setting.
2. Turn off the ignition while the wipers are at the outer positions of the wipe pattern. The blades are more accessible for removal/replacement while in this position.
3. Pull the windshield wiper arm away from the windshield.
4. Pull up the release clip, located at the connecting point of the blade and the arm. Then, pull the blade assembly down toward the glass to remove it from the wiper arm.
5-53
5. Push the new wiper blade securely on the wiper arm until you hear the release clip "click" into place.
6. Push the release clip, from Step 4, down to secure the wiper blade into place.
To replace the backglass mounted wiper blade, do the following:
1. Turn the rear wiper off.
2. Pull the wiper away from the backglass.
3. Pull up the release clip, located at the connecting point of the blade and the arm. Then, pull the blade assembly down toward the glass to remove it from the wiper arm.
4. Push the new wiper blade securely on the wiper arm until you hear the release clip "click" into place.
5. Push the release clip, from Step 3, down to secure the wiper blade into place.
5-54
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions about your tire warranty and where to obtain service, see your Buick Warranty booklet for details.
Poa I aintainedandimproperly usel ires are dangerous.
Overloading your tires can cause overheating as a result of too much friction. You couid have an air-out and a serious accident. See "Loading Your Vehicle" in the Index. Underinflated tires pose the same danger as overloaded tires. The resulting accident could cause serious injury. Check all tiresfrequently to maintain the recommended pressure. Tire pressure should be checked when your tires are cold.
CAUTION: (Continued)
0 Overinflated tires are more I !ly to be cut,
punctured or broken by a sudden
impact - such as when youhit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If your tread is badly worn, or if your tires have been damaged, replace them.
5-55
Inflation - Tire Pressure
The Certificationrrire label, which is on the rear edge of the driver's door, shows the correct inflation pressures for your tires when they're cold. "Cold" means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Notice: Don't let anyone tell you that underinflation or overinflation is all right. It's not. If your tires don't have enough air (underinflation), you can get the following:
Too much flexing
Too muchheat
Tireoverloading
Bad wear
Badhandling
Bad fuel economy
If your tires havetoo much air (overinflation), you can get the following:
Unusual wear
Badhandling
Roughride
0 Needless damage from road hazards
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more. Don't forget your compact spare tire. It should be at 60 psi (420 kPa).
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire pressure. You can't tell if your tires are properly inflated
simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they're underinflated.
Be sureto put the valve caps backon the valve stems.
They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture.
Check Tire Pressure System
Your vehicle may have a check tire pressure system that can alert you to a large change in the pressure of one tire. The system won't alert you before you drive that a tire is low or flat. You must begin driving before the system will work properly.
5-56
The LOW TIRE PRESSURE HOLD SET TO RESET message will appear on the Driver Information Center (DIC) and the LOW TIRE PRESSURE message will come on the message center if pressure difference (low pressure) is detected in one tire. In the following conditions, the LOW TIRE PRESSURE message may not come on even if the tire pressure is low, or it may come on when the tire pressure is actually normal:
more than one tire is low,
only one tire is replaced with a new tire during service,
the vehicle is moving faster than 70 mph (113 km/h),
the system is not yet calibrated,
the tire treadwear is uneven,
the compact spare tire is installed,
tire chains are being used, or
the vehicle is being driven on a rough or frozen road.
If the anti-lock brake system warning light comes on, the check tire pressure system may not be working properly. See your dealer for service. Also, see Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light onpage 3-41.
The check tire pressure system detects differences in tire rotation speeds that are caused by changes in tire
pressure. The system car! a!& p u 2hnuf a !nw
tire - but it doesn't replace normal tire maintenance. See Tires on page 5-55.
When the LOW TIRE PRESSURE HOLD SET TO RESET message appears on the Driver Information Center and the LOW TIRE PRESSURE message comes on the message center, you should stop as soon as you can and check all your tires for damage. If a tire is flat, see If a Tire Goes Flat on page 5-66. Also check the tire pressure in all four tires as soon as you can. See Inflation -- Tire Pressure on page 5-56.
Any time you adjust a tire's pressure or have one or more tires repaired or replaced, you'll needto reset (calibrate) the check tire pressure system. You'll also need to reset the system whenever yourotate the tires, buy newtires and install or removethe compact spare.
Don't reset the check tire pressure system without first correcting the came of the problem m d checking and adjusting the pressure in all four tires. If you reset the system when the tire pressures are incorrect, the check tire pressure system will not work properly and may not alert you when a tire is low or high.
To reset the system:
2. Press the MODE button until the DIC reads LOW TIRE PRESSURE HOLD SET TO RESET.
3. Press and hold the SET button until you hear a chime and TIRE PRESSURE RESET is displayed.
5-57
You will hear three chimes and the LOW TIRE PRESSURE message will go off and the DIC will return to TIRE PRESSURE NORMAL. If the LOW TIRE PRESSURE message comes back on, the check tire pressure system has not reset. Repeat the procedure.
The system completesthe calibration process during driving. The system"learns" the pressure at eachtire throughout the operating speed range of your vehicle. The systemnormally takes between 30 and 60 minutes of driving to learn the tire pressures. The systemnormally takes 10 to 20 minutes of driving in each speedrange to learn tire pressures. The speed ranges are 20 to 40 mph (32 to 64km/h), 40to 60 mph (64 to 96 km/h) and above 60 mph (96 km/h). This time may belonger depending on your individual driving habits. The learning process does not need to be completedduring a single trip. Once learned, the systemwill remember thetire pressure until the system is reset.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tires should be rotated every 7,500 miles (12 500 km).
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires as soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels. See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-59 and Wheel Replacement on page 5-62 for more information.
5-58
Make sure the spare tire is stored securely. Push, pull, and then try to rotate or turn the tire, If it moves, use the folding wrench to tighten the cable. See "Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools" in Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-67. The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation is the most important. See "Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services," in Section 6, for scheduled rotation intervals.
When rotating your tires, always use the correct rotation pattern shown here. Don't include the compact spare tire in your tire rotation. After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Certificationflire label.
Reset the check tire pressure system, if equipped. See Check Tire Pressure System on page 5-56.
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened. See "Wheel Nut Torque" under Capacities and Specifications on page5-102.
1
Rust or dirt on awheel, or on the parts to which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose after a time.The wheel could come off and cause an accident. When you change a wheel, remove m y rust or did froin places where the wheel attachesto the vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, to get all the rust or dirtoff. See "Changing a Flat
L Tire" I!? the !ndex.
When It Is Time for New Tires
One way to tell when it's time for new tires is to check the treadwear indicators, which will appear when your tires have only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or less of tread remaining.
Y'ou need a new tire if any of the following statements are true:
You can see the indicators at three or more places around the tire.
5-59
The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric.
The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that can't be repaired well because of the size or location of the damage.
Buying New Tires
To find out what kind and size of tires you need, look at the Certification/Tire label.
The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had a Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec) number on each tire's sidewall. When you get new tires, get ones with that same TPC Spec number. That way your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed to give proper endurance, handling, speed rating, traction, ride and other things during normal service on your vehicle. If your tires have an all-season tread design, the TPC number will be followed by an "MS" (for mud and snow).
If you ever replace your tires with those not having a TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size, load range, speed rating and construction type (bias, bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.
Mixing tires could cause you t ose control while driving. If you mix tiresof different sizes or types (radial and bias-beltedtires), the vehicle may not handle properly, and you
could have a crash. Using tiresof different
sizes may also causedamage to your vehicle. Be sure to usethe same size and type tires on all wheels. It's all right to drive with your compact spare, though. It was developed for use on yourvehicle.
If you use bias-ply tires on youvr ehicle, the wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing acrash. Use only radial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.
5-60
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system developed by the United States National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by treadwear, traction and temperature performance. (This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.) The grades are molded onthe sidewalls of most passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to federal safety
:
L- .--A - A A X ~ - ~ Ip A n n r n l nAn+nrp
I ~ ~ U I I G I I I G I IaLil~u auuluullat UGIIGIUI I V I W L U I Q
I 11-
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and
a half (15 ) times as well on the government course as
a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction - AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. Those grades represent the tire's abl!ity
to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance. Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include acceleration,
~ y , --,,,,:,,
L W I I IGI II
LI r.y, uAlwu~p-lal -1-I;II~~-
y
,h w
VI
-,.-I,
+r,,m+;r\n
~.JGUIL\I UULIVI
I
m
UI
hIC,*-,u,v~L v,l
-
,
,
.+~r~~
IUIIVV.
+
;
p
c
5-6 1
Temperature - A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life and best overall performance.
Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are not needed. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling one way orthe other, the alignment may need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels may need to be rebalanced.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted the same way as the one it replaces.
5-62
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle.
A n g the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts or wheel nutson your vehicle can be dangerous. It could affect the braking and handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you lose control. You could have a collision in which you or others could be injured. Always use the correctwheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for replacement.
Used Replac--ent Wheels
Putting a used wheel on your vehi ! is dangerous. You can't know how it's been used or how far it's been driven. It could fail suddenly and cause a crash.If you have to replace a wheel, use a new GM original equipment wheel.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems wiin bearing iiie, brake cuwiiiiy, speduiii&er GT odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain clearance to the body and chassis.
5-63
Tire Chains
__ If your vehicle hasP2`. - ,R16 size tires, don't
use tire chains, there's not enough clearance.
Tire chains used on a vehicle without the proper amount of clearance can cause damage to the brakes, suspension or other vehicleparts. The area damaged by the tire chains could cause you to lose control of your vehicle and you or others may be injured in a crash.
Use another type of traction device onlyif its manufacturer recommends it for use on your vehicle and tire size combination and road conditions. Follow that manufacturer's instructions. To help avoid damage to your vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the device if it's contacting your vehicle, and don't spin your wheels.
CAUTION: (Continued)
If hvu Jo find traction dGYices that wfilitl, install them on the front tires for front-wheel-drive vehicles. If your vehiclehas all-wheel drive, install traction devices on either the front tires or all four tires, bnuetver on the rear tires only.
Notice: If your vehicle has a tire size smaller than P215R05R16 size tires, use tire chains only where legal and only when you must.Use only SAE Class "S" type chains that are the proper size for your tires. Install them on the front tires, or for all-wheel-drive vehicles, the front or all four (but never rear only) tires and tighten themas tightly as possible with the ends securelyfastened. Drive slowly and follow the chain manufacturer's instructions. If you can hear the chains contacting your vehicle, stop and retightenthem. If the contact continues, slow down until it stops. Driving too fast or spinning the wheels with chains on will damage your vehicle.
5-64
Accessory Inflator
Your vehicle may have an air inflator. With it, you can inflate things like air mattresses and basketballs, and you can also use it to bring your tires up to the proper pressure.
The air inflator is located in the rear compartment on the driver's side. To remove the cover, pull the tab on the cover and pull it off.
This is the switch for the air inflator.
I
Inflating som
-00 muchcan make it
~
explode, and you or others could be injured.
Be sure to read the inflator instructions, and
inflate any object only to its recommended
pressure.
To use your air inflator system, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or ON. 2. Attach the appropriate nozzle adapter, if required,
to the end of the hose that has the pressure gage. 3. Attach that end of the hose to the object you wish
to inflate. 4. Remove the protective cap covering the outlet.
There may be an air inflator kit stored in the glove box. It includes a 20-foot (6 m) hose with an air pressure gage and nozzle adapters.
6. Press the accessory inflator switch. The light in the switch will come on to show the system is working.
If the air inflator system does not turn on or the light does not come on, the fuse may be blown or installed incorrectly. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-96 or see your dealer for service.
5-65
Your air inflator will automatically shut off after about 10 minutes. The light in the switch will blink. After about one minute you can use the system again. Press the inflator switch and the indicator light will come on.
Notice: Don't run your air inflator for longer than 30 minutes at one time. If you do, you may damage the system.
After running the air inflator for 30 minutes, wait at least 10 minutes before restarting the air inflator.
To turn off the inflator, do the following: 1. Press the switch and detach the hose, first from the inflated object, then from the outlet. 2. Put the protective cap back on. 3. Place the inflator kit tools in the pouch, and store in the glove box.
To put the cover back on, line up the tabs at the back of the cover and put it in place. Push down the tab to secure the cover.
If a Tire Goes Flat
It's unusual for a tire to "blow out" while you're driving, especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goes out of a tire, it's much more likely to leak out slowly. But if you should ever have a "blowout", here are a few tips about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly. Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a skid and may require the same correction you'd use in a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently brake to a stop - well off the road if possible.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use your jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
5-66
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your hazard warning flasbrs.
Changin, d tire can cause an injury. The vehicle can slipoff the jack and roll over you or other people. You and they could be badly injured. Find a level place to change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
3. Turn off the engine.
To be even more certain the vehicle won't move, you can put blocks at the front and rear of the tire farthestaway from the one being changed. That would be the tire on the other side of the vehicle,at the opposite end.
The following steps will tell you how to use the jack and change a tire.
5-67
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The equipment you'll need is located in the storage compartment at the rear of the vehicle, on the passenger's side.
1. Open the jack storage compartment by lifting up the tab and pulling the cover off.
I
2. Remove the jack and jacking tools by turning the wing bolt counterclockwise.
3. Separate the jack by lifting up the jack from the bracket tab and remove the folding wrench from the jack.
B
A. Jack B. Wing Bolt C. Jacking Instructions
D. Folding Wrench E. WingNut F. J-Hook
A
D
The tools you'll be using include the jack (A), folding wrench (B), wing nut (C), and J-hook (D).
5-68
Removing the SpareTire (Vehicles without the Rear Convenience Center)
The compact spare tire is located under the vehicle, ahead of the rear bumper. Use the spare tire hoist to raise, lower and store the compact spare tire. See Compact Spare Tire on page 5-85 for more information about the compact spare.
2. Attach the folding wrench into the hoist shaft.
3. Turn the folding wrench counterclockwise to lower the spare tire to the ground. Continue turning the wrench until the spare tire can be pulled out from under the vehicle.
A. HoistShaft B. FoldingWrench C. HoistAssembly
D. Retainer E. Compact Spare Tire
1. Flip the rear cargo area carpet cut out to expose the hoist shaft.
4 . Tc remr\y~?he spa_rptire from the mhle, tilt the
retainer and slip it through the wheel opening. 5. After removing the spare tire, turn the wrench
clockwise to raise the cable back up. Do not store a full-size or a flat road tire under the vehicle. See "Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools" later in this section.
5-69
To continue changing the flat tire see "Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire" later in this section.
If the spare tire will not lower, the secondary latch may be engaged causing the tire not to lower. Do the following to check the cable:
1. Check under the vehicle to see if the cable is visible.
2. If it's not visible, see "Secondary Latch System" later in this section.
If it is visible, first try to tighten the cable by turning the folding wrench clockwise until you hear two clicks or feel it skip twice. You cannot over-tighten the cable.
3. Then loosen the cable by turning the wrench counterclockwise three or four turns.
4. If the spare tire has not lowered, tighten the cable all the way and then loosen it at least two times.
If the spare tire did lower to the ground, continue with Step 4 under "Removing the Spare Tire (Vehicles without the Rear Convenience Center)" earlier in this section.
5. If you still cannot lower the spare tire to the ground, see "Secondary Latch System" later in this section.
Removing the Spare Tire (Vehicles with the Rear Convenience Center)
The compactspare tire is located under the vehicle,
ahead of the rear bumper. SeeCompact Spare Tireon
page 5-85for moreinformationabout the compact spare.
5-70
4. Turn the folding wrench counterclockwise to lower
B
the spare tire to the ground. Continue turning the
wrench until the spare tire can be pulled out
from under the vehicle.
A. ReCaronvenience Center
B. Folding Wrench
C. Storage Compartment Cap Hole
D. Hoist Shaft E. Compact Spare Tire F. Retainer G. Hoist Shaft Assembly
1. Open the storage compartment door of the convenience center that is nearest the liftgate and remove the cap on the bottom of the storage compartment.
2. Flip the cut out carpet that is located through the hole of the storage compartment.
3. Attach the folding wrench into the hoist shaft.
5. To remove the spare tire from the cable, tilt the retainer and slip it through the wheel opening.
6. After removing the spare tire, turn the wrench clockwise to raise the cable back up. Do not store a full-size or a flat road tire under the vehicle. See "Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools" later in this section.
5-71
To continue changing the flat tire see "Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire" later in this section.
If the spare tire will not lower, the secondary latch may be engaged causing the tire not to lower. Do the following to check the cable:
1. Check under the vehicle to see if the cable is visible.
2. If it's not visible, see "Secondary Latch System" following.
If it is visible, first try to tighten the cable by turning the folding wrench clockwise until you hear two clicks or feel it skip twice. You cannot over-tighten the cable.
3. Then loosen the cable by turning the wrench counterclockwise three or four turns.
4. If the spare tire has not lowered, tighten the cable all the way and then loosen it at least two times.
If the spare tire did lower to the ground, continue with Step 5 under "Removing the Spare Tire (Vehicles with the Rear Convenience Center)" earlier in this section.
5. If you still cannot lower the spare tire to the ground, see "Secondary Latch System" following.
Secondary Latch System
Your vehicle has an underbody mountedtire hoist assembly equipped witha secondary latch system. It's designed to stop the compact sparetire from suddenly falling off your vehicle if the cable holdingthe sparetire is damaged. Forthe secondary latchto work, thetire must be stowedwith the valve stem pointingdown. See "Storing the Spare Tire and Tools" later in this section for instructions on storing the sparetire correctly.
5-72
Bef ? beginningthis . x e d u r e readallthe
instructions. Failureto read and follow the instructions could damage the hoist assembly and you and others could get hurt.Read and follow the instructions listed below.
To release the spare tire from the secondary latch, do the followinl-
Someone standingtoG Jose during the procedure couldbe injured by the jack. If the spare tire does not slideoff the jack
completely, make sure no one is behind you or
on either side of you as youpull the jack out from thespare.
1. I f the cable is not visible, start this procedure at Step 3.
2. Turn the wrench counterclockwise until
approximately 6 inches (15cm) of cable is exposed.
3. Attach the folding wrench to the jack and raise the jack at least 10 turns.
4. Place the jack under the vehicle, ahead of the rear bumper. Position tne cenier iiii: poini oi the jack under the center of the spare tire.
5-73
5. Turn the folding wrench clockwise to raise the jack until it lifts the secondary latch spring.
6. Keep raising the jack until the spare tire stops moving upward and is held firmly in place, this lets you know that the secondary latch has released.
7. Lower the jack by turning the folding wrench counterclockwise. Keep lowering the jack until the spare tire is resting on the folding wrench.
5-74
8. Grasp the spare tire with both hands and pull it out from under the vehicle.
9. Reach under the vehicle and remove the folding wrench and jack.
10. When the spare tire has been completely lowered, tilt the retainer and slip it through the wheel opening.
11. If the cable is hanging, turn the wrench clockwise to
raise the cable back up.
Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon as you can. You will not be able to store a spare tire using the hoist assembly until it has been repaired or replaced.
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire
1. If there is a wheel cover, loosen the plastic nut caps with the wheel wrench. They won't come off. Then, using the flat end of the wheel wrench, pry along the edge of the cover until it comes off. Be careful; the edges may be sharp. Don't try to remove the cover with your bare hands. If your vehicle has aluminum wheels, remove the wheel nut caps using the wheel wrench. 2. Loosen the wheel
nuts - but do not
remove them - using the fo!dlng wrench. (Turn the handle about 180 degrees, then flip the handle back to the starting position. This avoids taking the wrench off the lug RU? %r E2Ch ?LrZ.)
For wheels with a wheel lock key, use the wheel lock key between the lock nut and folding wrench. The key is suppiied in the front passenger door pocket.
5-75
Notice: To help avoid damage to lonckut or wheel lock key, do not use an impact wrench wthitihs key.
3. Near each wheel, there is a notch in the vehicle's body. Position the jack and raise the jack head until it fits firmly into the notch in the vehicle's frame nearest the flat tire.
Getting under a vehicle whenit is jacked up is dangerous. If the vehicle slipsoff the jack you could be badly injured or killed.Never get under a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
Notice: Do not place the jack under the rear axle control arms or you may damage your vehicle. Only use the areas shown for proper jack location.
Do not raise the vehicle yet. Put the compact spare tire near you.
- __ yionugr vf
! jparcokperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehiclefall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the
jack lift head into the proper location before
raising the vehicle.
I
5-76
4. Attach the folding wrench to the jack, and turn the wrench clockwise to raise the jack head 3 inches (7.6 cm).
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the folding wrench clockwise in the jack. Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground so that there is enough morn for the spare tire to fit under the wheel well.
6. Remove all the wheel nuts and take off the flat tire.
7. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces
- - a-r.-IU-1
s- p.- alt:
.._I^ - I
VVI I t x l .
.._stor dirt on 1 wheel, or on the parts to ~
which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts become loose after a time.The wheel could come off and cause an accident. When youchange a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from the places where the wheel attaches tothe vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper towelto do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later, if you needto, to get all the rust or dirotff.
I Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If
you
ao,
ine
nuis
rnighic
come
ioose.
.I
Y
uur
wised
could fall off, causing a serious accident.
8. Install the spare tire and put the wheel nuts back on with the rounded end of the nuts toward the wheel. Tighten each nut by hand until the wheel is held against the hub.
5-77
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperltyi -.~Iter -I ~
wheel nuts can cause thewheel to become loose and even comeoff. This could lead toan accident. Be sure to use the correcwtheel nuts. If you have to replacethem, be sure to get new GM original equipment wheel nuts. Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 100 Ib ft (140 Nom ).
9. Lower the vehicle by attaching the folding wrench to the jack and turning the wrench counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely. 10. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in a crisscross sequence, as shown.
5-78
Nofice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to brake pulsation and rotordamage. To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten thewheel nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque specification.
11. Don't try to put a wheel cover on the compact spare tire. It won't fit. Store the wheel cover securely in the rear of the vehicle until you have the flat tire repaired or replaced.
Notice: Wheel covers won't fit on your compact spare. If you try to puat wheel cover on your compact spare, you coulddamage the cover or the spare.
Stc - ng a Flat or Bare Tire anc . Tools
-.I
Storing a jack, a tire or other equipmentin the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose equipment could strike someone. Store all these in the proper place.
The underbody-mounted spare tire needsto be
stored with the valve stem pointing down. If
the spare tireis stored with the valve stem
pointing upwards, its secondary latch won't
...- P I n l y "I, .-"---"I..
WVUl
WWGI
..--I +I--, -...-"I
--,,#A I f i n r a m
Q I IU L I I G spa1CZ L E 1 S Z C I W U l W IUWYLvII
and suddenly fall from your vehicle. Itfhis
CAUTION: (Continued)
happenedwhenyour
-n, ~
~
~
wa, I rg
the tire might contact a person or another
vehicle, causing injury and, of course, damage
to itself as well. Be sure the
underbody-mounted spare tire is stored with
its valve stem pointing down.
Storing the Spare Tire and Tools
1. Lay the compact spare tire on the ground at the rear of the vehicle. Position the compact spare tire so that the valve stem is pointed down facing the rear of the vehicle.
2. Lower the cable to the ground. See "Removing the Spare Tire (Vehicles without the Rear Convenience Center)" or "Removing the Spare Tire (Vehicles with the Rear Convenience Center)" earlier in this seciiurr.
3. Tilt the retainer downward and slip it through the center hole of the spare tire.
Make sure the retainer is fully seated across the underside of the wheel.
5-79
4. Attach the folding wrench to the hoist shaft.
5. Turn the folding wrench clockwise to lift the spare tire.
6. When the tire reaches the stabilizer bar, move the tire over the bar, then continue to turn the folding wrench clockwise to lift the spare tire.
When the tire is almost in the stored position, turn the tire so that the valve stem is towards the rear of the vehicle.
This will help when you check and maintain tire pressure in the spare.
8. Raise the tire fully against the underside of the vehicle. Continue turning the folding wrench until you feel more than two clicks. This indicates that the compact spare tire is secure and the cable is tight. The spare tire hoist cannot be overtightened.
PUSH & PULL
9. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push, pull, and then try to rotate or turn the tire. If the tire moves, use the folding wrench to tighten the cable.
5-80
Put back all tools as they were stored in the jack storage compartment and put the compartment cover back on.
To put the cover back on, slip the tabs on the side 01 the cover into the cover opening. Push the cover in place and push downthe tabs on the cover so that it rests in the groove. This secures the cover in place.
When you replace the compact spare with a full-size tire, reinstall the bolt-on wheel covers or the center cap, which ever your vehicle has. Tighten them "hand tight" over the wheel nuts, using the folding wrench.
Storing the Flat Tire (Vehicles without the Stowable Seat and without the Rear Convenience Center)
I
I I
,B
A. D-Ring
B. Wing Nut
c. J-HOOK
D. Valve Stem E. Full-Size Tire
5-8 1
1. Flip up the D-ring located in the rear cargo area.
2. Lay the tire in the rear cargo area of the vehicle with the valve stem up with the center hole of the tire over the D-ring.
For vehicles with aluminum wheels, remove the center cap by tapping the back of the cap with the folding wrench.
3. Remove the J-hook and the wing nut from the back of the jack access door. Assemble the wing nut and the J-hook.
4. Install the wing nut and the J-hook to the D-ring through the center hole of the tire.
5. Tighten the wing nut to secure the tire to the floor.
Push and pull on the tire to make sure the tire is secure and does not move.
6. Put back all tools as they were stored in the jack
storage compartment and put the compartment cover back on.
Slip the tabs on the side of the compartment cover into the cover opening. Push the cover in place and push down the tabs on the cover so that it rests in the groove. This secures the cover in place.
Storing the Flat Tire (Vehicles with the Rear Convenience Center)
A. D-Ring B. RearConvenience
Center C.Wing Nut
D. J-Hook E. Full-Size Tire F. Cap on Bottom of
Storage Compartment
5-82
1. Open the center storage compartment door of the rear convenience center.
2. Remove the cap on the bottom of the storage compartment and flip the D-ring up.
3. Lay the tire on top of the center storage compartment with the valve stem down. Make sure you can see the D-ring through the center hole of the tire.
4. Remove the J-hook and the wing nut from the back of the jack access door. Assemble the wing nut and the J-hook.
5. Install the wing nut and the J-hook to the D-ring through the center hole of the tire.
6. Tighten the wing nut to secure the tire to the iioor.
Push and pull on the tire to make sure the tire is secure and does not move.
7. Put back all tools as they were stored in the jack storage compartment and put the compartment cover back on.
Slip the tabs on the side ot the compartment cover into the cover opening. Push the cover in place and push down thetabs on the cover so that it rests in the groove. This secures the cover in place.
Storing the Flat Tire (Vehicles with the Stowable Seat)
E
\
G
A. RearConvenience Center
B. Full-Size Tire C. D-Ring
D. Stowable Seat Strap E. Cargo Net Hook F. J-Hook ti. wing Nut
1. If the seatback is not in an upright position, move it to an upright position.
2. There is a strap attached to each side of the stowable seat. Hook the straps to the cargo net hook in the rear of the vehicle.
5-83
3. Flip the D-ring so it is pointing outward.
4. Open the convenience center cover.
5. Stand the full-size tire up, in the tray against the back of the seat with the valve stem pointing out.
6. Remove the J-hook and the wing nut from the back
of the jack access door. Assemble the wing nut and
the J-hook.
/'. Install the wing nut and the J-hook to the D-ring through the center hole of the tire.
8. Tighten the wing nut to secure the tire to the seatback.
Push and pull on the tire to make sure the tire is secure and does not move.
9. Put back all tools as they were stored in the jack storage compartment and put the compartment cover back on.
Slip the tabs on the side of the compartment cover into the cover opening. Push the cover in place and push down the tabs on the cover so that it rests in the groove. This secures the cover in place.
Storing the Flat Tire with the Stowable Seatback Folded Flat
A
A. StowableSeat B. Full-Size Tire C. WingNut
D. J-Hook E. D-Ring
1. Fold the seatback down and flip the D-ring up.
2. Lay the tire on the seatback with the valve stem pointing up with the center hole of the tire over the D-ring.
5-a4
3. Remove the J-hook and the wing nut from the back of the jack access door. Assemble the wing nut and the J-hook.
4. Install the wing nut and the J-hook to the D-ring through the center hole of the tire.
5. Tighten the wing nut to secure the tire to the seatback.
Push and pull on the tire to make sure the tire is secure and does not move.
6. Put back all tools as they were stored in the jack storage compartment and put the compartment cover back on.
Slip the tabs on the side of the compartment cover into the cover opening. Push the ewer in place and push down thetabs on the cover so that it rests in the groove. This secures the cover in place.
Compact Spare Tire
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated when your vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time. Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be 60 psi (420 kPa).
After installing the compact spare on your vehicle, you should stop as soon as possible and make sure your spare tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare is made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph (105 km/h) for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you can finish your trip and have your full-size tire repaired or replaced where you want. Of course, it's best to replace your spare with a full-size tire as soon as you can. Your spare will last longer and be in good shape in case you need it again.
5-85
Notice: When the compact spare is installed, don't take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with guide rails. The compact spare can get caught on the rails. That can damage the tire and wheel, and maybe other parts of your vehicle.
Don't use your compact spare on other vehicles.
And don't mix your compact spare tire or wheel with other wheels or tires. They won't fit. Keep your spare tire and its wheel together.
Notice; Tire chains won't fit your compact spare. Using them can damage your vehicle and can damage the chains too. Don't use tire chains on your compact spare.
All-Wheel Drive
After installing a compact spare tire on a vehicle with all-wheel drive you will need to drive with light to moderate acceleration, for 10 seconds, in a straight line. This action will allow the vehicle to detect the compact spare tire and disable the all-wheel drive system. The AWD DISABLE message will come on indicating that the all-wheel drive system is off. You may detect a slight pull during this time, but this is normal.
Notice: You may damage your vehicle's all-wheel
drive system if your vehicleis driven for an
extended period with a compacst pare tire installed and the all-wheel drive system in operation.See "All-Wheel Drive System'' and "AWD Disable Warning Message" in the Index for more information.
5-86
Appearance Care
Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Some are toxic. Others can burst into flames if you strike a
match or get themon a hot part of the vehicle. Some are
dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed space. When you use anything from a container to clean your vehicle, be sure to follow the manufacturer's warnings and instructions. And always open your doors or windows when you're cleaning the inside.
Never use these to clean your vehicle.
Gasoline
Benzene
Naphtha
CarbonTetrachloride
Acetone
PaintThinner
Turpentine
LacquerThinner
NailPolishRemover
They can all be hazardous - some more than others - and they can all damage your vehicle, too.
Don't use any of these unless this manual says you can. In many uses, these will damage your vehicle:
Alcohol
LaundrySoap
Bleach
0 ReducingAgents
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic and painted surfaces with a clean, damp cloth.
FabrCdCarpet
Your dealer has cleaners for the cleaning of fabric and carpet. They will clean normal spots and stains very well. You can get GM - approved cleaning products from your dealer. See GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-93
5-87
Here are some cleaning tips:
Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
Clean up stains as soon as you can - before they set.
Carefully scrape off any excess stain.
Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean area often. A soft brush may be used if stains are stubborn.
If a ring forms on fabric after spot cleaning, clean the entire area immediately or it will set.
Using Cleaner on Fabric
1. Vacuum and brush the area to remove any loose dirt.
2. Always clean a whole trim panel or section. Mask surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines.
3. Follow the directions on the container label.
4. Apply cleaner with a clean sponge. Don't saturate the material and don't rub it roughly.
5. As soon as you've cleaned the section, use a sponge to remove any excess cleaner.
6. Wipe cleaned area with a clean, water-dampened towel or cloth.
7. Wipe with a clean cloth and let dry.
Special Fabric Cleaning Problems
Stains caused by such things as catsup, coffee (black), egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urine and blood can be removed as follows:
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge the soiled area with cool water.
2. If a stain remains, follow the cleaner instructions described earlier.
3. If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine, treat the area with a watedbaking soda solution: 1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml) of lukewarm water.
4. Let dry.
Stains caused by candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, chili sauce and unknown stains can be removed as follows:
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.
2. Clean with cool water and allow to dry completely.
3. If a stain remains, follow the cleaner instructions described earlier.
5-88
Vinyl
Use warm water and a clean cloth.
Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt. You may have to do this more than once.
Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain if you don't get them off quickly. Use a clean cloth and vinyl/leather cleaner. See your dealer for this product.
Leather
Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then, let
the leather dry naturally, Do not use heat to dry.
For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner. See your dealer for this product.
Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive cleaners, furniture polish or shoe polish on leather.
Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned immediately. If dirt is allowed to work into tne iinisn, it can harm the leather.
Top of the Instrument Panel
Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones or waxes may cause annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it difficult to see through the windshield under certain conditions.
Interior Plastic Components
Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft cloth
or sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect the surface finish.
Glass Surfaces
Glass shoL;ld be cieaned often. GM Glass C!eaner or a
liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass. See GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materialson page 5-93.
Notice: Don't use abrasivecleaners on glass,
because they may cause scratches. Avoid placing decals on the inside rear window, since they may have to be scraped off later. If abrasive cleaners are used on the inside of the rear window, an electric defogger element may be damaged. Any temporary license should not be attachedacross the defogger grid.
5-89
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, it may severely weaken them. In a crash, they might not be able to provide adequate protection. Clean safety belts only with mild soap and lukewarm water.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth at least every six months. During very cold, damp weather more frequent application may be required. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-15.
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle
The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth of color, gloss retention and durability. 5-90
Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve your vehicle's finish is to keep
it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water.
Don't wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun. Use a car washing soap. Don't use strong soaps or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well, removing all soap residue completely. You can get GM approved cleaning products from your dealer.
See GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on
page 5-93. Don't use cleaning agents that are petroleum based, or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter your vehicle.
Cleaning Exterior LampdLenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses. Follow instructions under "Washing Your Vehicle."
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint finish. Youcan get GM-approved cleaning products
from your dealer. See G M Vehicle Care/Appearance
Materials on page 5-93.
If your vehicle has a "basecoaf/clearcoat" paint finish. The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are non-abrasive and madefor a basecoatklearcoat paint finish.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoatklearcoat paint finish may
dull the finish or leave swirl marks.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can damage your vehicle'sfinish if they remain on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possibie. i i necessary, use 1 - 1 w i - l - & ~ - ~ S ~c~ ~k s ~ e r sfhz: are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout period e! years. Yog
cthaantchaen!ptatokeketheepirthtoellpoavi.netr
fal.nl.sh
looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
Windshield, Backglass and Wiper Blades
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running, wax, sap or other material may be on the blade or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a full-strength
glass cleaning liquid. The windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse it with water.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades and affect their performance. Clean the blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the blade
with water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary; replace blades that look worn.
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels
Your vehicle may be equipped with either aluminum or
-1
... . - l - b - A
L.nnle
GI llul I I t ? ~ l a l a UV V I I G G I Q .
Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with
mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then be applied.
5-91
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted surface of your vehicle. Don't use strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners, cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on them because you could damage the surface. Do not use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, but avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff off immediately after application.
Don't take your vehicle through an automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. These brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.
Tires
To clean your tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Notice: When applying a tire dressing, always take care to wipe off any overspray or splash from all
painted surfaces on the body or wheels of the
vehicle. Petroleum-based products may damage the paint finish and tires.
Sheet Metal Damage
If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
5-92
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair expense.
Minor chips and scratches can berepaired with touch-up materials avaliable from your dealer or other service outlets. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your dealer's body and paint shop.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust control can collect on the underbody. If these are not removed, accelerated corrosion (rust) can occur on the underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan and exhaust system even though they have corrosion protection.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of the frame should be loosened before being flushed. Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can do this for you.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This damage
can take two forms; blotchy, ringlet-shaped discolorations, and small irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM will repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within 12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase, whichever occurs first.
GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
See your GM dealer for more information on purchasing the following products.
GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
I
Descrbtion
I
Usage
Polishing Cloth Wax Treated
I Interior and exterior polishing cloth.
Tar and Road Oil Remover
1 Chrome Cleaner and Polish
Removes tar, road oil and asphalt.
Use on chrome or stainless steei.
White Sidewall Tire Cleaner
Removes soil and black marks from whitewalls.
Vinyl Cleaner
__~~
Cleans vinyl tops, upholstery and convertible tops.
5-93
GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
(cont'd)
Description
I
Usage
Glass Cleaner
I Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Chrome and Wire Cleaner
Removes dirt and grime from chrome wheels and wire wheel covers.
Finish Enhancer
Removes dust, fingerprints, and surface contaminants, Spray on wipe off.
Swirl Remover Polish Cleaner Wax
Removes swirl marks, fine scratches and other light surface contamination.
I Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials (cont'd)
Description
Usage
Wash Wax Concentrate
Medium foaming shampoo. Cleans and lightly waxes. Biodegradable and phosphate free.
Spot Lifter
Quickly and easily removes spots and stains from carpets, vinyl and cloth upholstery.
Odorless spray odor
Odor Eliminator
eliminator used on fabrics, vinyl, leather and
carpet.
L
See your General Motors parts department for these
products. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 6-15.
5-94
Vehicle Identification
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on a plate in the front corner of the instrument panei, on the driver's side. You can see it if you look through the windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts labels and the certificates of title and registration.
Engine Identification
The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code. This code will help you identify your engine, specifications and replacement parts.
Service Parts Identification Label
You'll find this label on the inside of the access panel located on the driver's side of the rear of the vehicle. It's very helpful if you ever need to order parts.
On this label is:
* yourVIN,
the model designation,
paint information and
* a list of all production options and special
equipment. Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
5-95
Electrical System
Add-on Electrical Equipment
Notice: Don't add anything electrical to your vehicle unless you check with your dealer first. Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicle and the damage wouldn't be covered by your warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can keep other components from working as they should.
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to add anything electrical to your vehicle, see Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 1-83.
Headlamp Wiring
The headlamp wiring is protected by an internal circuit breaker in the floor console fuse block. An electrical overload will cause the lamps to go on and off, or in some cases to remain off. If this happens, have your headlamp wiring checked right away.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools. If the overload is caused by some electrical problem, be sure to get it fixed.
5-96
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Circuit breakers in the floor console fuse block protect the power windows and other power accessories. When the current load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers and fusible thermal links.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size and rating.
If you ever have a problem on the road and don't have a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same
amperage or use one of the spare fuses in the
underhood fuse and relay center. Just pick some
feature of your vehicle that you can get along without - like the radio or cigarette lighter - and use its
fuse, if it is the right amperage. Replace it as soon as you can.
There are two fuse blocks in your vehicle: the floor console fuse block and the underhood fuse and relay center.
Floor Console Fuse Block
I
..
._ ".j.
1
I
[2)
L (3)
n
I Fuse
Usage
The floor console fuse block is located to the left of the
glove box near the floor. The fuses marked spare are available if a replacement
3
IPowDeoLroorcks
I
1
:- - - - A - A
IU5C 15 i iGGUGU.
Pull the door opento access the fuse block.
5-97
Fuse 10 11
I
Usage
Turn Signal and Hazard Lamp Flashers
Power Seats
I Fuse I
31
I
I
I
I
19
ITurn Signal Switch and NSBU
Switch
I
42
PASS-Keyw I II
44
Body Control Module (BCM)
5-98
27
AccReseslaoyry
33 ~~
43
II Retain.-ed AccessPoroywReerlay
DiAodcecessory
I
U
S a
I
Fuse
Usage
33
Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock Control System
34
Spare
35
Starter Solenoid Battery Fuse
36
ABS Motor
- 1-
-
38
Spare
39
Engine Cooling Fan
40
Engine Cooling Fan
I I
41
I Main Battery Fuse for Retained I Accessory Power Relav and
Accessojl Relay
42
Main Battery Fuse for Heated Seats,
.A.i.r.
I
43
I Sware
I
I
26
Front Fog Lamps
37
Ignition Relay, Neutral Start Switch,
44
Spare
Main Battery Fuse for Power
45
Outlets, Level Control. Power Seats
and Mirrors and Body'Computer
46
Sware
47
Main Battery Fuse for HVAC Blower and Ignition 3 Relay
5-100
1 I Fuse I
Usage
I
Main Battery Fuse for Ignition
Switch, Radio, Heads-Up Display,
48
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE),
Instrument Cluster, Air Conditioning
and Bodv Computer
~~
64
Spare
-
65
66
Spare Spare
-~ 67 68
Spare Spare
69
Spare
70
Fuse Puller
EZl
Diode for Air Conditioning Comtxessor Clutch
I
Circuit Breaker
Spare
49
Usage
5-101
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. Please refer to Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-75for more information.
Application Air Conditioning Refrigerant (R134a)
Automatic Transaxle Pan Removal and Replacement Complete Overhaul
AWD Automatic Transaxle Pan Removal and Replacement Complete Overhaul
Coolinq System with A/C
English 1.7 Ibs.
7.4 quarts 10.0 quarts
8.7 quarts 10.8 quarts
I
I
I
9.6 quarts
Metric 0.8 kg
7.0 L 9.5 L
8.3 L
10.3 L
9.1 L
5-102
Engine Specifications
5-103
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
r
Windshield Wiper Blades Driver's Side Length Passenger's Side Length Type
*ACDelco@part number.
24.0 inches (60.0 cm) 22.0 inches (55.0 cm)
Shepherd's Hook
5-104
Section 6 Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule ..................................... .6-2
Introduction .................................................. .6-2
Your Vehicle and the Environment .................... 6-2 Maintenance Requirements ............................. -6-2
How This Section is Organized ......................... 6-3 Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services ...........6-4
Using Your Maintenance Schedule ....................6-4
Scheduled Maintenance .............................. .6-4
ParBtO: wneCr hecksand
Services ....
.....6-9
At Each Fuel Fill ...............................
....-6-9
At Least Once a Month .................................. .6-9
At Least Twice a Year .................................. .6-10
At Least Once a Year ................................... 6-10
Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections .........6-13
Steering,Suspension and Front Drive Axle Boot and Seal Inspection .................... 6-13
Exhaust System Inspection ........................... -6-13 Fuel System inspection ................................. .6-13 Engine Cooling System Inspection ....... .....6-13
Throttle System Inspection ........................ .6-14
Transfer Case (Power Transfer Unit) and Carrier Assembly-Differential (Rear Drive Module) AII-Wheel Drive Inspection .......................................
Brake System Inspection ...............................
-6-14 -6-14
Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ................................................ 6-13F
Part E: Maintenance Record ....................... .6-16
6- 1
Maintenance Schedule
Introduction
KEEP ENGINE OIL AT THE PROPER - N E LAND CHANGEAS RECOMMENDED
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the environment. All recommended maintenance procedures are important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our environment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition, please maintain your vehicle properly.
Maintenance Requirements
Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections and recommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary to keep your vehicle in good working condition. Any damage caused by failure to follow recommended maintenance may not be covered by warranty.
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer for details.
6-2
How This Section is Organized
This maintenance schedule is divided into five parts:
"Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services"explains
what to have done and how often. Some of these
services can be complex, so unless you are technically
qualified and have the necessary equipment, you
should let your dealer's service department or another
qualified service centerdo these jobs.
-
_ _ Pert,. ming mz.. .:enance Jrk on a - -hie-- -_._I
be dangerous. In trying to do somejobs, you can be seriously injured. Do your own maintenance work only if you have the required know-how and the proper tools and equipment for the job. If you have any doubt, have a qualified technician do thework.
If you want to get ths service information, see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7-9.
"Part B: Owner Checks and Services" tells you what should be checked and when. It also explains what you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good condition.
"Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections" explains important inspections that your dealer's service department or another qualified service center should perform.
"Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants" lists some recommended products necessary to help keep your vehicle properly maintained. These products, or their equivalents, should be used whether you do the work yourself or have it done.
"Part E: Maintenance Record" is a place for you to record and keep track of the maintenance performed on your vehicle. Keep your maintenance receipts. They may be needed to qualify your vehicle for warranty repairs.
6-3
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services
This part contains engine oil and chassis lubrication scheduled maintenance which explains the engine oil life system and how it indicates when to change the engine oil and filter. Lubricate chassis components with each oil change. Also, listed are scheduled maintenance services which are to be performed at the mileage intervals specified.
Using Your Maintenance Schedule
We at General Motors want to help you to keep your vehicle in good working condition. But we don't know exactly how you'll drive it. You may drive short distances only a few times a week. Or you may drive long distances all the time in very hot, dusty weather. You may use your vehicle in making deliveries. Or you may drive it to work, to do errands or in many other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use their vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need more frequent checks and replacements. So please read the following and note how you drive. If you have any questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition, see your dealer.
6-4
This part tells you the maintenance services you should have done and when you should schedule them. When you go to your dealer for your service needs, you'll know that GM-trained and supported service people will perform the work using GM parts.
The proper fluids and lubricantsto use are listedin Part D. Make sure whoever services your vehicle uses them. All parts should be replacedand all necessaryrepairs
done before you or anyone else drives the vehicle.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
carry passengers and cargo within recommended limits. You will find these limits on your vehicle's Certification/Tire label. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-34.
are driven on reasonable road surfaces within driving limits.
use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane on page 5-5.
Scheduled Maintenance
The services shown in this schedule upto 100,000 miles (166 000 km) should be repeatedafter 100,000 miles (166 000 km) atthe same intervalsfor thelife of this vehicle. The services shown at 150,000 miles (240 000 km) should be repeatedat the sameinterval after 150,000 miles (240 000 km) forthe life of this vehicle.
See Part 6: Owner Checks and Serviceson page 6-9 and Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections on page 6- 13.
Footnotes
f The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle 's useful life. We, however, urge that all recommended maintenance servicesbe performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded. @ Whenever the tires are rotated, the Check Tire
Pressure System (if equipped) musf be reset.
+A good time to check your brakes is during tire rotation. See Brake System Inspection on page 6-14.
Engine Oil Scheduled Maintenance
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on engine revolutions and engine temperature,
and not on mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at which an oil change will be indicated can vary considerably. For the oil life system to work properly, you must reset the system every time the oil is changed.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE OIL message will come on. Change your oil as soon as possible within the next two times you stop for fuel. It is possible that, if you are driving under the best conditions, the oil life system may not indicate that an oil change is necessary for over a year. However, your engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and at this time the system must be reset. It is also important to check your oil regularly and keep it at the proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed. See Engine Oil on page 5-13 for information on resetting the system.
After the services are performed, record the date. odometer reading and who performed the service on the maintenance record pages in part E of this schedule.
An Emission Control Service.
6-5
7,500 Miles (12 500 km)
0 Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5-58 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote @.) (See footnote +.)
15,000 Miles (25000 km)
0 Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary. An
Emission Control Service. (See footnote t.)
0 Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5-58 for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote 0.)(See footnote +.)
22,500 Miles (37500 km)
0 Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5-58 for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote @.) (See footnote +.)
30,000 Miles (50 000 km)
0 Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5-58 for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote @.) (See footnote +.)
0 Replace engine air cleaner filter. An Emission Control Service.
6-6
37,500 Miles (62 500 km)
0 Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5-58 for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote @.)(See footnote +.)
45,000 Miles (75 000 km)
01 Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote f.)
0 Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5-58 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote @.) (See footnote +-)
50,000 Miles (83000 km)
0 Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under anoyf these conditions, change the fluid and filterat 100,000miles (166 000 km).
52,500 Miles (87 500 km)
Ll Rotate tires. See Tire lnspection and Rotation on page 5-58for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote @.)(See footnote +.)
60,000 Miles (100 000 km)
0 Rotate tires. See Tire lnspection and Rotation on page 5-58 for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote @.)(See footnote +.)
U Replace engine air cleaner filter. A n Emission Control Service.
67,500 Miles (112500 km)
0 Rotate tires. See Tire lnspec?imand Rcrkltbn on page 5-58 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote @.) (See footnote +.)
75,000 Miles (125000 km)
Inspect engine air cleanerfilter if you are driving in dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary. An tmlsslon Conrroi service. (See iooinoie f . j
Rotate tires. See Tire lnspection and Rotation on page 5-58for proper rotation pattern and additional
Iinformation. (See footnote @.) (See footnote +.)
82,500 Miles (137 500 km)
0 Rotate tires. See Tire lnspection and Rotation on page 5-58 for proper rotation pattern and additional information.(See footnote @.) (See footnote +.)
90,000 Miles (150 000 km)
0 Replace engine air cleaner filter. A n Emission Control Service.
il Rotate tires. See Tire lnspection and Rotation on
page 5-58 for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote @.) (See footnote +.)
97,500 Miles (162 500 km)
0 Rotate tires. See Tire lnspection and Rotation on page 5-58for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote 69.) (See footnote +.)
6-7
100,000 Miles (166 000 km)
0 Inspect spark plug wires. An Emission Control Service.
0 Replace spark plugs. An Emission Control Service.
0 Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
0 If you haven't used your vehicle under severe service conditions listed previously and, therefore, haven't changed your automatic transaxle fluid, change both the fluid and filter.
150,000 Miles (240 000 km)
0 Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every 60 months since last service, whichever occurs first). See Engine Coolant on page5-22 for what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck. Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap. An Emission Control Service.
Ll Inspect engine accessory drive belt. An Emission Control Service.
6-8
Part B: Owner Checks and Services
Listed in this part are owner checks and services which should be performed at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety, dependability and emission control performance of your vehicle.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once. Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown in Part D.
At Each Fuel Fill
It is important for you or a service station attendant to perform these underhood checksat each f m ! ti!!.
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if necessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-13 for further details.
Engine Coolant Level Check
Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL@ coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant on page 5-22 for further details.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield washer tank and add the proper fluid if necessary. See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5-36 for further details.
At Least Once a Month
Tire !nf!atisn Check
Make sure tries are inflated to the correct pressures. Don't forget to check your spare tire. See Tires on page 5-55 for further details.
Cassette Deck Service
6-9
At Least Twice a Year
Restraint System Check
Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag coverings, and have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system does not need regular maintenance.)
Wiper Blade Check
Inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking. Replace blade inserts that appear worn or damagedor that streak or miss areas of the windshield. Also see Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle on page 5-90.
Spare Tire Check
At least twice a year, after the monthly inflation check of the spare tire determines that the spare is inflated to the correct tire inflation pressure, make sure that the spare tire is stored securely. Push, pull, and then try to rotate or turn the tire. If it moves, use the folding wrench to tighten the cable. See Changing a Flat Tire on page5-67.
6-10
Weatherstrip Lubrication
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold, damp weather more frequent application may be required. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and lubricants on page 6-15.
Automatic Transaxle Check
Check the transaxle fluid level; add if needed. See Automatic Transaxle Fluid on page 5-19. A fluid loss may indicate a problem. Check the system and repair if needed.
At Least Once a Year
Key Lock Cylinders Service
Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant specified in Part D.
Body Lubrication Service
Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood latch assemblies, secondary latches, pivots, spring anchor and release pawl, hood and door hinges, rearfolding seats and liftgate hinges. Part D tells you whatto use. More frequent lubrication may be required when exposed to a corrosive environment.
Starter Switch Chec
Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock Control System Check
When you are doing this cheek, the vehicle could move suddenly. If it does, you or others could be injured. Follow the steps below.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-26 if necessary. Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The starter should work only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If the starter works in any other position, your vehicle needs service.
en you are doing this check, the vehicle could move suddenly. If it does, you or others could be injured. Follow the steps below.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-26 if necessary. Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the key to the ON position, but don't start the engine. Without applying the regular brake, try to move the shift lever out of PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever moves out of PARK (P), your vehicle needs service.
6-1 1
Ignition Transaxle Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn the ignition key to OFF in each shift lever position.
The key should turn to OFF only when the shift lever is in PARK (P). The key should come out only in OFF.
Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle Park (P) Mechanism Check
W-.-n you are c.-.ng this che .-.,you1 ~ ehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be injured and property could be damaged. Make
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in
case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the regular brake at once should the vehicle begin to move.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the parking brake.
To check the parking brake's holding ability: With the engine running and transaxle in NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking brake only.
To check the PARK (P) mechanism's holding ability: With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Then release the parking brake followed by the regular brake.
UnderbodFylushinSgervice
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris can collect.
6-12
Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections
Listed in this part are inspections and services which should be performed at least twice a year (for instance, each spring and fall). You should let your dealer's service department or other qualified service center do these jobs. Make sure any necessary repairsare completed at once.
Proper procedures to perform these services may be found in a service manual. See Service Publications Ordering lnformation on page 7-9.
Exhaust System Inspection
Inspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect the body near the exhaust system. Look for broken, damaged, missing or out-of-position parts as well as open seams, holes, loose connections or other conditions which could cause a heat build-up in the floor pan or could let exhaust fumes into the vehicle. See ,Engine Exhaust on page 2-31.
Fuel System Inspection
Inspect the complete fuel system for damage or leaks.
Steering, Suspension and Front
Drive Axle Boot and Seal Inspection
Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering system for damaged, loose or missing parts, signs of wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect the power steering lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Clean and then inspect the drive axle boot seals for damage, tears or leakage. Replace seals if necessary.
Engine Cooling System Inspection
Inspect the hoses and have them replaced if they are cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes, fittings and clamps; replace as needed. Clean the outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test of the cooling system and pressure cap is recommended at least once a year.
6-13
Throttle System Inspection
Inspect the throttle system for interference or binding, and for damaged or missing parts. Replace parts as needed. Replace any components that have high effort or excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator and cruise control cables.
Transfer Case (Power Transfer Unit) and Carrier Assembly-Differential (Rear Drive Module) All-Wheel Drive Inspection
Every 12 months or at engine oil change intervals, check rear differential and transfer case and add lubricant when necessary. A fluid loss could indicate a problem; check and have it repaired, if needed. Check vent hoses at transfer case and differential for kinks and proper installation.
Brake System Inspection
Inspect the complete system. Inspect brakelines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface condition. For vehicles with rear drum brakes, also inspect drum brake linings for wear and cracks. Inspect other brake parts, including drums, wheel cylinders, calipers, parking brake, etc. Check parking brake adjustment. You may need to have your brakes inspected more often if your driving habits or conditions result in frequent braking.
6-14
Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number or specification may beobtained from your dealer.
Fluid/Lubricant
IEngine Oil
Engine oil with the American
Petroleum Institute Certified for Gasoline Engines starburst symbol of the proper viscosity. To determine the preferred viscosity for your vehicle's engine, see Engine Oil on page 5-13.
Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant. See Engine Coolant on
Fpage 5-22.
tHydraulic Brake Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
!1~ GM Optikleen Washer Solvent or
Washer Solvent equivalent.
Power Steering GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part
System
No. U.S. 1052884, in Canada
993294, or equivalent).
DEX!?Ol\l-!!! Autnmatlc. Transmission
Fluid.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Key Lock Cylinders
Mulit-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in Canada 10953474, or equivalent).
Carrier Assembly Differential (Rear Drive
Module) and Transfer Case (Power Transfer Unit)
VERSATRAKTMFluid (GM Part No. U.S. 12378514, in Canada 88901045).
Hood Latch Assembly,
Secondary Latch, Piwts,
Spring Anchor and Release Pawl
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, in Canada 992723, or equivalent) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGl #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Hood and Door Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Hinaes. Rear (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in Folding Seat Canada 10953474, or equivalent).
I ?/?le2thersfrip
Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part NoU. .S. 12345579, in Canada 1974984. or equivalent).
6-15
Part E: Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading and who performedthe service and any additional informationfrom "Owner Checks andServices" or "Periodic Maintenance" on the following record pages. Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts. Your ownerinformation portfolio is a convenientplace to store them.
Maintenance Record
6-16
Maintenance Record (cont'd)
6-17
MaintenanceRecord (cont'd)
6-18
Section 7 Customer Assistance Information
Customer Assistance Information ...................... 7.2 Customer Satisfaction Procedure ...................... 7.2
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY) Users ................................ 7.3
Customer Assistance Offices ............................ 7.4
GM MobilityProgramforPersons with Disabilities................................................. -7-5
Roadside Assistance Program .......................... 7.5
Courtesy Transportation ....................
.......-7-6
Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government ............................ 7-8
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government ................................. 7-9
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .......7-9 Service Publications Ordering Information ...........7.9
7-1
Customer Assistance Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your dealer and to Buick. Normally, any concerns with the sales transaction or the operation of your vehicle will be resolved by your dealer's sales or service departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best intentions of all concerned, misunderstandingscan occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of dealership management. Normally, concerns can be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts manager, contact the owner of the dealership or the general manager.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership management, it appears your concern cannot be resolved by the dealership without further help, contact the Buick Customer Assistance Center by calling 1-800-521-7300. In Canada, contact GM of Canada Customer Communication Centre in Oshawa by calling 1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have the following information available to give the Customer Assistance Representative:
Vehicle Identification Number (This is available from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the top left of the instrument panel and visible through the windshield.)
Dealership name and location
Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
When contacting Buick, please remember that your concern will likely be resolved at a dealer's facility. That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you have a concern.
STEP THREE: Both General Motors and your dealer are committed to making sure you are completely satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, you should file with the GM/BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional rights you may have. Canadian owners refer to your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet for information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
7-2
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Although you may be required to resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action, use of the program is free of charge and your case will generally be heard within 40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given in your case, you may reject it and proceed with any other venue for relief available to you.
You may contact the BBB using the toll-free telephone number or write them at the following address:
BBB Auto Line Ccmci! of Better Business Bureaus, !nc. 4200 Wilson Boulevard Suite 800 Arlington, VA 22203-1804
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the District
of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age, mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves the right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue its participation in this program.
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs), Buick has TTY equipment available at its Customer Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate with Buick by dialing: 1-800-83-BUICK. (TTY users in Canada can dial I -860-263-3830.j
7-3
Customer AssistanceOffices
Buick encourages customers to call the toll-free number for assistance. If a U S . customer wishes to write to Buick, the letter should be addressed to Buick's Customer Assistance Center.
United States
Buick Customer Assistance Center P.O. Box 33136 Detroit, MI 48232-51 36
1-800-521-7300 1-800-832-8425 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs)) Roadside Assistance: 1-800-252-1112 Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From Puerto Rico: 1-800-496-9992 (English) 1-800-496-9993 (Spanish) Fax Number: 31 3-38-10022
From U.S. Virgin Islands 1-800-496-9994 Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Canada
General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre, 163-005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
1-800-263-3777 (English) 1-800-263-7854 (French) 1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs)) Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
All Overseas Locations
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
Mexico, Central America and Caribbean IslandsKountries (Except
Puerto Rico and U S . Virgin Islands)
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V. Customer Assistance Center Paseo de la Reforma # 2740 Col. Lomas de Bezares C.P. 11910 Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000 Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
7-4
GM Mobility Program for Persons
with Disabilities
This program, available to qualified applicants, can reimburse you up to $1,000 toward aftermarket driver or passenger adaptive equipment you may require for your vehicle (hand controls. wheelchair/scooter lifts, etc.).
This programcan also provide you with free resource
information, such as aredariver assessment centers and
mobility equipmentinstallers.The program is available for
a limitedperiod of time from the date of vehicle
.. purchase/lease. See youdrealer for more details or call
ihe lvlobiiiiy A . .
UIVI
nnqc A . . ! - * - . - ^ ^ O-.-&.-..- & 4 O A A qqr)
n s w s m I L ~ : v z t ILGl a r I - o u u - ~ L ~ - w w .
Text telephone(TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.
GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program. Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. All TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.
Roadside Assistance Program
Buick Motor Division is proud to offer Buick Premium Roadside Assistance to customers for vehicles covered under the 3 year/36,000 mile (60 000 km) new car warranty (whichever occurs first).
Our commitment to Buick owners has always included superior service through our network of Buick dealers. Buick Premium Roadside Assistance provides an extra measure of convenience and security.
Buick's Roadside Assistance toll-free number is staffed by a team of technically trained advisors, who are available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
We take anxiety out of uncertain situations by providing
minor repair iriformatiori over the phme cr maklng
arrangements to tow your vehicle to the nearest Buick dealer.
We will provide the following services for 3 years/36,000 miles (60 000 km), at no expense to you:
Lock-out service (identification required)
0 Tow to nearest dealership for warranty service
Change a flat tire
7-5
We have quick, easy access to telephone numbers of the following additional services depending on your needs:
Hotels Glass replacement
Tire repair facilities Rental vehicle or taxis
Airports or train stations Police, fire department or hospitals
In many instances, mechanical failures are covered under Buick's comprehensive warranty. However, when other services are utilized, our advisors will explain any payment obligations you might incur. For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, please provide the following information to give the advisor:
Location of vehicle
Telephone number of your location
Vehicle model, year and color
Mileage of vehicle Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Vehicle license plate number
7-6
Buick reserves the right to limit services or reimbursement to an owner or driver when, in Buick's judgement, the claims become excessive in frequency or type of occurrence.
While we hope you never have the occasion to use our service, it is added security whiletravelingfor you and your family. Remember, we're only a phone call away. Buick Roadside Assistance: 1-800-252-1112, text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-888-889-2438.
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive Roadside Assistance program accessible from anywhere in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the Warranty and Owner Assistance Information book.
Courtesy Transportation
Buick has always exemplified quality and value in its offering of motor vehicles. To enhance your ownership experience, we and our participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy Transportation, a customer support program for new vehicles. The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to retail purchase/leasecustomers in conjunctionwith the Bumper-to-Bumper coverageprovided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportation options are available when warrantyrepairs are required.This will reduce your inconvenienceduring warranty repairs.
Plan Ahead When Possible
When your vehicle requires warranty service, you should contact your dealer and request an appointment. By scheduling a service appointment and advising your service consultant of your transportation needs, your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service department immediately, keep driving it until it can be scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership, let them know this, and ask for instructions.
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle
off for service, you are urged to do so as early in
the work day as possible to allow for same day repair.
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed while you wait. However, if you are unable to wait Buick helps minimize your inconvenience by providing several transportation options. Depending on the circumstances, you deaier can oiier you one ui iire loiiowirly.
Shuttle Service
Participatingdealers can provide you with shuttle service to get to your destination with minimal interruption of your daily schedule. This includes a one way shuttle ride to a destination up to 10 miles from the dealership.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs, reimbursement up to $30 per day (five days maximum) may be available for the use of public transportation such a s taxi or bus. In addition, should your arrange transportation through a friend or relative, reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses up to $10 per day (five day maximum may be available). Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported by original receipts.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
When your vehicle is unavailable due to overnight
Lvarranty repairs, yo^ dealer may arrange to pmvide
you with a courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for a
rental vehicle you obtained, at actual cost, up to a
maximum of $30.00 per day supported by receipts. This
requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement
and meet sate, local and rental vehicle provider
re.qu. irements. Requirements vary and may include UyG i n - , -,n,IV.. I/-
.l-,-.
I I Ill I l l I IUI I 1
v n m , ,;r*mP.ntc.
, r q n m n on\,nrqn* prnrlit.
1 G q u r l CIi I i b i I L O , I #I O U I U I luu v u v
uyv, v a uull
card, etc. You are responsible for taxes, levies,
usage fees, excessive mileage or rental usage beyond
the completion of the repair.
Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as a courtesy rental.
7-7
Additional Program Information
Courtesy Transportation is available during the Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period, but it is not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled Warranty and Owner Assistance Information furnished with each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage information.
Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating dealers and all program options, such as shuttle service, may not be available at every dealer. Please contact your dealer for specific information about availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.
Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during the Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty, alternative transportation may be available under the Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult your dealer for details.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify, change or discontinue Courtesy Transportationat any time and to resolveall questions of claim eligibility pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein at its sole discretion.
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect whichcould cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer or General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393(or 366-0123 in the Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the hotline.
7-8
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you should immediately notify Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to:
Transport Canada 330 Sparks Street Tower C Ottawa Ontario K1A ON5
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in a situation like this, we certainly hope you'll notify us.
Please call us at 1-800-521-7300, or write:
Buick Customer Assistance Center P.O. Box 33136 Detroit, MI 48232-51 36
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854(French). Or, write:
General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre, 163-005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa, Ontario L1 H 8P7
Service Publications Ordering Information
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information on engines, transmission, axle, suspension, brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc. RETAIL SELL PRICE: $120.00
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer Case Unit Repair Manual
This manual provides information on unit repair service procedures, adjustments, and specifications for GM transmissions, transaxles, and transfer cases. RETAIL SELL PRICE: $50.00
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins give technical service information needed tn knowledseahly service General Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle. In Canada, information pertaining to Product Service Bulletins can be obtained by contacting your General Motors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE (1-800-463-7483).
7-9
Owner's Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners and intended to provide basic operational information about the vehicle. The owner's manual will include the Maintenance Schedule for all models.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner's Manual, and Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00
Without Portfolio: Owner's Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Service Publications are available for current and past model GM vehicles. To request an order form, please specify year and model name of the vehicle.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
- Monday-Friday 8:OO AM 6:OO PM Eastern
Time
For Credit Card Orders Only (VISA-Mastercard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated P. 0 . Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make checks payable in U.S. funds.
7-10
Supplement to the 2003 Pontiac Aztek and 2003 Buick Rendezvous Owner's Manual
This information replaces the Audio Speakers text for the "Entertainment System" on pag3e- 102 for the 2003 Pontiac Aztek and page3-103 for the2003 Buick Rendezvous.
Audio Speakers
Audio from the DVD Player or auxiliary devices can be heard through the following possible sources:
WirelessHeadphones
Vehicle'sSpeakers
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) Jacks (if equipped). Plug the wired headphones into the jacks on the RSA system.
Only one audio source can be heardOhrough the
\!~hm~!e'~ c-rn-o-a._b-r"-c 2t 2 time.
You can listen to the entertainment system or an auxiliary device through allof the vehicle's speakers when the following occurs:
The RSA system (if equipped) is off,
a DVD or auxiliary device is playing, and
the front audio system is on and either the CD/AUX or the TAPE/CD button is pressed to enable the entertainment system.
The front audio system will display RSE when the entertainment system is on and RSE OFF when it is off.
Litho in U.S.A. Part No. 03AZRENDO1
`Copyright General Motors Corporation 2002 All Rights Reserved
To turn the vehicle's speakers on and off, press either the CD/AUX or the TAPE/CD button on the front audio system. The audio from the entertainment system can be heard through both the wireless headphones and the vehicle's speakers at the same time.
You can listen to the entertainment system through the wired headphone jacks on the RSA syste(imf equipped) when the following occurs:
The RSA system is on,
a DVD or auxiliary device is playing, and
RSE is displayed on the front audio system by pressing theTAPEKD button on theRSA system.
The volume on the audio system may vary when switching between a radio station, CD, DVD, cassette or auxiliary device.
If there is a decreased audio signal during CD or DVD play, you may hear a low "hissing" noise through the speakers andlor headphones. If the hissing sound in the wireless headphones seems excessive, make sure that the headphone batteries are fully charged. Some amount of hissing is normal.
2
A
About Driving Your Vehicle .................................... ii Accessory inflator ........................................... 5-65
AccessoryPowerOutlets ................................. 3-24
AddingWasher Fluid ....................................... 5-36 AdditionalProgram Information ....................... 7-8
Additives,Fuel ............................................. 5-6 Add-on ElectricalEquipment ............................ 5-96
Adjusting the Speakers
(Balance/Fade) ........................ 3-72, 3-80, 3-91 Air Bag
ReadinessLight .......................................... 3-39
Air Bag Systems ............................................. 1-74 HowDoesan AirBagRestrain? .................... 1-81
Servicing YoAuirr Bag-Equipped Vehicie ......... 41-00 3 WhatMakesanAirBag Inflate? .................... 1-81
What Will YouSee After an Air Bag Inflates? .................................................. 1-82
WhenShouldanAir Bag Inflate? ................... 1-80
Where Are the Air Bags? .............................. 1-77 Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 5-18
LocatioAnlsl Overseas
...................................... r7-4
All-Wheel Drive ...................................... 5-46, 5-86
All-WheelDriveDisableWarning Message .......... 3-52
All-Wheel-Drive(AWD)System ......................... 4-12
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels .................. 5-91
AM ............................................................. 3-114
Antenna,Integrated Windshield ....................... 3-116
Antenna. XMTMSatellite Radio System ............. 3-1 16 Anti-lock Brake System(ABS) ............................ 4-8 Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light .............. 3-41 Appearance Care ............................................ 5-87
Care of Safety Belts .................................... 5-90
Chemical Paint Spotting ............................... 5-93 Cleaning the Inside of YourVehicle ................ 5-87 Cleaning the Outside ofYour Vehicle .............. 5-90 Finish Damage ............................................ 5-92 GMVehicle Care/Appearance Materials .......... 5-93 Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 5-92 Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-92 Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-90 Arming with the Power Lock Switch ................... 2-17
Arming with the Remote Keyless Entry
Transmitter ................................................. 2-17
Ashtrays ........................................................ 3-25
Audio Speakers ............................................ 3-103
Audio System(s) .........................
......... 3-69
Audio Systems
Audio Steering Wheel Controls ................. 3-113
-Care of Your Cassette Tape Player ............... 3-1 14
bare
ol .I
nn
YOU[ UJ
ai-t-uI ur \ \vrun
nl-..--
I-I~
~...I.............
13 IiE
d -1 I d
Care ofYour CDs and DVDs ....................... 3-115
DAB Radio Antenna System ........................ 3-116
Integrated Windshield Antenna ..................... 3-116
Radio with Cassette and CD ......................... 3-76 Radio with CD ............................................ 3-69
Radio with Six-Disc CD ............................. 3r\ -nun ~
1
Audio Systems (cont.)
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ............................... 3-110
Setting the Time .......................................... 3-69
Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................... 3-112
Understanding Radio Reception ................... 3-114
XMTMSatellite Radio Antenna System ........... 3-1I6
Auto DoorLocWUnlock .................................... 3-63
Automatic Door LocWUnlock ............................. 2-52
Automatic Headlamp System ............................ 3-14
Automatic Level Control ................................... 4-36
Automatic Operation ........................................ 3-31
Automatic Transaxle
Fluid ........................................
........... 5-19
Operation ................................................... 2-23
Automatic Transaxle Check .............................. 6-10
Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock Control
System Check ............................................. 6-11
Backing Up .................................................... 4-41
Battery .......................................................... 5-40
Battery Replacement ......................................... 2-7
Battery Run-Down Protection ........................ 3-18
Before Leavinogn a Long Trip ......
....... 4-24
Before You Drive ..............................
...... 3-101
Bench Seat,Split ............................................. 1-9
Body Lubrication Service .................................. 6-10
Brake
Low Fluid WarningMessage ......................... 3-53
Parking ...................................................... 2-26
System Inspection ....................................... 6-14
SystemWarningLight .................................. 3-40
Brake Fluid .................................................... 5-37
Brake System WarningLight ............................ 3-40
Brake Wear ................................................... 5-39
Brakes .......................................................... 5-37
Braking ........................................................... 4-7
Braking in Emergencies ................................... 4-10
Break-In, NeVwehicle .........................
..... 2-20
Bulb Replacement ...............................
..... 5-48
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and
Parking Lamps ...................................... 5-50
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-48
Headlamps ................................................. 5-48
Replacement Bulbs ...................................... 5-52
Taillamps and Back-up Lamps ....................... 5-51
Taillamps, Turn Signal, and Stoplamps ............ 5-50
Buying NewTires ........................................... 5-60
C
California Fuel ..... ................... .................. 5-6 Canada ........................................ .................. 7-4 Canadian Owners .......................... ..................... ii Canadian Roadside Assistance ........ ...............7-6
2
CancelingtheRearDoor Security Locks ............ 2-10 Checking Your Restraint Systems .......... ..... 1-84
Capacities and Specifications .......................... 5-102 Chemical Paint Spotting ................................... 5-93
Captain ChairsR, ear ....................................... 1-14 Child Restraints
CarbonMonoxide ........................... 4-27, 4-36, 4-31
Child Restraint Systems ............................... 1-55
Care of Safety Belts ................................................ 5-90
Infants and Young Children ........................... 1-52 Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Care Cassette Tape Player .................................
CDandDVDPlayer ...................................
3-1 14 3-1 15
ChSildyrsetenm()LATCH
..........................
Older Children .............................................
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
1-64 1-49
CDasnDdVDs
......................................... 3-115
CargoLamp ............................................... 3-18
the LATCSHystem ................................... 1-66 Securing a Child Restraint in aCenter
Carrier Assembly-Differential
Seat Rear
Position ................................... 1-69
(RearDriveModule) .................................... 5-47
Securing a Child Restraint in Raear
CassetteDeckService ...................................... 6-9 Cassette TapeMessages ................................. 3-86 CDAdapter Kits ............................................. 3-86
Outside Seat Position ...............................
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position ...................................
Cell PhoneStorageArea ................................. 2-41
CenteRreaPrassenger Position,Safety Belts ....... 1-42
Chains, Tires .................................................. 5-64
EngCinheange
Oil Message ............................ 3-50
ChSayrsgtienmg
Indicator Message .................. 3-48
Check
EngineLight ............................................... 3-42
Top Strap ................................................... Top Strap Anchor Location ............................
Where to Put the Restraint ........................... Cigarette Lighter ............................................. Cleaning
Inside sf Ysur `!ohir!n .................................
Tire Pressure System ................................... 5-56
OutsYioduer of
Vehicle ................................
Checking Coolant ............................................ M5a-in2t3enanceUnderbody
...............................
Checking Engine Oil ........................................ Sc5re-e1n4
Video
...........................1..6...............
Checking or Replacing the Engine Air CleanedFilter ................................D..V...D.....Y..o..ur 5-18
Weatherstrips .............................................. Player .......................................
Checking Things Under the Hood ...................... 5-10 Cleaning Exterior Lampsiienses .......................
1-66
1-71 1-59 1-60 1-58 3-25
5-87
~
5-90 5-92 3-1 5-90
35-1--Y1-5U
3
Climate Control
Dual Automatic ............................................ 3-31 Climate Control System ................................... 3-26
Dual .......................................................... 3-28 Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 3-34 Compact Disc Errors ........................... 3-76, 3-87 Compact Disc Messages .... ..................... 3-101 Compact SpareTire ........................................ 5-85 Compass Variance .......................................... 3-56 Content Theft-Deferrent .................................... 2-16
Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-7 Convenience Center,Rear ............................... 2-46 Convenience Net ............................................ 2-45
Coolant Engine Temperature Gage ............................ 3-42 Engine Temperature Warning Message ........... 3-48 Heater,Engine ............................................ 2-22
Cooling System .............................................. 5-28 Cruise Control ................................................ 3-10 Cupholder(s) .................................................. 2-41 Current and Past Model Order Forms ................ 7-10
Customer Assistance Information Courtesy Transportation .................................. 7-6
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone(TTY) Users ............................... 7-3 Customer Assistance Offices ........................... 7-4 Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... 7-2 GM Mobility Program for Persons with
Disabilities ................................................ 7-5
Customer Assistance Information (cont.) Reporting Safety Defectsto General Motors .. .. 7-9 Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government ............................ 7-9 Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government .......................... 7-8
Roadside Assistance Program ......................... 7-5 Service Publications OrderingInformation ......... 7-9
DAB Radio ................................................... 3-114 Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ......................... 3-13 Defensive Driving ............................................. 4-3 Defogging and Defrosting ................. 3-27, 3-30, 3-33 Delayed Lighting ............................................. 3-16 Delayed Locking ............................... 2-9, 2-53, 2-64 Dinghy Towing ................................................ 4-33 Disarming with the Remote Keyless
Entry Transmitter ......................................... 2-17 Disarming withYourKey .................................. 2-17 Doing Your OwnServiceWork ........................... 5-4 Dolly Towing .................................................. 4-34 Door
AjarWarningMessage ................................. 3-51 Delayed Locking ........................................... 2-9 Locks .......................................................... 2-8 Power Door Locks ......................................... 2-9
4
Door (cont.)
ProgrammableAutomaticDoorLocks . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Rear Security Locks ..................................... 2-10
Driver Four-WayManualSeat .................................. 1-3
Position,SafetyBelt ..................................... 1-28
DriverBehavior ................................................ 4-2
Driver Information Center(DIC) ......................... 3-56
DIC Controls and Displays ............................ 3-58 DICVehicle Personalization .......................... 3-59
Driving
At Night ..................................................... 4-18 City ........................................................... 4-22
Defensive ..................................................... 4-3
-Drunken ....................................................... 4-4
tnvironment ................................................. 4-2
Freeway ................................................. 4-23
Hill andMountainRoads ............. ....., .... 4-25 InRainandonWetRoads ....................... 4-19
Winter ........................................................ 4-27
Driving On Grades .......................................... 4-42
DrivingonSnoworIce .................................... 4-28
Urrvlng
I nrough ueep
Standing i a i e r
...............
4
-Ln
A
I
Driving ThroughFlowingWater ......................... 4-21
Driving with a Trailer ....................................... 4-40
DualAutomaticClimate Control System ............. 3-31
Dual Climate ControlSystem ............................ 3-28
DVD
Care of Your ............................................. 3-115
Care of Your DVD Player ............................ 3-115
Cleaning the Video Screen .......................... 3-116
Cleaning Your DVD Player .......................... 3-115
Distortion .................................................. 3-113
Entertainment System ................................. 3-101
DVD Messages ............................................. 3-105
DVD Player .......................................
.... 3-103
E
Electrical System Add-on Equipment ...................................... 5-96
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 5-96 Headlamp Wiring ......................................... 5-96
Power Windows and Other Power Options ...... 5-96
Windshield WiperFuses ............................... 5-96
Emissions inspection andMaintenance Programs ..........................................
, ..... 3-45
Engine Air CleanedFilter ......................................... 5-18
Battery ....................................................... 5-40
Change Oil Message ................................... 3-50
Check and Service EngineSoon Light ............ 3-42 Coolant ...................................................... 5-22
5
Engine (cont.) Coolant Heater ............................................ 2-22 Coolant TemperatureGage ........................... 3-42 Coolant TemperatureWarningMessage .......... 3-48 Cooling System Inspection ............................ 6-13 Engine Compartment Overview ...................... 5-12 Exhaust ..................................................... 2-31 Low Oil Level Message ................................ 3-50 Oil ............................................................. 5-13 Overheating ................................................ 5-25 Starting ...................................................... 2-21
Engine Coolant Level Check .............................. 6-9 Engine Oil Additives ........................................ 5-16 Engine Oil Level Check ..................................... 6-9
Engine Oil ScheduledMaintenance ..................... 6-5 Engine Specifications ..................................... 5-103
Entering ProgrammingMode .................... 2-50, 2-60 Entertainment System .................................... 3-101
Cleaning the Video Screen .......................... 3-116 Cleaning Your DVD Player .......................... 3-115 DVD Distortion .......................................... 3-113 Entry Lighting ................................................. 3-16 Erasing HomeLink@Buttons .............................. 2-40 Exit Lighting ................................................... 3-17 Exiting Programming Mode ....................... 2-56, 2-68 Express-Down Window .................................... 2-14 Extender, Safety Belt ....................................... 1-48 Exterior Lamps ............................................... 3-13
F
Fabric/Carpet ......................
.... 5-87
Filter
EnginAeCirleaner
............... ................ 5-18
Finding aPTY Station ................................. 3-73
Finding a PTY Station
(RDS, XMTMand DAB) ......................... 3-80, 3-92
Finding a Station ............................ 3-70,3-78, 3-90
Finish Care .................................................... 5-91
Finish Damage ............................................... 5-92
Flash-to-Pass ................................................... 3-9
Flat Tire ........................................................ 5-66
Flat Tire,Changing ......................................... 5-67
Floor ConsoleFuseBlock ................................ 5-97
Fluid
Automatic Transaxle ..................................... 5-19
Power Steering ....................................... 5-35
Windshield Washer ..., ........................... 5-36
FM Stereo .................................................... 3-114
FogLamps .................................................... 3-14
Folding or Reclining theSeatbacks ............. 1-9, 1-14
Folding the Seatback ....................................... 1-18
Following Distance .......................................... 4-41
Footnotes ........................................................ 6-5
Four-WayManualDriverSeat ............................ 1-3
Front Armrest Storage Area .............................. 2-42
Front Console Storage Area ............................. 2-42
6
FronRteadinLgamps
........................
... 3-17
Fuel ........................................................... 5-5
Additives ...................................................... 5-6
California Fuel .............................................. 5-6
FillingaPortableFuel Container ..................... 5-9
Filling YourTank ........................................... 5-7
Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 5-7 Gage ...................................................... 3-46
GasoOlincteane
........
....................... 5-5
GasolineSpecifications .............................. 5-5
LowWarningMessage ................................. 3-53
System Inspection .............................
... 6-13
Fuses Fuseasnd Circuit Breakers .................
... 5-96
Windshield Wiper ..................................... 5-96
G
Gage
EngCinoeolaTnetmperature
...
........... 3-42
Fuel ....................................
spPPC?Cln?PtPr . . . . . . . . . .
........... 3-46
. . . . . . . 3-37
Tachometer ................................................. 3-38
Garage Door Opener ....................................... 2-37
Gasoline Octane ........................................................ 5-5
Specifications ............................................... 5-5
........ 2-39 uauz Pntrr
nnfirqtnr
W ~ GaIlul
qnrl CAI IU
PQnqdiQn
VUI IUUICII I
P
I
rI v nyntruaamI I
m
I8 I
inn
I I ty
Glass Surfaces ............................................... 5-89 GloveBox ..................................................... 2-41
GM Mobility Program for Persons with Disabilities ................................................ 7-5
Hatch Ajar WarninMg essage .....
. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
Hazard Warning Flashers .................................... 3.6
Head Restraints ............................................... 1-8
Headlamp Exit Delay ....................... 2-51, 2-15, 2-60 HeadlampHigh/Low-BeamChanger .................... 3-8
Headlamp Wiring ............................................ 5-96
Headlamps .................................................... 5-48
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 5-48
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and Parking Lamps ......................................... 5-50
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-48
Headphones ................
...................... 3-102
Head-Up Display (HUD) ....................
........ 3-19
HeatedSeats ................................................ 1-6
HighbeamOuWt arninaMessage
......, ........ 3-55
Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-25
Hill andMountainRoads .................................. 4-25 Hitches .......................................................... 4-39
HomeLink Transmitter ...................................... 2-37 HomeLinkTransmitter,Programming .................. 2-38
7
Hood Checking Things Under ............................ 5-10 Release ..................................................... 5-11
Horn ............................................................... 3-6 How the SystemWorks ................................... 3-23 How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Recovery Tank ............................................ 5-30 How to Add Coolant to the Radiator .................. 5-32 How to Add Fluid ............................................ 5-21 How to Check ........................................ 5-20, 5-56 How to CheckPower Steering Fluid .................. 5-36 How to Use This Manual ...................................... ii How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-27 Hydroplaning .................................................. 4-21
I
I1 No Steam Is ComingFrom Your Engine .......... 5-27
I1 Steam Is ComingFrom Your Engine ............... 5-26 I1 the Light Is Flashing ..................................... 3-44 If the Light Is OnSteady ................................. 3-44 If You AreStuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ....... 4-32 If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer ..................... 4-37 If You'reCaught in a Blizzard ........................... 4-30 Ignition Positions ............................................. 2-20 Ignition Transaxle LockCheck .......................... 6-12 Indicators ....................................................... 3-35
Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 1-52
Inflation ..PrTeirsesure
.. ........... ......... 5-56
Inspection
BrakeSystem ......................................... 6-14
Engine Cooling System ................................ 6-13
ExhaustSystem .......................................... 6-13
Fuel System ............................................... 6-13
Part C - Periodic Maintenance ....................... 6-13 Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle
Boot and Seal ......................................... 6-13
Throttle System ........................................... 6-14
Transfer Care (Power Transfer Unit) and
Carrier Assembly-Differential
(Rear Drive Module) All-Wheel Drive ........... 6-14
Instrument Panel
Cluster ....................................................... 3-36
Overview ..................................................... 3-4
Switchbank ................................................. 3-18
Instrument Panel Brightness ............................. 3-15
Integrated Windshield Antenna ........................ 3-116
Interior Lamps ................................................ 3-15
Interior Lamps Control ..................................... 3-15
Interior Lighting Delay ...................................... 3-61
Interior Lighting On ......................................... 3-62
Interior Plastic Components ..................
.... 5-89
Jump Starting ...
.. 5-41
8
Light (cont.) Safety Belt Reminder ................................... 3-38
KeyLockCylindersService .............................. 6-10
TCS Warning Light ...................................... 3-41
KeylessEntrySystem ....................................... 2-4
Traction Control System(TCS)Warning .......... 3-41
Keys ................................
................ 2-3 Lighted Visor Vanity Mirrors .............................. 2-15
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-34 Lock Feedback ............................................... 3-66
Locking, Delayed ............................................ 2-53
Lockout Protection ....................................... 2-11
Lamps
Exterior .....
.................................. 3-13
Locks Delayed Locking ........................................ 2-9
Interior ....................................................... 3-15
Door ........................................................... 2-8
LampsonReminder ..................................... 3-13
Lap-Shoulder Belt .......... .......... 1-28, 1-39, 1-42
Leaving Your Vehicle .................................... 2-11 Lockout Protection ....................................... 2-11
LATCHSystem Chi!d Restraints ........................................ 1-64
Power Door .................................................. 2-9
Programmabie Automatic Door Locks ............... 2-9
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-10
theLATCHSystem ................................... Leather .........................................................
1-66 5-89
Loss of Control ...............................................
4-16
Low Brake Fluid Warning Message .................... 3-53
Leaving Your Vehicle ....................................... 2-1 1 LeavingYour Vehicle With the Engine Running ...... 2-29
LowEngine Oil Level Message .........................
3-50
Liftgate ..........................................................
Llftg2k !?e!e2se .................................
~
~
~
~
~
~
2-1 1 7-17
Low Low
MessagLeow
Fuel WarningMessage .............................
Oil Pressure Message ...............................
1 Ire
..........................................
3-53
3-4-9-
3-DW
Light
Air Bag Readiness ....................................... 3-39 Anti-Lock BrakeSystemWarning ................... 3-41
LowWasher Fluid WarningMessage ................. 3-52
Lumbar Manual Controls ........................................ 1-5
BrakeSystemWarning ................................. 3-40
Malfunction Indicator .................................... 3-42
9
M
Maintenance. Normal Replacement Parts .......... 5-104
Maintenance Schedule
AtEach Fuel Fill ........................................... 6-9
At Least Once a Month .................................. 6-9
At Least OnceaYear .................................. 6-10
At Least Twice a Year .................................. 6-10
BrakeSystem Inspection .............................. 6-14
Engine Cooling System Inspection ................. 6-13
Exhaust System Inspection ........................... 6-13
Fuel System Inspection ................................ 6-13
How This Section is Organized ....................... 6-3
Introduction .................................................. 6-2
MaintenanceRequirements ............................. 6-2
Part A - Scheduled Maintenance Services ......... 6-4
Part B - Owner Checks and Services ............... 6-9
Part C - PeriodicMaintenance Inspections ...... 6-13
Part D - Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants ...............................
........ 6-15
Part E - MaintenanceRecord ........................ 6-16
ScheduledMaintenance ................................. 6-4
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle
Boot and Seal Inspection .......................... 6-13
Throttle System Inspection ............................ 6-14
Transfer Case (Power Transfer Unit) and
Carrier Assembly-Differential (Rear Drive
Module) All-Wheel Drive Inspection ............. 6-14
Maintenance Schedule (cont.) Using Your ................................................... 6-4 Your Vehicle and theEnvironment ................... 6-2
Maintenance When Trailer Towing ..................... 4-43 MakingTurns ................................................. 4-41 Malfunction Indicator Light ................................ 3-42 Manual Lumbar Controls .................................... 1-5 Manual Operation ........................................... 3-32
ManualPassengerSeat .................................... 1-3 Matching Transmitter(s) to YourVehicle ............... 2-6 MemorySeat ................................................. 2-57
Message All-Wheel Drive DisableWarning .................... 3-52 Center ....................................................... 3-47
ChangeEngine Oil ...................................... 3-50 ChargingSystemIndicator ............................ 3-48
Door Ajar Warning ....................................... 3-51 Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning ............. 3-48 HighbeamOutWarning ................................ 3-55 Low Brake Fluid Warning .............................. 3-53 LowEngine Oil Level ................................... 3-50 Low Fuel Warning ....................................... 3-53 Low Oil Pressure ......................................... 3-49 Low Tire ..................................................... 3-50
LowWasher Fluid Warning ........................... 3-52 ParkLampWarning ..................................... 3-55 PASS-Key* 111 Security ................................. 3-51 ProgramMode ............................................ 3-54
ReaHr atch Ajar Warning ............. .......... 3-51
10
Message (cont.)
Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter
BatteryLowWarning ............................ 3-55
Service Traction System Warning ................... 3-47
ServiceVehicle Soon ................................... 3-54 TractionActive ............................................ 3-47
Mexico, Central America and Caribbean
Islands/Countries (Except Puerto Rico and
U.S. VirginIslands) ....................................... 7-4
Mirrors
AutomaticDimmingRearview ..,
.............. 2-33
Manual Rearview Mirror ............................ 2-33
OutsideConvexMirror ................................. 2-34
OutsideCurbViewAssistMirror .................... 2-34
OutsideHeatedMirrors ................................ 2-34
OutsidePowerMirror ................................... 2-33
NewVehicle Break-in ...................................... 2-20 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ........... 5-1 04
Older Children. Restraints ............................. 1-49 OnStarSystem@ ............................................. 2-35 Onstar@Personal Calling ................................. 2-36 Onstar@Services ............................................ 2-35
Onstar@Virtual Advisor .................................... 2-36 Operation .............................................. 3-26,3-28 Operation Tips ................................................ 3-34
Other Warning Devices ...................................... 3-6 Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-34
Outside Convex Mirror ............................................. 2-34 Curb View Assist Mirror ................................ 2-34 Heated Mirrors ............................................ 2-34 Power Mirror ............................................... 2-33
Overhead Console .......................................... 2-41
Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode .................................. 5-25
Owners, Canadian ............................................... ii Owner's Information .................................... 7-10
Odometer ...................................................... Off-Road Recovery ..........................................
Oil Engine ....................................................... Pressure Mzssage .......................................
3-37 4-15
-5-13
2-49
Park Aid ........................................................ Park Lamp Warning Message ...........................
Park (P) Shifting Into ................................................ Shifting Out of ............................................
3-22 3-55
2-27 2-30
11
Parking
Assist ................................................. .... 3-22
~
~
Brake ........................................................ 2-26
Over Things That Burn ............................. 2-30
Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle
Par(kPM) echanismCheck
...............
.... 6-12
Parking on Hills .......................................... 4-42
Part A - Scheduled Maintenance Services . . . . . . . . 6-4
Part B - OwnerChecks and Services .................. 6-9
Part C - Periodic Maintenance Inspections .......... 6-13
Part D - Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants .................................................. 6-15
Part E - Maintenance Record ........................... 6-16
Passing ................................................. 4-15, 4-41
PASS-Key@Ill ................................................. 2-17
PASS-Key@Ill Operation .................................. 2-18
PASS-Key@Ill Security Message ....................... 3-51
Perimeter Lighting ........................................... 3-17
Plan Ahead When Possible ................................ 7-7
Playing a Cassette Tape .................................. 3-85
Playing aCompactDisc .................. 3-74, 3-86, 3-97
Playing a Specific Loaded Compact Disc ............ 3-98
Playing the Radio ........................... 3-70, 3-77, 3-89
Power
Accessory Outlets ........................................ 3-24
DoorLocks .................................................. 2-9
Electrical System ......................................... 5-96
Six-WaySeats .............................................. 1-5
Steering Fluid .......................................... 5-35
Windows ...... ....................................... 2-14
12
Power Steering ............................................... 4-12
Primary Radio Controls .................................. 3-1 11
ProgramModeMessage .................................. 3-54
Programmable Automatic Door Locks .................. 2-9
ProgrammableModes ..... 2-51, 2-52, 2-53, 2-54, 2-55
Programming Mode
Entering ..................................................... 2-50
Exiting ....................................................... 2-56
ProgrammingtheHomeLinkTransmitter
......... 2-38
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......... 1-26
Radiator Pressure Cap .................................... 5-25 Radio Messages ..................................... 3-74, 3-83 Radios .......................................................... 3-69
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player ............... 3-1 14 Care of YourCD and DVD Player ................ 3-1 15 Care of Your CDs and DVDs ....................... 3-115 DAB Radio Antenna System ........................ 3-116 Radio with Cassette and CD ......................... 3-76 Radio with CD ............................................ 3-69 Radio with Six-Disc CD ................................ 3-88 Rear Seat Audio ........................................ 3-110 Setting the Time .......................................... 3-69
Radios (cont.)
Theft-Deterrent .......................................... 3-112
UnderstandingReception ............................ 3-114
RDS and DAB Messages ......................... 3-81, 3-93
RDSMessages .............................................. 3-74
Rear Hatch Ajar Warning Message .................... 3-51
RearReadingLamps ...................................... 3-18
RearSafetyBeltComfortGuides ...................... 1-44 Rear Seat Audio ........................................... 3-110
RearSeat Operation ......................................... 1-9
RearSeatOutsidePassenger Positions ............. 1-38
RearSeatPassengers, Safety Belts .................. 1-38
Rear Seat Radio Controls ............................... 3-111
Rear Storage Area .......................................... 2-45
RearWindowDefogger ................... 3-28, 3-30, 3-34
Rearview illirror, Automatic Dimming .................. 2-33
Rearview Mirrors ............................................. 2-33
RecliningSeatbacks .......................................... 1-6
RecreationalVehicleTowing ............................. 4-33
Remote Alarm .................................................. 2-6
Remote Control ............................................. 3-106
Remote Door Unlock ....................................... 3-64
i3rRivermote
uniock Zorliroi ...........................
P. r.4
L-S+
Remote Keyless EntrySystem ............................ 2-4
Remote Keyless EntrySystem, Operation . . . . . . . . 2-5
Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter Battery
LowWarningMessage .............................. 3-55
RemoteLockandUnlock Confirmation . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
Removing the Captain's Chairs ...................... i -5i
Removing the Extended Rear Convenience Center ....................................................... 2-46
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire .................................................. 5-75
Removing the Rear ConvenienceCenter on
Vehicles with the Third Row Stowable Seat ........ 2-48
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................... 5-68 Removing the Split BenchSeat ........................ 1-10
Removing the Stowable Seat ............................ 1-19 Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 5-52
Replacing BrakeSystem Parts .......................... 5-40
Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash .............................................. 1-84
Replacing the Captain's Chairs ......................... 1-16
Replacing the Extended Rear Convenience
Center ....................................................... 2-47
Replacingthe Rear ConvenienceCenter on
Vehicles with the Third Row Stowable Seat........ 2-48 Replacing the Split Bench Seat ......................... 1-12
Replacing the StowableSeat ............................ 1-20
Reporting Safety Defects
CanadianGovernment ................................... 7-9
u r\ wlet
.- I
ai
- n 8 - a ..-
lvlutula
.............................................
79
United States Government .............................. 7-8
Reprogramminga Single HomeLink@Button ....... 2-40
Resetting Defaults ........................................... 2-40
Restraint System Check ................................... 6-10
Checking Your Restraint Systems ................... 1-84
Repiacing Restraint System Paris AfteraCrash .......................................... 1-84
13
Restraint Systems Checking .................................................... 1-84 Replacing Parts ........................................... 1-84
Restraints, Head ............................................... 1-8 Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................... 2-21 Retro-Active Reset .......................................... 3-38 Right Front Passenger Position, Safety Belts ...... 1-37 Roadside
Assistance Program ....................................... 7-5 Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out ................... 4-32 RoofRackSystem .......................................... 2-42 Running Your Engine While You AreParked ....... 2-32
S
Safety Belt Reminder Light ............................................ 3-38
Safety Belts Care of ...................................................... 5-90 CenterRearPassenger Position .................... 1-42 Driver Position ............................................ 1-28 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 1-27 Questions and Answers AbouSt afety Belts ........ 1-26 Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children and Small Adults ......................... 1-44 RearSeatPassengers ................................. 1-38 Right Front Passenger Position ...................... 1-37
Safety Belts (cont.)
Safety Belt Extender .................................... 1-48
Safety Belt UseDuringPregnancy ................. 1-36
Safety Belts AreforEveryone ....................... 1-22
Safety Safety
Chains ................................................. Warnings and Symbols ..............................
4-4.0..
III
Scheduled Maintenance ..................................... 6-4
Seat Recall .................................................... 3-67
Seats
Captain Chairs ............................................ 1-14
Four-WayManualDriverSeat ..................... 1-3
Head Restraints ........................................ 1-8
HeatedSeats ........................................... 1-6
ManualLumbar ......................................... 1-5
Manual Passenger ......................................... 1-3
Memory ..................................................... 2-57
Rear Seat Operation ...................................... 1-9
Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 1-6
Six-WaPyoweSreats
.................. .......... 1-5
Split Bench Seats ..................................... 1-9
StowableSeat ......................................... 1-18
Secondary Latch System .................... , ..... 5-72
Securing a Child Restraint
CenterRearSeatPosition ............................ 1-69
Designed for the LATCH System ................... 1-66
Rear Outside Seat Position ........................... 1-66
Right Front Seat Position .............................. 1-71 Security Message, PASS-Key@Ill ...................... 3-51
14
Service ........................................................... 5-3
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
YourVehicle .............................................. 5-4 Doing Your OwnWork ................................... 5-4
EngineSoonLight ............................. ......... 3-42 Publications Ordering Information ..................... 7-9
TractionSystemWarningMessage ................. 3-47 VehicleSoonMessage ................................. 3-54
Service Bulletins ............................................... 7-9
Service Engine Soon Lighint the United States
or Check Engine Lightin Canada ..................... 3-42 ServiceManuals ............................................... 7-9
SettingPresetPTYs(RDSOnly) ....................... 3-93
Setting Preset Stations .................... 3-71, 3-79, 3-90
SettingtheTime ............................................. 3-69
Setting the Tone (BassTTreSle) .......... 3-77, 3-79, 3-91 Sheet Metal Damage ....................................... 5-92 Shifting Into Park(P) ....................................... 2-27
Shifting Out of Park(P) ................................... 2-30
ShoulderBeltHeightAdjuster ........................... 1-30 Skidding ........................................................ 4-17
- Some
Spare
OItr.hreerw-RI waincykW..e..a..t.h..e.r..T..ip..s...................................................
4-21
m 4A
W- I u
SpecialFabricCleaningProblems ..................... 5-88 Specifications, Capacities ............................... 5-102
Speedometer .................................................. 3-37
SBpelitnScehats StarStewriCtcheck
................. .............
.... ......... 1-9 ........... 6-11
Starting Your Engine ....................................... 2-21 Steering ........................................................ 4-12 Steering in Emergencies .................................. 4-14
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle Bootand Seal Inspection .......................... 6-13
Steering Tips .................................................. 4-13 Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ....................... 3-1 13
Stereo RCA Jacks ......................................... 3-102
Storage Areas Cell Phone Storage Area .............................. 2-41
Convenience Net ......................................... 2-45
Cupholder(s) ............................................... 2-41
Floor Console Storage Area .......................... 2-42
Front Armrest Storage Area ....
............ 2-42
GloBveox ..................................
........ 2-41
Overhead Console ................................... 2-41
Rear Convenience Center ............................. 2-46 Rear Storage Area ....................................... 2-45
RoofRackSystem ....................................... 2-42 Storage Compartment ...................................... 2-41
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire andTools ............... 5-79
.", StowableSeat ................................................
...................... 3r-L4 .u.-LI.n
:-
111
Qat I u ,
h4.. A IvIuu,
I-* a y I'cIG u I
u1Ivvw
1-18 4-22
Sun Visors ..................................................... 2-15
Sunglasses Storage Compartment ..................... 2-42 Sunroof ......................................................... 2-49 Switchbanks, Instrument Panel .......................... 3-18
15
T
Tachometer ...
...................................... 3-38
Taillamps
Back-up Lamps ........................................... 5-51
TurnSignal,andStoplamps .......................... 5-50
TCS Warning Light .......................................... 3-41
Theft-Deterrent, Radio .................................... 3-112
Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 2-16
Content Theft-Deterrent ................................ 2-16
PASS-Key@Ill ............................................. 2-1 7
PASS-Key@I l l Operation ............................... 2-18
Throttle System Inspection ............................... 6-14
Tilt Mirror ....................................................... 3-68
Tilt Wheel ........................................................ 3-7
Tips and Trouble ....................................... 3-109
Ti re
LowMessage .......................................... 3-50
Tire Inflation Check ........................................... 6-9
Tires ..................................................... 5-55, 5-92
Buying NewTires .................................... 5-60
Chains ................................................... 5-64
Changing a Flat Tire .................................... 5-67
CheckTire Pressure System ......................... 5-56
Compact Spare Tire ..................................... 5-85
If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 5-66
Inflation -- Tire Pressure ............................... 5-56
Inspection and Rotation ................................ 5-58
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 5-61
Tires (cont.)
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 5-62
WheelReplacement ..................................... 5-62
When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... 5-59
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater .................... 2-22
Topof the Instrument Panel ............................. 5-89
Top Strap ...................................................... 1-59
Top Strap AnchorLocation ............................... 1-60
TorqueLock ................................................... 2-29
Total Weight on Your Vehicle's Tires .................. 4-39
Towing
Recreational Vehicle ..................................... 4-33
Towinga Trailer .......................................... 4-36
Your Vehicle ............................................... 4-33
Traction
Active Message ........................................... 3-47
Control System(TCS) .................................. 4-11
Control SystemWarningLight ....................... 3-41
Service Traction System Warning Message ....... 3-47
Trailer Brakes ................................................. 4-40
Trailer Wiring Harness ....................
......... 4-43
Transaxle
Fluid, Automatic ........................................... 5-19
Transaxle Operation, Automatic ......................... 2-23
Transfer Case (Power Transfer Unit) .................. 5-46
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer Case Unit
Repair Manual .............................................. 7-9
Transportation Options .................... Trip Odometer ...........................
........... 7-7
..... 3-37
16
TurnandLane-Change Signals .......................... 3-8 TurnSignal/MultifunctionLever ........................... 3-7 TurnSignalsWhenTowingaTrailer .................. 4-42
UnderbodyFlushingService ............................. 6-12
UnderhoodFuseBlock .................................... 5-99
Understanding Radio Reception ....................... 3-114
UniformTirQe ualitGy rading
... .................. 5-61
SUtnaitesd
....................
............ 7-4
UnloFcekedback ..........................
, ...... 3-65
UsedReplacementWheels .............................. 5-63 UsingCleaneronFabric .................................. 5-88
UsingHomeLink@ ........................................... 2-40
UsingRDS .................................................... 3-72 UsingSongListMode ................................... 3-100
Ustrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) .............. 3-22
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) ............................................. 5-95
Service Parts Identification Label ................... 5-95
Vehicle Personalization .................................... 2-50
Automatic Door LocWUnlock .......................... 2-52
Delayed Locking ...............................
.... 2-53
DIC ........................................................ 3-59
Entering Programming Mode ......................... 2-50
Exiting Programming Mode ........................... 2-56
Headlamp Exit Delay ................................... 2-51
Memory Seat .............................................. 2-57
Remote Driver Unlock Control ....................... 2-54
RemoteLock and Unlock Confirmation ........... 2-55 Vehicle Storage .............................................. 5-41
Ventilation Adjustment ....
....................... 3-34
Video Screen ...................
.................. 3-103
Vinyl ............................................................. 5-89
VisorVanity Mirror .......................................... 2-15
Visors ........................................................... 2-15
\Inh;nln
V GI I I b l G
Control ........................................................ 4-7 DamageWarnings ........................................... iv Design ......................................................... 4-3 Loading ...................................................... 4-34 ServiceSoonMessage ................................. 3-54
n ayrrluI--wIl-s ......................................................... iV
Warm-up Shltt .................................
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ....,
.... 2-25 .... 3-35
Warnings
Hazard Warning Flashers ..............
.......... 3-6
Other Warning Devices .................................. 3-6
Safety and Symbols ..................................... iii
Vehicle Damage .......................................... iv
17
Washer Fluid LowWarning Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
Washing YourVehicle ...................................... 5-90
Weatherstrip Lubrication ................................... 6-10
Weight of the Trailer ........................................ 4-38
Weight of the Trailer Tongue ............................. 4-38
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use ........................ 5-15
What to Do with Used Oil ................................ 5-18
What to Use .......................................... 5-22, 5-36
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance ...........
... 5-62
Replacement ........................................... 5-62
When to Add Engine Oil .............................. 5-14
When to Change Engine Oil
(GM Oil Life System) ............................... 5-17
When to Check .............................................. 5-56
When to Check and Change ............................ 5-19
When to CheckPower Steering Fluid ................ 5-36
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill ......................................... 4-43
Where to Put the Restraint ............................... 1-58
Why Safety Belts Work .................................... 1-23
Window LockOut ........................................... 2-15
Windows ....................................................... 2-13
Power ........................................................ 2-14
Windshield, BackglassandWiperBlades ........... 5-91
Windshield Washer ........................................... 3-9
Fluid .......................................................... 5-36
Windshield WasherFluidLevelCheck ................. 6-9
Windshield Wiper
Blade Replacement ...................................... 5-53
Fuses ........................................................ 5-96
Windshield Wipers ............................................ 3-9
Winter Driving ................................................ 4-27
Wiper Blade Check .....................
............ 6-10
X
XMTMSatellite Radio Antenna System .............. 3-116
XMTMSatellite RadioService ....................... 3-114
Y
Your Driving. the Road.and YourVehicle ............. 4-2 Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 6-2
18
NOTES
UniDoc v2.0.1 (AGPLv3 Open Source License) - http://unidoc.io UniDoc - http://unidoc.io